Longman Academic Writing Series 3 Paragraphs to Essays KEY

Longman Academic Writing Series 3 Paragraphs to Essays KEY

Môn:

Tiếng Anh (TA8 ISW) 507 tài liệu

Trường:

Đại học Hoa Sen 4.8 K tài liệu

Thông tin:
118 trang 11 tháng trước

Bình luận

Vui lòng đăng nhập hoặc đăng ký để gửi bình luận.

Longman Academic Writing Series 3 Paragraphs to Essays KEY

Longman Academic Writing Series 3 Paragraphs to Essays KEY

162 81 lượt tải Tải xuống
Longman Academic Writing Series 3 Paragraphs to Essays
KEY
english (Đại học Hoa Sen)
Longman Academic
Writing Series
FOURTH EDITION
PARAGRAPHS TO ESSAYS
Teacher’s Manual
Jane Curtis
with contributions from Lindsey Rothschild
Educational Technology Consultant
3
Longman Academic Writing Series 3: Paragraphs to Essays, Fourth Edition
Teacher’s Manual
Copyright © 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior permission of the publisher.
Pearson Education, 10 Bank Street, White Plains, NY 10606
Staff Credits: The people who made up the Longman Academic Writing Series 3
Teacher’s Manual team, representing editorial, production, design, and manufacturing,
are Eleanor Barnes, Shelley Gazes, Amy McCormick, Lise Minovitz, Liza Pleva, and
Joan Poole.
Text Composition: TSI Graphics
ISBN-10: 0-13-291567-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-13-291567-0
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manu
CONTENTS
Introduction
................................................................................................
iv
General Teaching Notes .............................................................................. 1
Chapter Teaching Notes .............................................................................. 9
Chapter 1 Notes .............................................................................................. 10
Chapter 2 Notes .............................................................................................. 14
Chapter 3 Notes .............................................................................................. 18
Chapter 4 Notes .............................................................................................. 22
Chapter 5 Notes .............................................................................................. 26
Chapter 6 Notes .............................................................................................. 29
Chapter 7 Notes .............................................................................................. 35
Chapter 8 Notes .............................................................................................. 39
Chapter 9 Notes .............................................................................................. 44
Chapter 10 Notes ............................................................................................ 49
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics ..................................................... 53
Chapter Quizzes .......................................................................................... 64
Chapter Quiz Answer Key ........................................................................ 83
Student Book Answer Key
......................................................................
89
al
Contents iii
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the new edition of Level 3 in the Longman Academic Writing Series, a five-level
series that prepares English language learners for academic coursework. This book, formerly
called Introduction to Academic Writing, is intended for intermediate students in university,
college, or in secondary school programs. It offers a carefully structured approach that focuses on
writing as a process. It teaches rhetoric and sentence structure in a straightforward manner, using
a step-by-step approach, high-interest models, and varied practice types.
Like the previous editions, this book integrates instruction in paragraph and essay organization
and sentence structure with the writing process. It carefully guides students through the steps of
the writing process to produce the well-organized, clearly developed paragraphs that are essential
to academic writing in English. You will find a wealth of realistic models to guide writers and
clear explanations supported by examples that will help your students through typical rough
spots. These explanations are followed by the extensive practice that learners need to assimilate
writing skills and write with accuracy and confidence. There are interactive tasks throughout
the text—pair work, small-group activities, and full-class discussions—that engage students in
the learning process and complement the solitary work that writers must do. The tasks progress
from recognition exercises to controlled production and culminate in communicative Try It Out
activities.
The first part of this book presents comprehensive chapters on how to format and structure
basic and specific types of academic paragraphs. Students will learn how to organize different
paragraph types, including narrative, process, definition, cause / effect, and comparison / contrast
paragraphs. In the second part, learners are introduced to the basic concepts of essay writing.
Finally, the extensive appendices and a thorough index make the text a valuable and easy-to-use
reference tool.
Whats New in This Edition
Instructors familiar with the previous edition will find these new features:
Chapter objectives provide clear goals for instruction;
Two new vocabulary sections, Noticing Vocabulary and Applying Vocabulary explain specific
types of vocabulary from the writing models and support its use in the Writing Assignment;
Selected writing models have been updated or replaced, while old favorites have been retained
and improved;
Try It Out! activities challenge students to be creative and apply the skills they have studied;
Writing Tips contain strategies that experienced writers use;
Self-Assessments ask students to evaluate their own progress;
Timed Writing practice develops students’ writing fluency.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Introduction iv
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
The Teacher’s Manual
The Teacher’s Manual includes everything you need to teach this course. It includes
these features:
General Teaching Notes explain how to use the Student Book effectively;
Chapter Teaching Notes provide step-by-step instructions on how to teach each section, as
well as variations and expansions for the practice activities;
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics facilitate fair and easy grading. They can be
photocopied and used for all students in the class;
Chapter Quizzes assess students’ writing and editing skills. They can be photocopied and used
for all students in the class. An answer key for the quizzes is also provided;
The Student Book Answer Key provides answers for all Student Book practice activities.
Introduction v
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
1
GENERAL
TEACHING NOTES
ongman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
General
GENERAL TEACHING NOTES
These notes describe the chapter organization in the Student Book and provide general suggestions
on how to approach each section. They also include information about the Writing Assignment
Scoring Rubrics and Chapter Quizzes in this manual, as well as suggestions on how to integrate
technology and a brief description of MyEnglishLab Writing 3 (www.myenglishlab.com for
additional writing skill practice, composition practice, and assessments). Step-by-step teaching
suggestions for the Student Book are in the Chapter Teaching Notes that follow.
Student Book
The Student Book contains 10 chapters divided into two parts. Part I (Chapters 1–8) presents
comprehensive chapters on how to format and structure basic and specific types of academic
paragraphs. Students will learn how to organize different paragraph types, including narrative,
how-to, definition, cause / effect, and compare / contrast paragraphs. In Part II (Chapters 9
and 10), learners are introduced to the basic concepts of essay writing. Finally, the extensive
appendices and a thorough index make the text a valuable and easy-to-use reference tool.
The chapters are generally organized as described below.
Chapter
Opener
This page includes the chapter title, a photo, and a list of objectives. The chapter title and photo
provide an opportunity for students to express ideas about the chapter theme, exercise their
imaginations, and share their experiences. The objectives preview the chapter writing skills and
provide a roadmap for teachers and students. You may want to spend 10 to 15 minutes on this page.
Introduction
The introduction includes a brief presentation of the elements of academic writing or the genre
that is the focus of the chapter. This section has the following additional components.
Writing
Model
Each chapter presents a model paragraph (Chapters 1–8) or a model essay (Chapters 9–10). These
provide appropriate models for the chapter Writing Assignment. The models are followed by questions
that help students notice the important structure, content, and language displayed in the models. You
may want to add your own questions and have students further analyze the writing models.
N o t i c i n g Vocabulary
This section highlights, explains, and provides practice with useful words and phrases from the
model paragraphs. Types of vocabulary include word families, compound words, synonyms,
antonyms, and collocations. Students have the opportunity to review the vocabulary later in the
chapter and apply it in the chapter writing assignment.
Skill-Building: Organization
The organization sections focus on the structure and content of paragraphs and essays. In Part I,
the focus is on the paragraph. Chapter 1 presents an introduction to the basic features and
the format of academic paragraphs. Chapter 3 deals with paragraph structure. Chapter 2 and
Chapters 4–8 explore rhetorical patterns that include narration, logical division of ideas, process,
definition, cause / effect, and comparison / contrast. In Part II, the focus in on essays. Chapter 9
guides students from paragraph to essay writing, and Chapter 10 presents opinion essays.
L Teaching Notes 2
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Skill-Building: Sentence Structure
The sentence structure sections help students to understand the building blocks of simple,
compound, and complex sentences, including how to correct fragments, run-ons, and comma
splices. Brief explanations and clear charts help students understand the basic elements of
English sentence structure.
Practice Activities for Organization and Sentence Structure
Practice activities in both the organization and the sentence structure sections reinforce
information that is presented. Activities progress from controlled to productive. Try It Out!
activities challenge students to apply what they have learned. An Answer Key for the activities is
on pages 89–108 of this manual.
Going Over Explanations in the Skill-Building Sections: Options
1. Read the material aloud as students look at their books. Pause to restate or stress key
points, add examples, and/or ask questions to check comprehension.
2. Have students read the material first, either for homework or in class. Then call on students
to read the material aloud.
3. Have students close their books. Use a projector to display the page to the class so that all
eyes are on the same part of the text. Read the material aloud or have students do so.
Practice and Try It Out! Activities: Options
1. Have students complete activities alone to develop independent thinking.
2. Ask students to complete tasks with partners or in small groups to increase interaction and
promote communication and collaboration skills.
3. Have students complete tasks at home if tasks are time consuming and/or class time is
limited.
4. As students are working on the activities, walk around the classroom. Observe what
students are doing and offer help as needed.
Going Over Answers to Practice and Try It Out! Activities: Options
1. Go over the answers orally (e.g., call on individual students or read the answers aloud)
when a task has students choose from among options shown in the book. For activities
with a large amount of text (e.g., an entire paragraph), have students number the lines of
the paragraph so that they can easily discuss their answers.
2. Have a student or students write answers on the board and then go over the answers. Give
writers the chance to correct their own errors before eliciting corrections from the class.
Alternatively, select students to read and correct items on the board. In this way, more
students can be involved in the correction process.
3. Have students compare answers with a partner or members of a group and discuss any
questions or disagreements.
4. Have pairs or groups of students who worked together compare answers with another pair
or group.
5. Have students exchange books with a partner and check each other’s answers.
6. Display a practice exercise from the book using, for example, a document camera and
projector or an interactive whiteboard. Have the class tell you or a student how to complete
or correct the sentences.
7. Display the answers on a shared website. Have students check their work at home.
8. Collect students’ written work or view their online postings. Correct their work outside of
class.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
General Teaching Notes 3
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ongman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
General
A p p l y i n g Vocabulary
This section provides an opportunity for students to apply the vocabulary from the Noticing
Vocabulary section and prepares them to use these words and phrases in the writing assignment.
Writing Process and Writing Assignments
The writing process as presented in this book has five steps, which are explained and illustrated
on pages 21–27 of the Student Book. Each writing assignment clearly and systematically leads
students through the following steps, helping them internalize the process.
Step 1: Prewrite to get ideas. Students generate ideas through a variety of strategies such as
listing, freewriting, and clustering. This step may be done in class, with students working alone
or with partners.
Step 2: Organize your ideas. Students select main points from Step 1 and organize them in a
logical order. Students often prefer to do this step at home, but it may also be done in class.
Step 3: Write the first draft. Students use their prewriting notes and any outline they have
prepared to write the first draft of their paper. This step can be done in class or for homework.
If done in class, you can assist and observe what students can do in a given length of time. If
done for homework, class time is saved, and students who need it can take more time for the
assignment at home.
Step 4: Revise and edit the draft. Students review the content and organization of their
draft and make notes for revisions. In class, they work with a partner to peer review each
other’s work. (Peer review is explained on pages 25–26 of the Student Book.) A Peer Review
Worksheet provided at the back of the Student Book for each chapter’s writing assignment
guides the reviewers through the process. After peer review, students mark up their own papers
with changes to be made and write a second draft. Students then use the Writer’s Self-Check
provided at the back of the Student Book for each chapter to review their second drafts. They
mark up their papers with additional changes. If needed, have students review the correction
symbols in Appendix E (pages 250–252).
Step 5: Write a new draft. In this step, students write a new (final) draft to turn in to you.
If possible, allow an additional one or two days between the second and final draft to give
students time to see their writing with fresh eyes.
Collecting and Evaluating Writing Assignments: Options
1. Have students hand in or email their work to you. Another option is to have students
upload their assignments to a blog or a class website.
2. You may also want to collect students’ prewriting, marked-up first drafts, and writer’s self-
checks to understand their thinking and assess their progress.
3. For suggestions on how to evaluate student work and give feedback, see the Writing
Assignment Scoring Rubrics on pages 53–63 of this manual. See page 7 of this manual for
more information about the rubrics. For correction symbols, see Appendix E on page 250
of the Student Book.
4. You may want to give students feedback before they submit their final drafts. For example,
some instructors do not grade but give students guidance and direction on their second
drafts. You can do this by using criteria on the Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics and
pointing out three or four points for individual improvement.
L Teaching Notes 4
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Organizing and Storing Assignments: Options
1. Have students keep their handwritten writing assignments, or printouts of paragraphs, in a
folder (portfolio) that they use for that purpose only.
2. Have students working on computers set up a system of folders to store their drafts for
each writing assignment. Give them guidelines for naming their files and for renaming
them when they write a new draft.
Portfolio Assessment
Some teachers use student portfolios to assess students’ assignments over the course. For the
purposes of assessment, a portfolio is a paper or electronic folder that includes these parts:
(1) two to four samples of final drafts of student assignments along with the earlier drafts,
and (2) an introduction in which students explain what they have learned throughout the term.
Advantages of portfolio assessment are:
It encourages students to notice and appreciate their progress through the course.
It encourages students to evaluate their strengths and weaknesses as writers.
It involves students in the evaluation process.
Depending on the approach of an instructor or department / program, portfolio assessment may
count as 30 to 50 percent of the final grade.
Suggested Procedure
1. At the beginning of the course, explain the process and grading system to students. Tell
them to keep copies of final assignments in a paper or electronic folder.
2. At the end of the course, have students review their assignments and select the ones they
want to revise for inclusion in the portfolio. (You may stipulate which assignments they
may choose from.)
3. Have students prepare the introduction to the portfolio. The following questions should
help them assess their learning:
How have your writing practices changed?
How has your writing improved?
What are your strengths as a writer?
What are your weaknesses?
How do the papers you have included demonstrate your progress and strengths?
4. Provide a grade for students’ assignments and self-assessment.
5. Discuss the grades and self-evaluations with students if needed.
Self-Assessment
All chapters include self-assessment checklists. These give students the chance to review the
chapter objectives and reflect on what they have learned in the chapter. They decide which skills
they can do well and which they need to practice more. You can go over this list with the class
to get a general sense of how students assess their progress. You can also have students give you
their self-evaluations. This feedback will help inform what kind of review or additional practice
your students need.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
General Teaching Notes 5
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ongman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
General
Options
1. On note cards, have students write what they can do well and what they need to practice
more. Then collect the note cards.
2. Have students email you about what they understand well and what they need to practice
more.
3. If your students keep journals, have them write about their progress and/or doubts about
the chapter.
4. Use the information from the self-assessments as the basis for one-on-one conferences
with students.
Expansion (Parts I and II)
This section includes two activities to help students further develop their writing ability. The first
is a timed writing, and the second varies from chapter to chapter.
Timed
Writing
Timed-writing tasks prepare students for situations in which they need to organize their ideas
and write quickly, such as tests. If desired, you can display a large clock on a screen in your
classroom. Remind students to follow the suggested times for the timed writing. The Timed
Writing prompt relates to the chapter theme and writing genre. Feel free to replace the suggested
prompts with topics that suit your particular class. If you decide to do so, select a topic that
is related to themes that students have explored in the chapter to help reduce the pressure
that students feel when writing in class under time restrictions and to allow students to better
demonstrate what they have learned in the chapter.
Additional
Writing
In this section, students have an opportunity to expand on the chapter theme and practice an
expanded list of academic writing skills, including journaling, summarizing, paraphrasing,
writing emails to professors, and writing an opinion for publication.
Journaling
Keeping a journal encourages students to write about what interests them and provides them a
safe place for them to express themselves in English. Journal entries can also serve as starting
points for more formal paragraph assignments. To foster fluency, it is best to respond only to the
content, ignore errors (unless content is unclear), and avoid grading based on accuracy.
Options
1. Have students write their journal entries in a paper or electronic notebook.
2. Have students post journal entries on a blog. The blog can be set up to be viewed by the
teacher only or by the whole class. It can include photos, audio, and video.
3. Have students begin each class by writing in their journals for 5–10 minutes.
4. With the student’s permission, read especially thoughtful, funny, or intriguing journal
entries to the class.
Appendices
The appendices provide a list of grammar terms used in the text, charts illustrating types
of sentences, a chart of sentence types and connecting words, transition signals, rules for
punctuation, correction symbols, the Peer-Review Worksheets, and the Writer’s Self-Check
Worksheets.
L Teaching Notes 6
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
The Online Teacher’s Manual
Features specific to the Teacher’s Manual that will help you teach this course include the
following items.
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics
The photocopiable Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics on pages 53–63 of this manual help you
grade completed assignments fairly and easily. They also help students understand the basis for
their grades. Each rubric reflects the chapter skills focus, the Writing Assignment directions, and
the Writer’s Self-Check worksheet criteria. You can adjust the point system for each criterion
to suit the needs and goals of your class. Below the rubric in the Comments section, you can
write specific comments and suggestions to the student, such as: “Great details! Be careful about
spelling.”
Suggested Procedure
1. Hand out copies of the rubric or post it to a class website so that students can refer to it
when completing the assignment.
2. After you collect the assignments, use the rubrics to score students’ work.
3. Return the rubrics with the marked-up assignments.
4. Follow up with teacher-student consultations as needed.
Chapter Quizzes
The photocopiable chapter quizzes on pages 64–82 of this Teacher’s Manual will help you assess
your students’ proficiency with the material covered in the chapter. Each quiz has three parts
and easily gradable items worth 20 points. Parts A and B cover the organization and sentence
structure sections of each chapter. Part C is an editing exercise. The quizzes can be used in class
or as take-home assignments.
Chapter Quiz Answer Key
Use the answer key on pages 83–88 to score the quizzes yourself. Alternatively, copy the
answers, write them on the board, or post them to a class website. Have students correct their
own papers or exchange papers and correct a partner’s paper.
Student Book Answer Key
Answers to the practice exercises in the Student Book are on pages 89–108 of this Teacher’s
Manual.
Integrating Technology
Using technology engages students, increases their motivation, and helps them develop skills
that are vital for full participation in higher education. Technology can also facilitate interaction
among students outside of class. Such interaction can promote a sense of community and foster
the supportive culture essential to a classroom of developing writers. Here are some things to
consider when integrating technology in an academic writing course.
Student Skill Levels
Many students have access to computers, tablets, and smart phones and already have technology
skills. They use applications to communicate in writing (via email, text messaging, and social
networking sites) and to self-publish (on blogs and other websites). Students with little or no such
experience can acquire the skills they need with help from you and their classmates.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
General Teaching Notes 7
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ongman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
General
Learning Management Systems
Some schools provide a learning management system (LMS). You can also use free web-based
learning management systems. An LMS provides a password-protected community for you and
your students, and it gives you a place to keep course materials, such as information for students,
work written by students, and teacher records. An LMS also offers students a way to submit
assignments, post to a blog, communicate with you, and participate in online class discussions.
Students who are familiar with social networking sites will already have some skills needed to
use an LMS.
Free Online Tools
A variety of free online tools can help you set up systems for organizing or showcasing students’
work. For example:
A class website gives you a place to post your syllabus, provide other course information, and
publish student work.
A wiki allows all class members to contribute writing, discuss ideas, and provide feedback.
Online presentations allow students to showcase their individual or collaborative work and are
easily embedded within an LMS, website, or wiki.
Blogs allow individual students to publish their writing easily.
MyEnglishLab
Writing
Outside of class, students can go to MyEnglishLab Writing 3 at www.myenglishlab.com for
additional writing skill practice, composition practice, and assessments. This online program
includes:
Automatically graded and teacher-graded pre-tests and post-tests
Automatically graded skill presentation and practice (grammar, sentence structure, mechanics,
punctuation, and organization) with feedback on errors
Genre-specific writing presentations, models, and teacher-graded assignments
Timed and untimed writing options
A gradebook that both teachers and students can access
L Teaching Notes 8
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
9
CHAPTER
TEACHING NOTES
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
CHAPTER TEACHING NOTES
PA R T I
C H A P T E R
1
Academic
Paragraphs
(pages 2–30)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 2)
Write the chapter title on the board and
read it aloud. Elicit examples from students
of academic writing. Put examples on the
board.
Have students look at the photos and say
what they know about the movie Star
Wars and George Lucas. Have students
answer the question under the photos. Use
student answers to write a list on the board
of the ways that George Lucas changed
moviemaking.
Point out the list of objectives. Explain
that these are the skills that students will
learn in the chapter. Read the objectives
aloud, or have students read them. Do not
spend much time at this point defining or
explaining terms used in the objectives.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 3–5)
Go over the introductory text. Emphasize
that academic writing is the kind of writing
students do in school and that there are
rules to follow in academic writing.
Point out that students will have many
opportunities to practice academic writing
in your class, starting with Chapter 1 of the
Student Book.
Analyzing the Model
(page 3)
Read the model paragraph aloud, and have
students read along silently.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page 4)
Have students read the explanation about
word families.
Variation:
Write examples of noun and
verb pairs (e.g., writer-write, division-
divide, multiplication-multiply) on the
board. Include a pair that has more than
one possible answer (e.g., identity-identify,
identification-identify). Explain the concept
of word family. Then have students read the
explanation and the chart of examples.
Point out that the words in the chart come
from the model paragraph. Also point out
the spelling patterns in noun and verb word
endings.
Read the directions for Practices 1 and
2 aloud. Point out that students must use
nouns and verbs from the writing model
to complete Practice 1. Point out the noun
endings that students can use in Practice 2.
Have students complete the tasks. Then go
over the answers with the class.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 5–10)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out the important terms: paragraph,
topic, controlling idea, format.
Lo aching Notes 10
EXTENSION:
Lead a discussion about the kinds of
writing that students do in a typical day.
Make a list of student answers on the
board. Find out whether students have done
academic writing and, if so, ask for details
of their academic writing experience.
EXTENSION:
In small groups, have students make a list
of four to five additional noun-verb pairs
that they have noticed when reading in
English. Encourage students to add the
words to their notebooks, or compile a list
and post it on your class website or blog.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Formatting the Page
(page 6)
Explain when students will do handwritten
academic writing in your class and when
they will do work on a computer. Point
out that there are formatting rules for both
handwritten work and work done on a
computer.
Focus first on the format of handwritten
assignments. Point out the terms and rules
on page 6. If possible, display the example
on page 7 on a screen in your classroom.
Then do the same for the computer
formatting information.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity on page 10 aloud. Because it is
students’ first academic writing assignment
in this book, have them do the exercise
in class. Walk around the classroom as
students are working. Check the format
of their paragraphs and provide help as
needed. Collect students’ papers.
Variation:
If you have students who choose
to use a computer for their self-introductions,
have them bring laptops to class.
Go over the Writing Tip on page 10. Have
students add a title to the paragraph that
they wrote for the Try It Out! activity.
MECHANICS
(pages 10–13)
Explain that academic writing requires
correct capitalization. Then go over the
introductory text.
Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud.
Have students use the chart on pages 10–11
to complete the exercise. Go over the
answers.
Read the directions for Practices 4 and 5
aloud. Have students complete the tasks
alone. Go over the answers. (Note: Students
can mark pages 10 and 11 in their books
[e.g., with a paper clip or a small piece of
paper] so that they can easily go back to the
chart on those pages to find capitalization
rules when they need them.)
Explain that students may often be asked
for their opinions. Point out that students
should always be respectful when giving
their opinions and that they must have
reasons to explain their opinions.
Return the paragraphs that students wrote
for the Try It Out! activity on page 10.
(Read the paragraphs before returning them
to learn more about your students’ writing
styles and proficiency levels, but do not
mark the papers.) Read the directions for
the Try It Out! activity on page 13 aloud.
Have students complete the activity.
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 14–20)
Put these three examples on the board:
1. Luke Skywalker.
2. Luke Skywalker and his friends battled.
3. Luke Skywalker and his friends battled
the evil Empire.
Have students read the definition of a
sentence at the top of page 14 and identify
which of the three examples best fits the
definition of a sentence.
Simple Sentences
(page 14)
Put the following terms on the board:
subject, verb, simple sentence, compound
subject, compound verb. Explain the
meanings.
Go over the introductory text. Point out the
simple sentence patterns and the examples.
Also point out how nouns and verbs fit
into the simple sentence patterns. For more
information, students can look at the list
of grammar terms in Appendix A on pages
240–242.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 11
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Have students rewrite their self-introduction
paragraphs and hand them in. Mark the
paragraphs using the correction symbols
in Appendix E on pages 250–252. Limit
your corrections to (1) “nfs” (needs further
support); (2) what students have learned
in Chapter 1 (capitalization, subject-verb
agreement, and fragments); and (3) one
or two recurring sentence structure or
grammar problems that you see. Do not
return the papers until students have
completed the Sentence Structure section of
Chapter 1.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Phrases
(page 15)
Have students read the example sentences
at the top of the page. Point out that the
groups of words in parentheses are phrases.
Emphasize that a phrase is not a sentence—
it is a group of words, but it does not have a
subject + verb combination.
Point out that the phrases in the example
sentences all contain a preposition followed
by a noun or pronoun.
Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Have students work with a partner to
complete the task. Check the answers of the
first two students who finish the exercise.
Then have those two students check the
answers of the next two pairs that finish.
Have students continue checking the
work of their classmates until everyone’s
work has been checked. Do the same for
Practice 7.
Subject-Verb Agreement
(page 16)
Have students read the examples at the top
of the page. Then have students look at the
five rules for agreement, paying special
attention to the highlighted subjects and
verbs.
Read the directions for Practices 8 and 9
aloud. Point out that all five errors in
Practice 9 are subject-verb agreement
errors. Have students complete the tasks.
Then go over the answers.
Variation:
Have students write the
complete paragraph for Practice 9 as a
homework assignment. Have them use two
different colors of ink—one to write the
paragraph and another to make corrections.
When checking the papers, also look at how
students formatted the paragraph and make
suggestions for improvement.
Fragments
(page 18)
Review the patterns for simple sentences
on page 14. Then go over the introductory
text on page 18. (Remind students that
they can refer to the list of grammar
terms in Appendix A on pages 240–242 if
necessary.)
Read the directions for Practices 10 and 11
aloud. Point out that all four errors in
Practice 11 are fragment errors. Have
students complete the exercises. Then go
over the answers.
Variation:
Have students work with
a partner to compare their answers for
Practices 10 and 11 before you go over
answers with the class.
Applying Vocabulary
(page 19)
Have students go to page 4 and review the
information about noun and verb forms.
Say a verb and have students call out the
noun that is in the same word family.
Read the directions for Practice 12, Part A
aloud. Have students fill in the chart. Go
over the answers. Display the chart so that
students can see the correct word forms.
Read the directions for Practice 12, Part B
aloud. Emphasize that students must use
nouns or verbs from the chart in Part A.
Have students complete the task.
THE WRITING PROCESS
(pages 21–27)
Go over the introductory text.
Listing
(page 21)
Step 1: Explain the purpose of prewriting
and that listing is just one prewriting
technique that good writers use. Have
students read the first two examples and
discuss the differences. Next, have students
explain what the writer did in the third
example.
Lo aching Notes 12
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Return students’ self-introduction
paragraphs from the Try It Out! activity
on page 13 with your corrections. Explain
what the correction symbols mean. Have
students look at the correction symbols in
Appendix E on pages 250–252. In class,
have students rewrite their paragraphs
(either handwritten or typed). Answer
questions and provide help as needed. Post
the revised and edited paragraphs on a class
website or blog.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity at the top of page 23 aloud. Have
students complete the task alone.
Step 2: Have students read the introductory
text.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity at the bottom of page 23 aloud.
Have students complete the task alone.
Step 3: Have students read the introductory
text and first draft. Point out that there
are errors and that the author will make
revisions later in the writing process.
Step 4: Explain revising and editing.
Point out the Chapter 1 Peer Review
worksheet in Appendix F (page 254).
Explain that students did peer review when
they completed the Try It Out! activity on
page 13.
Have students read the first draft with peer
edits and comments on page 25 and look
for changes in the second draft on page 26.
Point out the Chapter 1 Writer’s Self-Check
(page 255), and explain its purpose.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students read and note the differences in
the final draft on page 27. If you wish,
point out the Chapter 1 Writing Assignment
Scoring Rubric on page 54 of this Teacher’s
Manual, and explain its purpose.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 27–28)
Step 1: Have students bring the lists that
they made for the Try It Out! activity at
the top of page 23 to class. Go over the
instructions for Step 1 (on page 27). Have
students answer the question in Step 1 and
make any changes to their lists.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students modify their outlines or create new
ones based on changes that they made to
their lists in Step 1.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students write draft one either in class
or at home. Depending on your course
requirements, have students review the page
formatting rules for handwritten or typed
assignments on pages 6–9.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students read the procedures for peer review
(page 253). Then summarize the procedures
and read the questions on the Chapter 1
Peer Review (page 254) aloud. Have
students work with a partner and use the
worksheet to review each other’s drafts. If
needed, have students review the correction
symbols in Appendix E (pages 250–252).
Have writers revise their drafts and write
draft two based on their partner’s feedback
and their own ideas either in class or at
home.
Have students read the Writer’s Self-Check
section (page 253). Go over the Chapter 1
Writer’s Self-Check (page 255). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 1
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 53 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 29)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6
of this manual. Point out that students will
practice all of the skills listed again.
EXPANSION
(pages 29–30)
Timed Writing
(page 29)
Read the instructions aloud. (Note:
Students may be uneasy about writing with
a time limit. Reassure them that they will
not be graded.) Encourage them not to skip
the prewriting step because it will help
them write a better paragraph.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 13
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Conduct a discussion about the writing
process. Ask questions like these: Which
prewriting techniques have you used in the
past? Were they helpful? How many drafts
of a paper do you usually write? Why is it
useful to write multiple drafts?
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Read the prompt. Indicate when students
should begin writing. Signal them when the
suggested time for each step is up (i.e., after
2 minutes, 9 minutes, 15 minutes, etc.)
Collect the papers after 30 minutes.
Conduct a brief discussion about the timed
writing experience. Ask students how it felt.
Did they follow all the steps? Were they
able to finish in time? What, if anything,
will they do differently next time?
Decide how you will mark students’
papers. It may be enough to check the
topic sentence, supporting sentences, and
conclusion. It is not necessary to mark
errors or give a grade.
Journal Writing
(page 30)
Ask a few introductory questions: “What
is a journal? What is its purpose or value?
Have you ever kept a journal? How did
you write it (by hand in a notebook or
on a computer)? Who read it? Have your
teachers ever asked you to keep a journal?”
Provide information about how students
will produce journals for your class.
Explain who will read their journal entries.
Point out the Writing Tip on page 30.
Go over the introductory text and the
prompt.
Have students write in class or at home.
You may also choose to have them begin
writing in class and complete their entries
for homework.
Variation:
Instead of the journal topic
given on page 30, have students write
about a topic of your choice or one of the
following topics: your favorite possession,
your worst habit, the people you live with, a
movie star or singer you like.
C H A P T E R
2
Narrative
Paragraphs
(pages 31–50)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 31)
Write the chapter title on the board and read
it aloud. Point out that a narrative tells a
story.
Have students look at the photo and answer
the question, giving specific details as
appropriate.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out that students will write
about their own memorable experience at
the end of Chapter 2.
Variation:
Have students imagine what
happened before the photo was taken. In
small groups, have students tell a story
about what happened. Have a reporter from
one or two groups tell their group’s story to
the class.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 32–33)
Go over the introductory text. Emphasize
again that a narrative paragraph tells a story
in time order.
Analyzing the Model
(page 32)
Read the model paragraph aloud, and have
students read along silently.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions. Go
over the answers with the class.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page 33)
Have students read the explanation. Then
read the directions for Practice 1 aloud. Have
students complete the tasks. Then go over
the answers. Do the same for Practice 2.
Variation:
Have students note that for
pronunciation, the first word in a compound
word is stressed. As an example, point out
the difference in word stress between green
house (a house that is green; not a compound
noun) and greenhouse (a glass building used
for growing plants; a compound noun).
Lo aching Notes 14
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Regularly begin class by having students
write in their journals for 10–15 minutes
on topics related to those they have been or
will be working on in class. See more on
journaling in the General Teaching Notes
on page 6 of this manual.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 34–38)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out the importance of time order in
narrative paragraphs.
Time Order Signals
(page 34)
Have students look at the chart. Emphasize
that these words and phrases are important
because they help the reader follow the
order of actions and events in a narration.
Also point out the use of commas.
Read the directions for Practice 3. Have
students complete the task.
Read the directions for Practice 4, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete each
paragraph and then read each one from start
to end.
Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students complete the task and then
compare their answers with a partner.
Variation:
Have students explain how they
knew the logical time order for each group
of sentences.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Have students complete the
exercise. Collect their papers.
PURPOSE
(pages 38–39)
Go over the introductory text, pointing out
that most stories have a purpose. Clearly
explain the terms inform, persuade, and
entertain.
Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Have students complete the task with a
partner or in a small group. Go over the
answers.
Lead a class discussion based on the
questions at the bottom of page 38.
Read the directions for Practice 7, Parts A
and B aloud. Make sure that students know
the meaning of blizzard. Have students
complete the tasks. Then go over the
answers.
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 39–44)
Have students read the introductory text on
page 39.
Analyzing the Model
(page 39)
Explain that “Omusubi Kororin” is a
folktale. Ask students to explain what a
folktale is and give examples. Then go over
the introductory text.
Read the model aloud, and have students
read along silently.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 15
EXTENSION:
In small groups, have students make a
list of four to five additional compound
nouns that include one of the words in the
Practice 2 box (e.g., daytime, daylight,
daycare, nighttime, nightlife, night owl,
grandmother, stepmother). Encourage
them to add the words to their notebooks,
or compile a list and post it on your class
website or blog.
EXTENSION:
Divide the class into small groups. Have
each student tell the group a story about an
important family event or a funny experience
in their life. Encourage students to ask their
classmates questions when the events are not
clear. Have students emphasize time-order
signals in their storytelling.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Have students return to the same groups
that they were in when they told a story
about an important family event or a funny
experience in their life. Have students
choose one story and discuss the purpose of
that story. Have students identify details in
the story that are important for the purpose.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Compound Sentences
(page 40)
Write this sentence on the board: An old
couple lived in the countryside. Point out
the single subject-verb combination. Then
contrast the sentence with the example at
the bottom of page 40. Do not give a lot of
detail—focus on the fact that there are two
clauses (two subject-verb combinations)
and that the word so connects them.
Point out the meaning of simple sentence
and compound sentence.
Coordinating Conjunctions
(pages 41–44)
Have students read the examples in
the chart. Discuss the meaning of the
coordinating conjunctions. Also point out
that there is a comma after the first subject-
verb combination (clause) of a compound
sentence.
Have students review the four patterns for
simple sentences on page 14. Point out that
there is no comma between two words or
two phrases in a simple sentence.
Read the directions for Practice 8, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Go over the answers.
Variation:
In Part B, have students
underline the subject(s) in each sentence
once and double underline the verb(s) as
they are doing the exercise so that they
can see simple sentences and compound
sentences more easily.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise and
then write the sentences on the board. Do
the same for Practice 10.
Read the directions for Practice 10 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers with the class.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity on page 44 aloud. Have students
do the exercise and hand it in. Mark
corrections that focus on coordinating
conjunctions.
PUNCTUATION
(pages 44–46)
Have students read the introductory text.
Three Comma Rules
(page 44)
Have students read the examples in the
chart, paying special attention to the
highlighted commas. Point out the rules for
commas.
Read the instructions for Practice 11,
Parts A and B aloud. Have students
complete the tasks and then compare
answers with a partner. Discuss the answers
with the class, focusing on meaning and the
use of commas.
Applying Vocabulary
(page 46)
Have students turn to page 33 to review the
information about compound nouns.
Read the directions for Practice 12 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise,
writing true sentences about themselves. Go
over the answers.
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
(pages 46–47)
Have students read the introductory text.
Freewriting
(page 47)
Explain the meaning of freewriting and
have students read the example. Point
out that the writer put down ideas in no
particular order and that she focused
on ideas only (not sentence structure,
grammar, spelling, etc.) to write about her
earthquake experience.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity. Have students complete the task.
Variation:
Bring an alarm clock to class or
set the alarm on your phone to 10 minutes.
When the alarm sounds, students must stop
writing. Avoid using a traditional “alarm
sound”—students usually react more
positively to time limits when they hear a
ringtone or music.
Lo aching Notes 16
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 48–49)
Tell students that they will write a narrative
paragraph about a memorable experience in
their lives. Then have students look at the
Chapter 2 scoring rubric on page 55 of this
manual (give students a paper copy of the
rubric, display it on a screen, and/or put it
on your course website). Go over the rubric
so that students understand what they are
required to do for their writing assignment
and how they will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task. Remind them
to include information that is related to the
purpose of their narrative.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
questions on the Chapter 2 Peer Review
(page 256) aloud. Have students complete
the task. If needed, have students review
the correction symbols in Appendix E
(pages 250–252).
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 2 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 257). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 2
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 55 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 49)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6
of this manual. Point out that students will
practice all of the skills listed again.
EXPANSION
(pages 49–50)
Timed Writing
(page 49)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Point out the Writing Tip.
Read the prompt and have students begin
writing. Collect their papers after 30
minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Journal Writing
(page 50)
Go over the introductory text and the
possible journal topics.
Have students write in class or at home.
You may also choose to have them begin
writing in class and complete their entries
for homework.
Point out the Writing Tip.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 17
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Use journaling as a way to set up a dialogue
between you and your students. Respond to
student journal entries by making comments
and asking questions that will encourage
students to think more deeply, supply more
detailed information, communicate personal
ideas and feelings, etc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
C H A P T E R
3
Basic Paragraph
Structure
(pages 51–78)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 51)
Write the chapter title on the board
and read it aloud. Point out that most
academic paragraphs have a similar style of
organization.
Have students look at the photo and
describe what the people in the picture
are doing and explain what the purpose of
the activity is. Make certain that students
explain the word leisure. Have students
answer the question under the photo.
(Depending on the previous discussion,
students will expand on or summarize the
discussion when they answer the question.)
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 3.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 52–53)
Go over the introductory text. Point out
again that academic paragraphs have a
common style of organization. Also point
out that students will write a paragraph
using this style of organization at the end of
Chapter 3.
Analyzing the Model
(page 52)
Read the model paragraph aloud, and have
students read along silently.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page 53)
Have students read the explanation about
adjectives and look at the example. Point
out the adjective suffixes.
Read the directions for Practice 1, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
exercises. Go over the answers.
Variation:
Have students circle the
adjective suffixes in Practice 1, Part B.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 54–68)
Have students read the introductory text.
Then lead a class discussion about the
sandwich illustration.
The Topic Sentence
(page 54)
Have students read the introductory text.
In each of the examples, point out the two
parts of a good topic sentence: the topic and
the controlling idea.
Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
Have students complete the task with a
partner or in a small group. To go over the
answers, write each topic sentence on the
board. Then write student answers under
each topic sentence.
Variation:
Write the three topic sentences
in Practice 2 on the board. As pairs or
groups finish the exercise, have students go
to the board and write one or two examples
of supporting information under each topic
sentence.
Position of the Topic Sentence
(page 55)
Have students read the text. Emphasize
where the topic sentence usually appears in
an academic paragraph.
Lo aching Notes 18
EXTENSION:
Have students review the information
about noun-verb pairs from Chapter 1
(page 4). Then have them create a word
family chart with three columns: nouns,
verbs, and adjectives. Have students write
the adjectives from Practice 1, Part B in
the chart and then use their knowledge
and their dictionaries to add noun and
verb forms. Point out that some noun and
verb forms may be identical and that there
may not be a noun or verb for every word
family.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Not Too General, Not Too Specific
(page 55)
Read the text aloud. Point out that it is
important for topic sentences to be not
too general and not too specific. Use the
examples on page 55.
Read the directions for Practice 3, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Go over the answers.
Variation:
Have students who complete
each part of the exercise more quickly than
other students prepare an explanation for
their choice of the best topic sentence.
Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
Have students do the task with a partner.
Have students write topic sentences on the
board. Go over the topic sentences.
Developing Topic Sentences
(page 59)
Have students read the introductory text and
examples.
Have students explain the difference
between the examples at the bottom of
page 59 and the top of page 60.
Point out the sample topic sentences on
page 60. Have students underline the topic
and double underline the controlling idea in
each topic sentence. Go over the answers.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Point out the examples. Also
point out that students will use their topic
sentence from the Try It Out! activity as the
topic sentence in their Chapter 3 Writing
Assignment. Have students do the exercise.
Supporting Sentences: Main
Points
(page 61)
Have students read the introductory text.
Write the topic sentence from the writing
model (page 52) on the board. Have
students read the topic sentence and the
main points that are listed on page 61.
Discuss the connection between the topic
sentence and the main points.
Read the instructions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise, but
emphasize that it is not necessary for them
to have three additional main points for
each topic sentence. While students are
working, write the topic sentences and the
first main point for each topic sentence on
the board. Have students add main points
under each. Go over the main points.
Supporting Details: Examples
(page 62)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that a complete sentence usually
follows for example / for instance, and a
noun or phrase follows such as. Also point
out punctuation.
Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers in writing so that students
can see capitalization and punctuation. Do
the same for Practice 7.
The Concluding Sentence
(page 64)
Have students read the introductory text. Point
out that there is a connection between the
topic sentence and the concluding sentence
of an academic paragraph. Present the three
tips about concluding sentences. Point out the
examples that accompany each tip. Also point
out punctuation with transition signals.
Read the directions for Practice 8 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answer.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Then
have students compare their answers in
small groups and use the tips on page 64
as the criteria for choosing their favorite
concluding sentence.
Variation:
Have the whole class discuss
how the tips for concluding sentences
given on page 64 are used in each of the
sentences on the board.
Read the directions for Practice 10, Parts
A and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Go over the answers.
Have students bring their paper with the
topic sentence that they wrote for the Try
It Out! activity on page 60 to class. Read
the directions for the Try It Out! activity on
page 68 aloud. Have students do the task.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 19
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 69–72)
Have students read the introductory text.
Analyzing the Model
(page 69)
Have students look at page 53 to review
what they have learned about adjectives.
Point out that adverbs often end in -ly. Have
students pay attention to adjectives and
adverbs as they read the model on page 69.
Have students look at the photo. Explain
that the person in the photo is skydiving and
that skydiving is a kind of adventure activity.
Tell students that they will read about other
adventure activities in the model.
Read the model paragraph aloud, and have
students read along silently.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Adjectives and Adverbs in Basic
Sentences
(page 70)
Have students read the examples in the
chart, using the yellow (subject), green
(verb), and pink (object) highlighting to
identify the subject-verb pattern in each
sentence. The parentheses will help them
identify the prepositional phrases.
Point out the meaning of transitive and
intransitive. Point out the objects that are
highlighted in pink in the chart. Point out
that nouns following prepositions in phrases
are also objects.
Have students read the information below
the chart. Then point out the placement of
adjectives and adverbs in the four examples.
(Note: Remind students that they can refer
to the list of grammar terms in Appendix A
on pages 240–242 if necessary.)
Read the directions for Practice 11, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students work with a
partner to complete the tasks. Then go over
the answers. Do the same for Practices 12
and 13.
Applying Vocabulary
(page 72)
Have students quickly reread the
information about adjectives on page 53.
Read the directions for Practice 14, Parts
A and B aloud. Remind students to write
true sentences in Part B. Encourage them to
give details as in the model, and encourage
them to not use be (am, is, are, was, were,
etc.) in sentences (e.g., My personality is
analytical.).
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
(pages 73–75)
Have students read the introductory text.
Outlining
(page 73)
Have students read the reasons for
outlining and look at the examples. Have
them explain the difference between the
simple paragraph outline and the detailed
paragraph outline.
The Detailed Outline
(page 74)
Have students look at the photo. Ask:
What kind of music is this person
probably dancing to? How do you know?”
Show photos of punk fashion, reggae
fashion, hard rock fashion, grunge fashion,
and so on, and have students identify the
corresponding kind of music.
Have students read the detailed outline.
Point out the use of capital letters and
numbers. Point out how the outline indents.
Read the directions for Practice 15, Parts
A and B aloud. Have students complete the
outlines. In groups, have students compare
their outlines and discuss differences. Go
over the answers.
Lo aching Notes 20
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Divide the class into small groups and have
students answer these questions: What
kind of information do adjectives give?
How do adjectives add color and detail to
sentences? What kind of information do
adverbs give? How do adverbs add color
and detail to sentences? Have groups share
their answers with the whole class.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 76–77)
Tell students that they will write a paragraph
about a hobby or sport that they enjoy.
Have students look at the Chapter 3 scoring
rubric on page 56 of this manual. Give
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 3 writing assignment and how they
will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students begin with the diagram that they
made for the Try It Out! activity on page 68
and modify it based on changes that they
made in Step 1. Have students follow the
Step 2 instructions to create a detailed outline.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
questions on the Chapter 3 Peer Review
(page 258) aloud. Have students complete
the task. If needed, have students review
the correction symbols in Appendix E
(pages 250–252).
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section in Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 3 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 259). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their new drafts and turn
them in. Use the Chapter 3 Writing
Assignment Scoring Rubric on page 56 of
this Teacher’s Manual to evaluate students’
writing.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 77)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
EXPANSION
(pages 77–78)
Timed Writing
(page 77)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Point out the Writing Tip.
Read the prompt and have students
begin writing. Collect their papers after
30 minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Summary Writing
(page 78)
Have students read the introductory text and
the sample summary.
Variation:
Display the sample summary
on page 78 on a screen in your classroom.
While it is displayed, have students turn to
page 52 and reread the writing model. Have
students compare the writing model and the
summary.
Point out the three keys to writing a
summary and the Writing Tip.
Have students complete the task. Then
have them compare their summaries with a
partner.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 21
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students discuss their
experience with outlining. If students have
done academic writing in the past, have
them explain when they used outlining
and what kind of outlining they did (have
them describe the outlines). Have students
explain why they liked or did not like
outlining.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
C H A P T E R
4
Logical Division of
Ideas
(pages 79–101)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 79)
Write the chapter title on the board and read
it aloud. Explain that logical division of
ideas is a way of organizing information in
an academic paragraph.
Have students look at the photo and
describe what they can see about the
woman’s shopping experience (e.g., she
is buying clothing, enjoying the shopping
experience, and paying with a credit
card; she is shopping at what could be an
upscale designer store; she is not shopping
online, not shopping at a secondhand
store, not shopping at a discount store such
as Walmart). Have students answer the
question under the photo.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 4.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 80–82)
Go over the introductory text. Review
the three main parts of an academic
paragraph: the topic sentence, the body,
and the conclusion. Point out the body may
be organized in many different ways but
that it must always have unity (focus) and
coherence (logic).
Analyzing the Model
(page 80)
Have students read the writing model. Have
them focus on the reasons that the writer
does not want to have a credit card.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page 81)
Explain the meaning of synonyms. Have
students look at the examples.
Explain that dictionaries may list words
as synonyms even though the words do
not have exactly the same meaning. To
illustrate this point, have students read the
paragraph under the chart.
Point out the Writing Tip on page 82.
Read the instructions for Practice 1, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students do the exercises
with a partner. Go over the answers.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 82–95)
Have students read the introductory text.
Logical Division of Ideas
(page 82)
Point out that logical division of ideas is a
way of organizing information. It divides
a topic into parts. It presents one part and
explains it, presents a second part and
explains it, and continues in the same way
until the writer has finished developing
the topic.
Have students read the many different ways
of dividing a topic into parts (e.g., reasons,
types, or advantages / disadvantages) and
presenting the parts logically, one after
the other.
Point out that, like other academic
paragraphs, logical division of idea
paragraphs have a topic sentence, a body,
and a conclusion. Point out that each part
of the paragraph clearly shows the logical
division of ideas.
Have students read the examples of topic
sentences on page 83. Point out that the
controlling idea states how the paragraph is
logically divided (reasons for a vegetarian
lifestyle, qualities of a good boss, and
kinds of software). Next, have students
read the main points. Emphasize that these
sentences also show the logical organization
of a paragraph. Then have students read the
Lo aching Notes 22
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Use a dictionary such as the Longman
Dictionary of American English. Point out
where synonyms are listed and how the
dictionary explains the similar yet often
different meanings of synonyms. (Use an
example such as the word cheap. Point out
the Thesaurus label and the information
contained in that section for the dictionary
entry cheap.)
supporting details. Have students finish by
reading the concluding sentences, which
summarize the main points of the logical
division of ideas.
Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise.
Go over the answers. Do the same for
Practice 3.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity. Point out that students must use
many of the skills they have learned so far
to complete the exercise. Also point out that
they are going to write a topic sentence and
outline that they will use in their Chapter 4
Writing Assignment. Then have students
work through the Try It Out! activity step-
by-step.
Unity in the Supporting Sentences
of a Paragraph
(page 85)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that English academic writing
should be focused. Emphasize that all of the
main points and supporting details must be
directly related to the topic and controlling
idea.
Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
Have students complete the task. Go over
the answers.
Variation:
Define the word irrelevant.
Have students explain why the sentences
that were removed from each paragraph
were irrelevant.
Coherence in the Supporting
Sentences of a Paragraph
(page 86)
Have students read the introductory text.
Emphasize that English academic writing
should be well organized; that is, it should
be logical and easy for the reader to follow.
Explain that coherence means the main
points and supporting details of a paragraph
are presented logically (e.g., by reasons,
types, advantages, and disadvantages).
Coherence also means there are clear signals
that allow readers to focus on the main
points and supporting details as well as make
connections from one point to the next. Point
out that students will learn about three ways
to have coherence in their paragraphs.
Putting Each Supporting Sentence
in the Right Place
(page 86)
Have students read the introductory text.
Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers.
Using Nouns and Pronouns
Consistently
(page 88)
Have students look at the example of noun
and pronoun consistency. Point out that
the paragraph uses students and plural
pronouns throughout.
Have students review the idea of
consistency by reading the information
above the example. Point out that native
speakers of English may switch from
singular to plural or switch pronouns in
informal speaking and writing but that
consistency is important for the coherence
of academic writing.
Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Have students complete the task. Go over
the answers. Do the same for Practice 7.
Placing and Punctuating
Transition Signals Correctly
(page 89)
Point out that students have already
learned about time order signals, signals
for examples, and signals for concluding
sentences.
Have students read the introductory text
and look at the chart. Point out that the
organization of the chart corresponds to the
ways that information can be presented /
organized in academic paragraphs. Also
point out that the chart contains three
different categories of signal words:
sentence connectors, coordinating
conjunctions, and others.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 23
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Have students go back to the outline that
they prepared for the Try It Out! activity on
page 84. Have them review the outline for
unity and make any necessary changes.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Discuss each category of signal words
separately. Point out the placement and
punctuation of the signal words in each
category. Use the highlighting and bold
print on page 91 to focus students’ attention
on the signal words. Have students review
this information for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 8, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Write
the answers on the board so that students
can see capitalization and punctuation. Do
the same for Practices 10 and 11. Also point
out the Writing Tip.
Finding Run-ons and Comma
Splices
(page 96)
Point out that this section gives three tips
on finding run-ons and comma splices:
(1) check all sentences that have commas,
(2) read long sentences aloud, and (3) look
for “danger words” in the middle of a
sentence. Have students number the three
tips on pages 96–97. Go over the examples
for each tip. Have students read pages 96–
97 for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 12 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise.
Go over the answers. Do the same for
Practice 13.
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 96–99)
Have students read the introductory text.
Run-ons and Comma Splices
(page 96)
Have students turn to page 18 to see
examples of sentence fragments.
Point out the definitions of run-on and
comma splice and the examples on page 96.
(Note: If necessary, students can refer to
the list of grammar terms in Appendix A on
pages 240–242.)
Correcting Run-ons and Comma
Splices
(page 96)
Point out the three ways to correct comma
splices. Emphasize the highlighted
punctuation in the examples and the use
of sentence connectors and coordinating
conjunctions. (Note: If necessary, refer
students back to the chart on page 89–90
for examples of sentence connectors and
coordinating conjunctions.)
Applying Vocabulary
(page 99)
Have students review the information about
synonyms on page 81.
Read the directions for Practice 14, Parts
A and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Go over the answers.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 99–100)
Tell students that they will write a
paragraph about buying habits that uses
logical division of ideas.
Have students look at the Chapter 4 scoring
rubric on page 57 of this manual. Give
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric so that students understand what
they are required to do for their Chapter 4
writing assignment and how they will be
graded.
Lo aching Notes 24
EXTENSION:
Have students reread the writing model on
page 80 and then analyze it for pronoun
consistency and/or the use of transition
signals.
EXTENSION:
Divide the class into small groups and have
students in each group discuss the problems
that run-ons and fragments cause for
readers of academic writing (e.g., difficulty
seeing where one idea ends and the next
begins, difficulty remembering ideas from
the beginning of a long sentence to the end,
difficulty making connections between
ideas when there are fragments).
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Step 1: Have students bring the
brainstorming that they did for the Try it
Out! activity on page 84 to class. Go over
the instructions for Step 1. Have students
complete the task.
Step 2: Have students bring the outline that
they wrote for the Try It Out! activity on
page 84 to class. Go over the instructions
for Step 2. Have students complete the task,
modifying their outlines based on changes
that they made in Step 1. (If students have
chosen to write about a different topic, have
them make a new detailed outline.)
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students follow the instructions to write the
first draft of their paragraph.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
questions of the Chapter 4 Peer Review
(page 260) aloud. Have students work with
a partner and use the worksheet to review
each other’s drafts. If needed, have students
review the correction symbols in Appendix
E (pages 250–252). Have writers revise
their drafts and write draft two based on
their partner’s feedback and their own ideas
either in class or at home.
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 4 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 261). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 4
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 57 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 100)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
EXPANSION
(page 101)
Timed Writing
(page 101)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Read the prompt and have students begin
writing. Collect their papers after 30
minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Summary Writing
(page 101)
Have students review what they learned
about summary writing in Chapter 3. Go
over the three keys to summary writing on
page 101.
Point out the Writing Tip.
Have students reread “Why Advertisers
Care about Young Shopperson page 98
and summarize it.
Have students work with a partner to
compare their summaries. Have students
use the Writing Tip and the three keys
to writing a summary that are listed on
page 101 as a writer’s self-check and make
changes to their summaries. Collect the
final version of the summaries
Variation:
Divide the class into small
groups, and have students in each group
compare their summaries. Have each group
hand in one summary. This summary can be
a summary done by an individual student
that the group has selected, or it may be a
new summary that the group members have
prepared together.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 25
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
C H A P T E R
5
Process Paragraphs
(pages 102–120)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 102)
Write the chapter title on the board and read
it aloud. Have students give examples of
process (how-to) writing.
Have students look at the photo and then
describe what the instructor in the photo
is doing and what the students are doing.
Discuss the meaning of active learner.
Have students answer the question under
the photo. On the board, make a list of the
steps that students can take to be successful
in school.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 5.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 103–104)
Go over the introductory text. Point out that
like logical division, the steps in a process
are one more way of presenting information
in an academic paragraph. Emphasize
that the way a paragraph is organized is
connected to the topic, the controlling idea,
and the purpose of the paragraph.
Analyzing the Model
(page 103)
Have students read the model paragraph,
focusing on the steps for students to follow
if they want to get good grades.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers with the
class. On the board, write the main points /
the steps that students should follow.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page 104)
Explain that phrasal verbs are sometimes
called two-word verbs / three-word verbs.
Write these two sentences on the board:
1. There was a flash of light in the sky, so I
looked up. 2. I looked up several words in
my dictionary. Demonstrate the meaning of
looked up in sentence 1. Point out that the
meaning clearly has two parts—the verb
look and the adverb that shows direction.
Point out that in sentence 2, the two words
together have the meaning of “try to find
information.”
Have students read the introductory text.
Read the instructions for Practice 1, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students do the tasks. Go
over the answers.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 105–108)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that, like other academic
paragraphs, process paragraphs have a topic
sentence, a body, and a conclusion. Point
out that each part of a process paragraph
is related to the topic of the paragraph and
the steps in the process that the paragraph
describes.
Topic Sentences in Process
Paragraphs
(page 105)
Have students read the examples of topic
sentences. Point out that the topic sentence
in a process paragraph states the topic (the
process that will be described) and that
the controlling idea includes words such
as steps, procedure, process, directions,
suggestions, and instructions.
Supporting Sentences in Process
Paragraphs
(page 105)
Have students read the examples of
supporting sentences. Emphasize that these
are the steps and the details of the process
that is presented in the topic sentence.
Lo aching Notes 26
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students make a list of five
to seven additional phrasal verbs that they
have heard or seen. Write the phrasal verbs
on the board. Encourage students to add the
idioms to their notebooks, or compile a list
and put it on your class website.
Concluding Sentences in Process
Paragraphs
(page 105)
Have students read the examples of
concluding sentences. Point out that the
concluding sentence of a process paragraph
can give the last step in the process, or it
can sum up the results / give the purpose of
the process.
Read the instructions for Practice 2 aloud.
Have students complete the task with a
partner. Go over the answers.
Variation:
Make sure that students’
sentences have a variety of words such as
steps, process, directions, suggestions.
Using Time Order in Process
Paragraphs
(page 106)
Read the introductory text.
Have students review the time order signals
in the chart. Remind students that then and
now do not take commas.
Read the directions for Practice 3, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
task. Then go over the answers.
Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Show
the number at the bottom of the book in
the photo and go over the meaning of call
number. Go over the answers to Practice 4.
model and note the connection between the
topic sentence and the conclusion.
Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students work with the same
partner(s) that they worked with in
Practice 2. Have students look at their
topic sentences from Practice 2 and write
conclusions on a new piece of paper.
AUDIENCE
(pages 109–110)
Explain the meaning of audience as it
relates to academic writing. Then have
students read the introductory text.
Read the directions for Practice 6, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Go over the answers. For Part B, on
the board, write the clue words that students
call out.
PURPOSE
(page 109)
Have students read the introductory text.
Then have them look at the conclusion of
the writing model and note the purpose
stated in the conclusion.
Have students bring their papers for
Practice 2 to class. Before students do
Practice 5, have them go back to the writing
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Have students complete the
task in class or for homework.
Variation:
Have students write Paragraph 1
and Paragraph 2 on separate pieces
of paper. Then have students work in
groups and compare their paragraphs.
Have each group select and hand in one
version of Paragraph 1 and one version of
Paragraph 2.
Point out the Writing Tip.
EXTENSION:
Display the sentences on a screen in your
classroom in the correct time order. Have
students call out important words that
helped them determine the correct time
order. Circle the important words, and point
out that the repetition of nouns and the use
of synonyms is important for coherence.
EXTENSION:
Divide the class into small groups and have
students in each group work together to
list the kind of information that would be
included in a paragraph telling professors
what to do if they hear an emergency alarm
during class.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Have students outline the writing model
so that they can clearly see the connection
between the topic sentence, the steps in the
process, and the conclusion.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 27
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 110–117)
Have students read the introductory text.
Analyzing the Model
(page 110)
Read the introductory text aloud.
Have students read the model. Then have
students work with a partner or in a small
group to answer the questions about the
model. Go over the answers.
Clauses and Complex Sentences
(page 112)
Have students read the introductory text.
Write the terms clause, independent clause,
simple sentence, compound sentence,
dependent clause, and complex sentence
on the board. Explain the terms as outlined
below. (Note: Refer students to the list of
grammar terms in Appendix A on pages
240–242 for more definitions and examples.)
Clauses
(page 112)
Use the examples to explain the terms
clause, independent clause, simple
sentence, and compound sentence.
Point out the difference between an
independent clause and a dependent clause.
Point out that dependent clauses do not
have capital letters or periods, and they are
not sentences.
Complex Sentences
(page 112)
Emphasize that a dependent clause must
be combined with an independent clause to
form a complex sentence.
Use the examples to show the order of the
independent clause and dependent clause
in a complex sentence. Point out the use of
commas in complex sentences.
Subordinators
(page 113)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out the meanings (time, reason,
purpose, condition) of the subordinators in
the chart. Focus students’ attention on the
highlighted words and the meaning of the
example sentences.
Point out the commas in the example
sentences in the subordinator chart.
Read the directions for Practice 7, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Then go over the answers.
Read the directions for Practice 8, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
exercises. Then go over the answers.
Variation:
Have students add a title to the
paragraph in Exercise 8, Part A.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Have students complete
the task with a partner. After each pair
of students shares their answers with
another pair, collect a single version of the
paragraph for the group of four.
Applying Vocabulary
(page
117)
Have students review phrasal verbs on
page 104.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. As
space allows, have student write answers on
the board so that there will be two to three
sentences for each item.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 118–119)
Tell students that they will write a
paragraph about self-improvement. Their
paragraph will describe a self-improvement
process.
Lo aching Notes 28
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students compare the
original “Note Taking 101” and their
revised drafts of the paragraph. Have
students make a list of three to four ways
that their revisions improved the paragraph.
EXTENSION:
Have students write a paragraph about
one of the topics in their journal. When
responding to the journal, focus on the steps
in the process—ask questions if the steps
are unclear or incomplete. Keep audience,
purpose, and the order of the steps in mind.
Have students look at the Chapter 5 scoring
rubric on page 58 of this manual. Give
students a paper copy of the rubric, display it
on a screen in your classroom, and/or put it on
your course website. Go over the rubric with
students so that they understand what they
are required to do for their Chapter 5 writing
assignment and how they will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task. If students need
to review brainstorming techniques, they
can refer to Chapter 1 for listing (pages 21–
23) and Chapter 2 for freewriting (page 47).
Step 2: Go over the instructions. If students
need review of detailed outlines, refer them
to Chapter 3 (pages 73–75).
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students follow the instructions to write the
first draft of their paragraph.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
questions of the Chapter 5 Peer Review
(page 262) aloud. Have students work
with a partner and use the worksheet to
review each other’s drafts. If needed, have
students review the correction symbols in
Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have writers
revise their drafts and write draft two based
on their partner’s feedback and their own
ideas either in class or at home.
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 5 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 263). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 5
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 58 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 119)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
EXPANSION
(page 120)
Timed Writing
(page 120)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Read the prompt and have students
begin writing. Collect their papers after
30 minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Email to a Professor
(page 120)
Have students reread the model on
page 111 and point out the Writing Tip
on page 120.
Have students follow the steps in the model
to write and send an email to you. Respond
to the emails.
C H A P T E R
6
Definition
Paragraphs
(pages 121–147)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 121)
Write the chapter title on the board and
read it aloud. Have students predict how a
definition paragraph will be different from a
dictionary definition.
Have students look at the photo and
describe what the man’s job is. Have
students explain whether they think the man
is courageous. Then have students answer
the question under the photo.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 6.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 29
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
INTRODUCTION
(pages 122–124)
Have students read the introductory
information. Point out the usefulness of
definition paragraphs.
Analyzing the Model
(page 122)
Have students read the model paragraph,
focusing on the kinds of information that
the writer includes in her definition.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page 123)
Have students read the introductory
information and examples.
Show students or have students explain
where they can find word origins in a
dictionary such as the Longman Dictionary
of American English. Use these words
as examples: automatic and mobile.
Point out related words (e.g., autostart,
autobiography, automobile, mobile phone)
and how their meanings are connected to
the word origins.
Read the directions for Practice 1 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers.
Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
Remind students of the idiom have a big
heart. Have students do the task. Go over
the answers.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 124–128)
Point out that definition paragraphs have
a topic sentence, a body, and a concluding
sentence like other academic paragraphs.
Go over the three key pieces of information
in the topic sentence of a definition
paragraph. They are listed on page 124.
Have students study the chart on page 124.
Point out that the body of a definition
paragraph generally presents what, where,
when, how, or why information that further
explains the definition in the topic sentence.
Have students read the examples at the
bottom of page 124.
Explain that the concluding sentence of a
definition paragraph often explains why
the definition is important, interesting, or
unique. Have students read the examples at
the top of page 125.
Point out the Writing Tip on page 125.
Explain that a dictionary is a good place
to start but that a good definition requires
more than a dictionary definition.
Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answer. Do the same for Practices 4, 5,
and 6.
Variation:
Have students identify the
term / person / concept, the category or
group, and the distinguishing characteristics
in the topic sentence in Practices 3 and 5.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Have students complete the
task. Go over the answers.
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 128–142)
Have students read the introductory text.
Analyzing the Model
(page 128)
Point out the photo of the No Rooz table on
page 129. Tell students they will read more
about the No Rooz table and other holidays
in the model on pages 128–129.
Lo aching Notes 30
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students make a list of
four to five additional idioms that they
have heard or seen. Write the idioms on
the board. Encourage students to add the
idioms to their notebooks, or compile a list
and put it on your class website or blog.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Display the definition of courage from a
dictionary such as the Longman Dictionary
of American English. Have students
read the dictionary definition and reread
the writing model on pages 122–123.
Have students discuss the similarities
and differences between the dictionary
definition and the definition in the model.
Read the introductory text aloud. Then have
students read the model.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Appositives
(page 129)
Read the definition of appositives aloud.
Have students read the examples. Point
out that the bold words (the appositives) in
each example are nouns or noun phrases
that give information about the noun that
immediately precedes them. (Note: You can
refer students to the list of grammar terms
in Appendix A on pages 240–242 for more
information and examples.)
Comma Rules for Appositives
(page 130)
Write the sample sentences from page 129
on the board without the appositives. Point
out that Persian names a specific language
and fudge names a specific kind of candy—
the meanings of Persian and fudge are
clear without the appositive. Therefore,
the appositives give unnecessary / extra
information and use commas. However,
the identity of the friend is unclear in
the sentence My friend makes incredible
chocolate fudge. Therefore, the appositive
Tina is necessary to clearly name which
friend makes the fudge. It does not use
commas.
Point out the Writing Tip.
Point out that if an appositive follows a
proper noun (a noun that is capitalized), the
appositive uses commas. Point out that if an
appositive follows a noun with an adjective
such as first, last, best, worst, favorite, the
appositive uses commas. Have students
read the information about appositives on
pages 129–130 for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers.
Variation:
Have students remove the
underlined appositive from each sentence to
see if the meaning of the sentence is clear
without the appositive.
Adjective Clauses
(page 131)
Have students read the examples. Point
out that the bold groups of words are
adjective clauses. Explain that the purpose
of adjective clauses is to describe nouns
and pronouns and that they usually
appear after the noun or pronoun that they
describe. Point out that adjective clauses are
sometimes called relative clauses.
Write . . . that originally meant “holy
day” on the board. Point out that adjective
clauses are dependent clauses. In other
words, they must be connected to an
independent clause. Add “Holiday” is a
word from Old English, and underline it.
Point out that this is an independent clause.
Double underline that originally meant
“holy day” and point out that this is a
dependent adjective clause.
Point out that adjective clauses begin with
words such as who, whom, which, and that.
Explain that these words are called relative
pronouns and that a relative pronoun
connects the dependent adjective clause to
the independent clause and to the noun or
pronoun that it describes.
Comma Rules for Adjective
Clauses
(page 132)
Write the two examples at the top of
page 132 on the board without the
adjective clauses. Point out that Every
culture in the world has special days does
not specify which days / what kind of
days. Add the adjective clause to give the
necessary information. Point out that Many
Halloween customs started with the Celts is
a sentence about a specific group of people.
Add the adjective clause and explain that it
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 31
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students discuss the most
important holiday celebration in their home
country or culture. Have students explain
when the holiday is celebrated, what the
history of the holiday is, what the reason
for the celebration is, what people do to
celebrate the holiday, and so on.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
gives unnecessary / extra information about
the Celts. Add the comma. Have students
state what they notice about how commas
are used with adjective clauses. Point out
that adjective clauses use the same comma
rule as appositives. Have students read
the information about adjective clauses on
pages 131–132 for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 8 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Then
go over the answers.
Complex Sentences with
Adjective Clauses
(page 133)
Use the Valentine’s Day example at the top
of page 133 to illustrate all of the points
about adjective clauses that are presented
on the page.
On the board write two simple sentences:
Valentine’s Day is popular in many
countries. + Valentine’s Day is a holiday of
love and friendship.
Explain that the simple sentences can be
combined into one complex sentence with
an independent clause and a dependent
clause. On the board, write Valentine’s Day,
which is a holiday of love and friendship,
is popular in many different countries.
Underline Valentine’s Day is popular in
many countries and point out that it is
the independent clause. Double underline
the adjective clause which is a holiday of
love and friendship. Point out that it is a
dependent clause that cannot be a sentence
by itself.
Point out that the purpose of the dependent
adjective clause is to provide information
about Valentine’s Day. Point out that
“Valentine’s Day” is the antecedent, the
noun that is described / modified by the
dependent adjective clause. Point out
the definition of antecedent at the top of
page 133.
Point out that the dependent adjective
clause must be placed as close as possible
to its antecedent. Point out the “confusing”
and “clear” examples included with
number 1.
Return to the example on the board. Circle
the verb in the dependent adjective clause.
Point out that which is a relative pronoun
and that like other pronouns, which gets
its meaning from its antecedent noun.
Point out that there must be subject-verb
agreement between which / Valentine’s Day
and is. Point out the two examples with
number 2.
Return to the example on the board. Add
the pronoun it after which. Point out that
just one pronoun, the relative pronoun,
should be used because the relative pronoun
connects the dependent adjective clause to
the independent clause and the noun that
it describes. Point out the example with
number 3.
Remind students that in addition to
its connecting function, which also
functions as the subject in the dependent
adjective clause. Have students review
the information about complex sentences
with adjective clauses on page 133 for
homework.
Subject Pronouns: Who, Which,
and That
(page 133)
Remind students that in addition to its
connecting function, the relative pronoun in
a dependent adjective clause can function
as the subject of the clause. Have students
look at the chart. Point out that who
and that (informal) are used as relative
pronouns in adjective clauses that describe
people. Point out that which and that are
used as relative pronouns in adjective
clauses that describe things.
Have students read the examples for extra
information adjective clauses at the top of
page 134. Emphasize the following: When
adjective clauses have commas, use who
for people and which for things. Do not
use that.
Have students read the examples for
necessary information adjective clauses.
Point out the options for relative pronouns.
Have students review the information about
subject relative pronouns on pages 133–134
for homework.
Lo aching Notes 32
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Point out that the second sentence in each
pair will become the dependent adjective
clause. Remind students to add commas as
needed. Have students complete the exercise.
Then go over the answers, referring to the
explanations on pages 133–134 as necessary.
Object Pronouns: Whom, Which,
That, and Ø (no pronoun)
(page 135)
Point out that in addition to its connecting
function, the relative pronoun in a
dependent adjective clause can function as
an object in the clause.
Have students look at the chart. Point out
the formal and informal options. Also point
out the placement of the relative object
pronoun at the beginning of the adjective
clause, before the subject. Emphasize the
following: That does not appear in Extra
Information boxes of the chart. Ø does not
appear in the Extra Information boxes of
the chart.
Have students read the examples for extra
information adjective clauses at the top
of page 136. Point out that the relative
pronouns function as objects in the
dependent adjective clauses. Emphasize
the following: When adjective clauses have
commas, use whom (or who informally)
for people and which for things. Do not
use that.
Have students read the examples for
necessary information adjective clauses
in the middle of page 134. Point out that
the relative pronouns function as objects
in the dependent adjective clauses. Also
point out the options for relative pronouns.
Have students review the information about
object relative pronouns on pages 135–136
for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 10, Parts A
and B aloud. Point out which sentence
will become the adjective clause. Remind
students to add commas as needed. Have
students complete the exercises. Go over
the answers, referring to the explanations
on page 133 and on pages 135–136 as
necessary.
Relative Adverbs: When and
Where
(page 137)
Have students read the introductory
information at the bottom of page 137.
Point out that there is no difference in the
use of relative adverbs in extra information
and necessary information clauses.
Have students read the examples for extra
information clauses at the top of page
138. Emphasize the following: When and
Where replace prepositional phrases in the
examples. The prepositions do not appear
in the adjective clauses. Have students read
the examples for necessary information
clauses. Emphasize the following: Where
replaces a prepositional phrase in the
second example. The preposition does
not appear in the adjective clause. Have
students review the information about
relative adverbs on pages 137–138 for
homework.
Read the directions for Practice 11 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise.
Remind students that the second sentence in
each pair will become the adjective clause.
Then go over the answers, referring to the
explanations on page 133 and on pages
137–138 as necessary.
For homework, have students read the
examples in the chart on page 139 and
review the information about relative
pronouns and adverbs. (Note: Students can
mark page 139 in their books [e.g., with
a paper clip or a small piece of paper] so
that they can easily go back to the chart for
information on adjective clauses / relative
clauses and relative pronouns.)
Read the directions for Practice 12 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise.
Go over the answers. Do the same for
Practice 13.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Review the terms simple
sentence, compound sentence, and complex
sentence. Have students complete the
exercise. Then go over the answers. Discuss
alternative answers that students offer.
Variation:
Have students write the
sentences in the Try It Out! activity as a
paragraph.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 33
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Applying Vocabulary
(page
142)
Have students review the information about
word origins and idioms on page 123.
Read the directions for Practice 14, Parts
A and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Then go over the answers.
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
(pages 143–144)
Have students read the introductory
information at the top of page 143.
Have students look at the cluster diagram
and explain the different colors in the
diagram; provide help as needed.
Have students reread the writing model on
pages 122–123. Divide the class into small
groups and have students in each group
point out ideas that are in both the writing
model and the cluster diagram and those
that are not.
Have students read the paragraph at the
bottom of page 143.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Read the instructions for
each number aloud, wait for students to do
the activity, and then move on to the next
number. Have students continue developing
their cluster diagrams on their own.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 144–145)
Tell students that they will write a definition
paragraph about a word, concept, or custom.
Have students look at the Chapter 6 scoring
rubric on page 59 of this manual. Give
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 6 writing assignment and how they
will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task by using the
cluster diagram they developed in the Try It
Out! activity on page 144.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task. If students need
review of detailed outlines, refer them to
Chapter 3 (pages 73–75).
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 4: Go over the instructions for Step 4.
Have students review the procedures for
peer review in Appendix F (page 253).
Read the questions of the Chapter 6 Peer
Review (page 264) aloud. Have students
work with a partner and use the worksheet
to review each other’s drafts. If needed,
have students review the correction symbols
in Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have
writers revise their drafts and write draft
two based on their partner’s feedback and
their own ideas either in class or at home.
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 6 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 265). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 6
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 59 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 145)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
Lo aching Notes 34
EXTENSION:
All of the items in Practice 14, Part B have
complex sentences. Have students read the
sentences they have written and call out the
dependent clause(s) in each sentence. Have
a student come to the board and double
underline the adjective clause(s) with the
help of the other students in the class.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXPANSION
(pages 146–147)
Timed Writing
(page 146)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Read the prompt and have students begin
writing. Collect their papers after 30
minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Paraphrasing
(page 146)
Have students read the introductory text and
examples. Point out when paraphrasing is
used for academic purposes. Emphasize the
importance of using paraphrasing to avoid
plagiarism.
Read aloud the two sentences on page
147 that students are going to paraphrase.
Have students find the two sentences in the
writing model on pages 122–123 so that
they can better understand the sentences in
context. Then have students paraphrase the
two sentences and discuss them in small
groups.
C H A P T E R
7
Cause / Effect
Paragraphs
(pages 148–170)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 148)
Write the chapter title on the board and
read it aloud. Explain that cause / effect is
another way of focusing and organizing
information in academic paragraphs.
Have students look at the photo and explain
why all the bikes in the photo are the same.
Have students explain what they know
about bike sharing programs (e.g., where
bike sharing programs are located, who
owns the bikes, how the payment system
works, where riders can pick up and drop
off bikes, if riders can take the bikes home,
what the purpose of bike sharing programs
is). Provide background information on
bike sharing programs as necessary.
Have students answer the question under
the photo.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 7.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 149–150)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that cause / effect analysis is a
common task in academic writing.
Analyzing the Model
(page 149)
Have students read the writing model. Have
them focus on what made the Vélib’ bike
rental program successful.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page
150)
Have students read the introductory
information. Point out that the prefixes in
the examples change the meanings of the
words.
Read the instructions for Practice 1 aloud.
Go over the New Word column of the chart
and point out how the words were formed.
Have students do the exercise. Then go over
the answers.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 35
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
On the board, re-create the chart with just
the prefix column filled in. Make the rows
wide enough for multiple new words to be
added for each prefix. Have students work
with a partner to write two to three new
words that have one of the prefixes from the
chart. Have students add their new words,
along with the base words, to the chart.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
ORGANIZATION
(pages 151–167)
Explain that cause / effect paragraphs
follow the same overall organization as
other academic paragraphs—they have a
topic sentence with a controlling idea, a
body that develops the controlling idea,
and a conclusion related to the topic and
controlling idea.
Point out that the topic of the writing model
is the success of Vélib’, and the controlling
idea is causes of the success.
Discuss that the success of Vélib’ could
be analyzed in a different way. The
controlling idea could become the effects
of the successful bike sharing system. Have
students read “The Effects of Bike Sharing
in Paris.” Have them circle the controlling
idea in the topic sentence and underline
the main points. Emphasize that the main
points are all beneficial effects of Vélib’ on
cyclists. Have students double underline the
concluding sentence and note its connection
to the topic sentence.
Topic Sentences in Cause / Effect
Paragraphs
(page 151)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that the topic of a cause / effect
topic sentence often presents an event or
a situation (e.g., Vélib’ bike sharing is a
success). The controlling idea then states
whether the paragraph will analyze the
causes or the effects.
Supporting Sentences in Cause /
Effect Paragraphs
(page 152)
Point out that like other academic
paragraphs, cause / effect paragraphs must
be coherent. Point out that one way to
create coherence is to arrange the causes or
the effects in a logical way. Point out that
the writing model is arranged in time order
and that “The Effects of Bike Sharing in
Paris” presents effects from most obvious
to less obvious. Also point out that reasons
or results could be presented from least
important to most important.
Go over the outline. Focus on the order
of the main points and the logical listing
of supporting details under each main
point. Have students read and review the
information about support sentences in
cause / effect paragraphs for homework.
Concluding Sentences in Cause /
Effect Paragraphs
(page 152)
Go over what may be included in
concluding sentences of cause / effect
paragraphs. Have students read the
examples as you present each point.
Read the instructions for Practice 2 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers. Do the same for Practices 3–6.
Point out the Writing Tip at the bottom of
page 158. Then have students look at the
cluster diagram on page 159 and explain
the colors. Discuss the paragraph above
the cluster diagram. Point out that it is
not unusual for a cluster diagram to have
information that will not be included in a
paragraph. Emphasize that clustering is
a preliminary writing activity, that is, a
brainstorming activity that can help writers
generate ideas and see connections between
ideas.
Read the directions for the Try It Out! activity.
Point out that students will use ideas from
the clustering in their Chapter 7 Writing
Assignment. Have students complete the
exercise. Then go over the answers.
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 160–167)
Have students read the introductory text.
Analyzing the Model
(page 160)
Have students read the model paragraph.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Lo aching Notes 36
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Have students work in groups to write
concluding sentences that look to the
future and/or have a prediction. Then have
students in each group work together to write
concluding sentences with an opinion or
recommendation. (These are the most difficult
types of conclusions for students to write.)
Cause / Effect Transition Signals
(page 161)
Read the introductory text aloud. Then have
students look at the chart. Point out that
in addition to what students learned about
transition signals in Chapter 4, the chart has
subordinating conjunctions, which students
studied in Chapter 5.
Sentence Connectors
(page 161)
Emphasize that students are reviewing
a sentence structure that they learned in
previous chapters. Then read points 1,
2, and 3 aloud. Stop after you read each
point so that students can silently read
the examples. Point out the highlighted
punctuation. Do the same for Coordinating
Conjunctions (page 162) and Subordinating
Conjunctions (page 162).
Others
(page 163)
Emphasize that because of, due to, and
as a result of have the same meaning.
They are prepositions and come before
nouns (or pronouns) to make prepositional
phrases. They do not come directly before
dependent clauses.
Read points 1, 2, and 3 aloud. Stop after
you read each point so that students can
silently read the examples. Point out the
highlighted punctuation.
Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers.
Read the instructions for Practice 8 aloud.
Tell students to not change the order of the
sentences in each item so that they will not
reverse the causes and the effects. Point out
that students must add capitalization and
punctuation. Have students complete the
exercise and write their sentences on the
board. Discuss alternative answers.
Variation:
Have students find each of the
transition signals in Practice 8 in the chart
on page 161. Have students review the
explanations on pages 161–163 as needed.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
(Note: If necessary, review the terms
fragment, comma splice, and run-on by
using Appendix A: Grammar Terms on
pages 240–242.) Have students complete
the task. Go over the answers. Discuss
different ways of correcting the errors.
Applying Vocabulary
(page
167)
Have students turn to page 150 to review
prefixes.
Read the directions for Practice 10 aloud.
Have students do the exercise and hand in
their papers.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 168–169)
Tell students that they will write a cause /
effect paragraph about a social issue.
Have students look at the Chapter 7 scoring
rubric on page 60 of this manual. Give
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 7 writing assignment and how they
will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task by using either
of the cluster diagrams they developed in
the Try It Out! activity on pages 159–160.
Have them bring the most recent version of
their cluster diagram to class.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task. If they need
review of detailed outlines, refer them to
Chapter 3 (pages 73–75).
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 37
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Refer students to Appendix C on
pages 246–247. Point out that this is an
excellent source of not only cause / effect
but also other transition signals that they
have studied. Point out the connection
between the descriptions and explanations
on pages 161–163 and the categories of
transition signals in Appendix C.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Step 4: Go over the instructions for Step 4.
Have students review the procedures for
peer review in Appendix F (page 253).
Read the questions of the Chapter 7 Peer
Review (page 266) aloud. Have students
work with a partner and use the worksheet
to review each other’s drafts. If needed,
have students review the correction symbols
in Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have
writers revise their drafts and write draft
two based on their partner’s feedback and
their own ideas either in class or at home.
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 7 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 267). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 7
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 60 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 169)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
EXPANSION
(pages 169–170)
Timed Writing
(page 169)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Read the prompt and have students
begin writing. Collect their papers after
30 minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Double-Entry Journal Writing
(page 170)
Before they do the double-entry journal
assignment, have students reread the
writing model on page 149.
Write the following questions on the board
and lead a class discussion about them:
Why did the Vélib’ planners want to have
bike stations near bus stops and subway
stations? How did advertising and publicity
help make Vélib’ bike sharing a success? As
a tourist in Paris, would you use the Vélib’
bikes? Why or why not?
Have students bring their journals to class.
On the next clean page of the journal,
have students draw a vertical line down
the middle of the page for a double-entry
journal. Tell students that they are going to
write on the left and right sides of the page
for their next journal assignment.
Point out that in a double-entry journal,
students will explain another writer’s idea
and then give their opinion about the idea.
Have students read the paragraph at the top
of page 170.
Point out that the first step in double-entry
journal writing is paraphrasing. Have
students review the four keys of effective
paraphrasing on page 170.
Make sure that each student’s journal page
looks like the illustration in the middle of
page 170.
Read the introductory text below the
illustration aloud. Use the illustration to
show students how to start their paraphrase.
Have students write their paraphrase on the
left side of their journal page. Then have
them complete the “I think . . . ” statement
on the right side.
Collect your students’ journals. Read and
respond to them.
Point out the Writing Tip.
Lo aching Notes 38
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
C H A P T E R
8
Comparison /
Contrast Paragraphs
(pages 171–196)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 171)
Write the chapter title on the board and read
it aloud. Explain that in academic writing
comparison means looking at similarities
and contrast means looking at differences.
Point out that comparison / contrast is
another common way of presenting or
analyzing a topic.
Have students look at the photo and
describe what they see (where the people
are, what they are wearing, what they are
doing, etc.). Have students answer these
questions: In what country was the photo
taken? When was this photo taken? How do
you know?
Have students answer the question under
the photo. Write a list of similarities and a
list of differences on the board. Do not aim
for detailed lists. Tell students that they will
read more about this topic in the writing
model.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 8.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 172–174)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that comparison / contrast
analysis is a common task in daily life
and in academic writing. Have students
give specific examples of comparing and
contrasting from their personal experience.
Analyzing the Model
(page 172)
Have students look at their list of
similarities and differences between
education in the past and education today
that is on the board. Point out that they will
get additional information on the topic as
they read the writing model.
Before they read, have students look at the
title and predict the controlling idea of the
paragraph. Then have students read and find
out if their prediction is accurate.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Then go over the answers.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page
173)
Have students read the introductory
information and examples. Point out the
Writing Tip.
Read the directions for Practice 1, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Go over the answers.
Variation:
Limit the choice of answers for
Part B. Have students find the vocabulary
from Part B in the writing model so that
they can understand the meaning in the
context of the model. Then have students
select only those antonyms that fit the
meaning of the writing model.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 174–181)
Have students read the introductory
information at the bottom of page 174.
Point out that with comparison / contrast
paragraphs, students will continue to write
a topic sentence, a body, and a conclusion.
Point out that the writer of the model on
pages 172–173 believes that the best way
to understand 21st century education is
not to describe it, define it, or write about
its effects. The writer thinks that the way
to understand 21st century education is to
look at similarities and differences between
the schools of 50 years ago and the schools
of today. Thus, comparison / contrast is the
most effect method of organization.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 39
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Have students discuss whether the title
of the writing model allows readers to
accurately predict the controlling idea of
the paragraph. Discuss whether an element
of surprise is a good strategy for academic
writing.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Topic Sentences in Comparison /
Contrast Paragraphs
(page 175)
Have students read the introductory
information. Point out the two subjects
and the controlling idea in each of the
examples.
Supporting Sentences in
Comparison / Contrast Paragraphs
(page 175)
Have students reread the writing model,
finding the main points they underlined in
the paragraph and noting the placement of
the main points in the outline on page 175.
Emphasize that the support (the main points
plus the supporting details) is grouped
and ordered by subtopics: what students
learn, how students learn, and why students
learn. Give students the term point-by-point
organization for support that is grouped and
presented one main point (subtopic) at a
time.
Have students read the outline on page
176. Emphasize that all of the similarities
between 20th and 21st century education
are grouped together, and all of the
differences between 20th and 21st century
education are grouped together. Give
students the term block organization for
support that is grouped and presented in
this way.
Emphasize that the point-by-point outline
on 175 and the block outline on page
176 have identical introductions and
conclusions. Emphasize that the difference
is in the organization / presentation of main
points and supporting details.
Emphasize the Writing Tip on page 176.
Have students look again at the point-
by-point outline of the writing model
(page 175) and the block outline of the
writing model (page 176). Focus students’
attention on the balanced order in which the
main points and the supporting details are
presented.
Concluding Sentences in
Comparison / Contrast Paragraphs
(page 176)
Have students read the introductory text.
Emphasize that the concluding sentences
students write for comparison / contrast
paragraphs once again can restate the
topic sentence, summarize or restate
the main points, and give an opinion or
recommendation.
Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers.
Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise.
Go over the answers. Do the same for
Practices 4 and 5.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Have students do the
exercise. Have students hand in their
completed outlines.
SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 182–190)
Have students read the introductory text.
Analyzing the Model
(page 182)
Have students look at the picture on page
182 and explain what the young woman is
thinking and why she is confused. Provide
information about the word boot in British
English and American English if needed.
Read the introductory information aloud.
Then have students read the model.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Lo aching Notes 40
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Divide the class into small groups. Have
students in half the groups write a detailed
outline of Paragraph 1 in Practice 2. Have
the other groups write a detailed outline
of Paragraph 2. Then have groups who did
the point-by-point outline of Paragraph 1
and groups who did the block outline of
Paragraph 2 show their outlines to each
other.
Transition Signals for Comparison
(page 183)
Have students read the introductory text and
the chart.
Before going over the transition signals
in Chapter 8, present a quick review of
the rules and explanations for transition
signals that students learned in Chapters 4
and 7. Remind students of the information
on pages 161–163, and give a brief
summary of that information with one set
of examples. Use examples related to the
writing model such as the following:
Sentence connectors: Today’s economy
is global. Therefore, schools must prepare
students to be adaptable. (Point out options
for placement and punctuation of sentence
connectors.)
Coordinating conjunctions: Today’s
economy is global, so schools must prepare
students to be adaptable. (Point out the
placement of coordinating conjunctions
between two independent clauses and
punctuation.)
Subordinating conjunctions: Because
today’s economy is global, schools must
prepare students to be adaptable. (Point
out that subordinating conjunctions
connect dependent clauses to independent
clauses in complex sentences. Also point
out the possible order of the clauses and
punctuation.)
Others: Because of today’s global
economy, schools must prepare students to
be adaptable. (Point out that nouns, noun
phrases, and pronouns follow prepositions
to form prepositional phrases. Point out the
possible order of independent clauses and
prepositional phrases and punctuation.)
Sentence Connectors
(page 183)
Have students look at the chart on page 183
and note the sentence connectors that show
similarities.
Have students read the examples with also.
Point out the placement and punctuation of
also. Do the same with the too examples.
Paired Conjunctions
(page 184)
Point out that this is the first time students
have learned about paired conjunctions
in this book. Have students read the
introductory text.
Point out the term parallelism. Explain
that parallelism requires balance in
sentence structure. In other words, the same
grammar structure / form must follow each
of the two parts of paired conjunctions.
Write the correct and incorrect examples on
the board. Point out the use of parallelism.
Have students read the remaining examples.
Point out the part of speech labels in the
examples.
Subordinating Conjunctions
(page 184)
Have students look at the chart on page 183
and note subordinating conjunctions for
similarities.
Have students read the information at the
bottom of page 184. Point out the use of
commas.
Others
(page 185)
Have students look at the chart on page 183
and note the signals in the Others category
that show similarities. Point out that in this
instance, there are three types of words and
phases: adjectives, prepositions, and adverbs.
Have students read the examples for
adjectives, prepositions, and adverbs.
Point out that adjectives describe nouns.
Point out that prepositions are followed by
nouns, noun phrases, and pronouns. Point
out that adverbs usually describe verbs and
adjectives.
Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers.
Variation:
Have students circle the word
that comes after each part of the paired
conjunction so that they can see parallelism.
Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
Have students complete the task. Then go
over the answers and discuss alternative
answers. Do the same for Practice 8.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 41
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Transition Signals for Contrast
(page 187)
Have students read the Transition Signals
for Contrast introductory information.
Have students look at the chart on
page 187. Point out the labels on the chart.
Remind students that they are again using
what they learned in Chapters 4 and 7.
Sentence Connectors
(page 187)
Have students read the information about
sentence connectors, including the example.
Do the same for Coordinating Conjunctions
(page 187), pointing out the meaning
of but and yet, and for Subordinating
Conjunctions (page 188), pointing out the
meaning of while and whereas and the use
of commas. Also point out the meaning
of although, even though and though.
Have students read the examples. Point
out that clauses with these subordinating
conjunctions follow the general rule for
commas with dependent clauses that
students saw in Chapter 7.
Others
(page 188)
Have students look at the chart on page 187
and note the signals in the Others category
that show differences. Point out that again
there are three types of words and phases in
the Others category: prepositions, adverbs,
and verbs.
Have students read the examples of
prepositions, adverbs, and verbs. Point out
that prepositions are followed by nouns,
noun phrases, and pronouns. Point out
that adverbs usually describe verbs and
adjectives.
Point out the picture at the bottom of
page 188. Emphasize that the same word in
British English and American English can
have different meanings. (The photo will
also help students understand numbers 4
and 5 in Practice 9.) Point out that students
will continue focusing on differences in the
exercises that immediately follow.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Have students complete the task, using
words in the first three columns of the chart
on page 187. Then go over the answers.
(Note: Have students look at the chart and
review the explanations on pages 187–188
as needed.)
Read the directions for Practice 10 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise and
hand in their sentences.
Variation:
Have students (speakers of
the same language or speakers of different
languages) share information from their
sentences in groups. Have each group
select the most interesting difference
between their language and English. Have a
member of the group write the sentence that
describes the most interesting difference
on the board. Go over the sentences on
the board. Discuss the sentences for idea
content and the use of transition signals.
Applying Vocabulary
(page
190)
Have students turn to page 173 to review
what they learned about antonyms.
Read the directions for Practice 11 aloud.
Have students complete the task. Then go
over the answers, discussing alternative
answers.
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
(pages 191–193)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that they have used general
knowledge, personal knowledge, and
personal experience in the academic
paragraphs that they have written so far.
Explain that students will do research for
their next writing assignment.
Lo aching Notes 42
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Refer students to Appendix B on
pages 243–245. Have them identify the
sentences that they have written as simple,
compound, or complex. (When students
have used sentence connectors, have them
identify the sentences as simple sentences
even when they have used semicolons.)
Conducting an Interview
(page 191)
Have students close their books. Then
have them list ways to do research /
research sources (e.g., books, newspapers,
magazines, library databases, interviews,
surveys) that they are familiar with. Write
the list on the board. Point out that for
their next writing assignment students will
research their topic by doing an interview.
Have students give examples of interviews
(e.g., on television, on the radio, online).
Write their examples on the board. If
students have ever been interviewed or
done an interview, have them describe the
experience.
Have students open their books to page 191.
Go over the tips for good interview
questions.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity on page 191 aloud. Have students
complete the task.
Have students read along as you go over the
information in the Conducting the Actual
Interview section on page 192.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity on page 193 aloud. Have students
complete the task. Encourage students
to plan and conduct their interviews in a
timely fashion.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 194–195)
Tell students that they will write a
comparison / contrast paragraph about
education in two different countries.
Have students look at the Chapter 8 scoring
rubric on page 61 of this manual. Give
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 8 writing assignment and how they
will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students show you the chart of information
about education in their home country
and education in the country of their
interviewee. Ask students to clarify
information as needed.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. If students
need review of point-by-point and block
methods of organization or outlining, refer
them to pages 174–175.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 4: Go over the instructions for Step 4.
Have students review the procedures for
peer review in Appendix F (page 253).
Read the questions of the Chapter 8 Peer
Review (page 268) aloud. Have students
work with a partner and use the worksheet
to review each other’s drafts. If needed,
have students review the correction symbols
in Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have
writers revise their drafts and write draft
two based on their partner’s feedback and
their own ideas either in class or at home.
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 8 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 269). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 8
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 61 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 43
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 195)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
EXPANSION
(pages 195–196)
Timed Writing
(page 195)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Read the prompt and have students
begin writing. Collect their papers after
30 minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Double-Entry Journal Writing
(page 196)
Have students bring their journals to class.
On the next clean page of the journal,
have students draw a vertical line down
the middle of the page for a double entry
journal. Tell students that they are going to
follow a procedure similar to the one that
they followed for their double entry journal
in Chapter 7.
Tell students that they will write a personal
response. Then read the paragraph on page
196 that begins, “A personal response
exercise . . .”
Read the directions for the personal response
exercise aloud. Point out that students
must complete the first part of the personal
response on the left side of their journal
page and the second part on the right. Point
out the illustration on page 196. Also point
out that students will not paraphrase; they
will explain what they learned in Chapter 8
about block organization and point-by-point
organization. They will then give and explain
their opinion about cause / effect organization
based on their personal experience.
Have students complete the personal
response activity.
Collect your students’ journals. Read and
respond to them.
P A R T I I
C H A P T E R 9
Essay Organization
(pages 198–221)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 198)
Write the chapter title on the board and
read it aloud. At this point, say only that
in Chapter 9, students will do academic
writing that is longer.
Have students look at the photo and
describe what they see. Have students state
what country the people are in and how
they know that. Have students describe
greetings in their home country or culture.
Demonstrate two or three facial expressions
or gestures. Ask students to demonstrate
several examples of body language. Have
students define the term body language.
Have students answer the question under
the photo.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 9.
Lo aching Notes 44
EXTENSION:
Students will learn about citing sources
when they take more advanced writing
courses. If you want your students to do
citations for interview information in their
comparison / contrast paragraphs, use a
simple process. First, explain that it is
common in academic writing to do research
and include ideas that are not the writer’s.
Also explain that it is important to give
the source for any information that does
not come directly from the writer. Then
have students use a simple in-text citation.
Immediately after details that come from
their interviewees, have students add
information in the following way: First
Initial. Last Name, interview, Month DD,
YYYY. (The first initial and last name
are the first initial and last name of the
interviewee.)
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 199–201)
Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that in their writing assignments
students will continue to write about one
topic, that they will have a controlling
idea about the topic, that they will develop
the topic with main points of support
and supporting details, and that they will
write a conclusion. Emphasize length as a
main difference between a one-paragraph
composition and an essay.
Point out that essays have more than one
paragraph—they have an introductory
paragraph, several body paragraphs, and a
concluding paragraph.
Have students note how many paragraphs
there are in the writing model.
Analyzing the Model
(page 199)
Before students read the essay have them
look at the title. As they read, have them
pay attention to the kind of information that
is in each paragraph about body language.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page
201)
Read the introductory information. Have
students read the examples.
Write these words on the board: gestures,
transmit, and emotions. Have students
give more informal synonyms for the three
words. Point out that they should give
synonyms by using their knowledge of
English vocabulary and information they
learned when they read the writing model.
Read the directions for Practice 1 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers.
ORGANIZATION
(pages 202–215)
Have students look at the illustration. Point
out how the sentences in the introduction,
body, and conclusion of an academic
paragraph expand in an essay. Point out
how the parts of an academic paragraph
correspond to the parts of an essay.
Have students read the paragraph that is
below the illustration. Again point out what
kind of information is in the introduction
of an essay, what kind of information is
in the body of an essay, and what kind of
information is in the conclusion. Point
out the placement and purpose of a thesis
statement.
Review the terms unity and coherence.
Point out that essays must have unity and
coherence. Have students explain what they
should do to write cohesive essays (group
and present information logically by time,
causes, categories, etc.; use nouns and
pronouns consistently; and use transition
signals).
Introductory Paragraphs
(page 203)
Point out the two functions of the
introductory paragraph of an essay that are
given at the top of page 203.
Point out that there are different kinds
of introductory paragraphs but that
students will write a funnel introduction
in Chapter 9. Have students look at the
illustration of a funnel on page 204. Have
students explain the purpose of an actual,
physical funnel.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 45
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students make a list of
situations in which they use informal
language, both spoken and written (e.g.,
conversations with friends, text messaging,
and emails to friends). Then have students
give specific examples of the actual
informal language they use. Emphasize that
informal language is generally not used in
academic writing.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Point out that a funnel introduction starts
with a general statement to get the reader’s
attention and ends with a thesis statement
that presents the topic of the essay and the
controlling idea / what the writer wants
to say about the topic. Point out that
the sentences between the first general
statement and the thesis statement give
important background information and help
the reader focus on the topic of the essay.
Emphasize that the introductory paragraph
should gradually lead the reader to the
thesis statement.
Emphasize the importance of a good
thesis statement. Point out that the thesis
statement (1) presents the topic and what
the writer wants to say about the topic;
(2) may list subtopics (e.g., in the writing
model, the division of body language into
facial expressions, body gestures, and
physical contact); and (3) may mention
a method of organization (e.g., causes,
effects, similarities, differences).
Again using the illustration on page 204,
show how the introductory paragraph
in the writing model gradually moves
from the first general statement to the
thesis statement. (See the bulleted list on
page 203.)
Point out the Writing Tip on page 203.
Emphasize that the first sentence in the
introductory paragraph should not be
too general or too far removed from the
thesis statement. Have students read the
information about introductory paragraphs
that is on pages 203–204 for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers. Have a student read each
of the completed introductory paragraphs
aloud. Point out how the focus of the
paragraphs moves from wide to narrow.
Body Paragraphs
(page 205)
Have students turn to the writing model on
pages 199–200. Have students underline the
thesis statement. Then have students reread
the three body paragraphs and note the
topic sentences that they underlined when
they did the Questions about the Model
exercise.
Have students explain what kind of
information is in the topic sentence of
each body paragraph. Then have them
explain what kind of information is in
the remaining sentences of each body
paragraph. Have students review the
information at the top of page 205 for
homework.
Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers
Concluding Paragraphs
(page 206)
Have students reread the last paragraph
of the writing model. Point out that the
writer does three things: (1) starts with a
transition signal, (2) restates what she
wants to say about the topic, and (3) gives a
final comment. Point out the three purposes
of concluding paragraphs that are listed
at the top of page 206. Point out that for
number two, the writer can repeat the
thesis statement in different words and/or
summarize the main points of an essay.
Also point out that concluding paragraphs
must not have new information that has
not already been presented in an essay.
Have students review the information about
concluding paragraphs that is on page 206
for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers.
Variation:
Have students explain what is
wrong with the concluding paragraph(s)
that they did not select for each essay.
Transitions between Paragraphs
(page 209)
Have students read the introductory text.
For a quick review of transition signals,
have students look at the chart on page
209. Have students read the examples
for meaning and note punctuation. Also
point out the information about besides, in
addition, and in addition to that is at the
bottom of page 209.
Lo aching Notes 46
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Have students look at the chart at the top
of page 210, reading the examples for
meaning and noting punctuation. Also point
out the Writing Tip. (Note: Refer students
to Appendix B [pages 243–245] for
sentence types and connecting words and
Appendix C [pages 246–247] for transition
signals.)
Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers, discussing alternative answers. Do
the same for Practice 6.
Variation:
In Practice 5, have students
circle the transition signal that connects the
conclusion to the rest of the essay.
Essay Outlining
(page 213)
Have students read the introductory text
and look at the outline. Point out the use
of Roman numerals, capital letters, Arabic
numbers, and lowercase letters. Also point
out how the outline is indented each time it
moves from a Roman numeral to a capital
letter to an Arabic numeral to a lowercase
letter.
Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise in
steps. First, have students reread the writing
model. Next, have students look at the
illustration on page 213 again, and point out
that they will follow this style when they
outline the writing model. Have students
read the five points about outlines that are
at the bottom of page 213. Finally, have
students reread the directions for Practice 7
and complete their outlines.
Variation:
Have students add the
conclusion of the writing model to their
outlines. Point out that it is missing from
pages 214–215 due to limited space.
THE WRITING PROCESS
(pages 215–218)
Have students read the introductory
information about the steps in the writing
process that is on page 215.
Step 1: Remind students that they can
brainstorm / gather ideas for their writing
assignments in many ways, such as listing,
freewriting, clustering, etc. Have students
read Step 1 and look at the Kinds of Lies”
listing activity.
Step 2: Have students review the next
step in the writing process by reading
Step 2. Point out how the chart organizes
the information from the “Kinds of Lies”
listing activity. Point out that in the chart,
the writer deleted some of the information
in the original list and added other
information.
Remind students of the outlining activity
they did in Practice 7, and have them look
at the outline for “Kinds of Lies” on pages
216–217.
Read the directions for Practice 8 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Point out that students will
write about the kinds of problems they have
had with nonverbal communication for their
Chapter 9 Writing Assignment. Then have
students complete the task.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 47
EXTENSION:
Point out the parallel structure at each level
of the outline of the model paragraph (e.g.,
all topic sentences are complete sentences;
all main points are complete sentences; all
details are phrases). Point out that this type
of balance is common in formal academic
outlines.
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students review Step 1 and
Step 2 of the writing process and prepare an
outline for “Types of Communication.”
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Variation:
Have students work on the
Try It Out! activity on more than one day.
Writers often get ideas for their essays over
time, not all at once. For example, some
students may get ideas while traveling to
or from school, while eating dinner, or
while talking to friends outside of class.
Have students work together in class to
do the activity in number 1. Then have
students add to their lists for homework and
continue on to the organizing and outlining
activities during the next class meeting.
Applying Vocabulary
(page
218)
Have students review what they learned
about formal and informal vocabulary on
page 201.
Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Point out that students will replace two
words or phrases in each item. Have
students complete the activity. Go over the
answers.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 219–220)
Tell students that they will write an essay
about the kinds of problems that they have
had with nonverbal communication in
English.
Have students look at the Chapter 9 scoring
rubric on page 62 of this manual. Give
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 9 writing assignment and how they
will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
questions of the Chapter 9 Peer Review
(page 270) aloud. Have students work
with a partner and use the worksheet to
review each other’s drafts. If needed, have
students review the correction symbols in
Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have writers
revise their drafts and write draft two based
on their partner’s feedback and their own
ideas either in class or at home.
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 9 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 271). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 9
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 62 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 220)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
EXPANSION
(page 221)
Timed Writing
(page 221)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Point out the 50-minute time limit and the
new suggested times for completion of each
step in the timed writing process.
Read the prompt and have students
begin writing. Collect their papers after
50 minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Lo aching Notes 48
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
Summary Writing
(page 221)
Read the three key points for summary
writing aloud.
Have students reread the writing model on
pages 199–200 and write a summary of it.
C H A P T E R
10
Opinion Essays
(pages 222–239)
CHAPTER OPENER
(page 222)
Write the chapter title on the board and read
it aloud. Explain that opinion essays are
usually about controversial topics, that is,
topics that people disagree about.
Have students look at the photo and
describe what they see. Have students
explain where the people are, what they are
doing, and what their relationship is.
If students have not already discussed it,
point out that the woman on the right is
the mother of the two children and that she
is educating her children at home. Give
students the term homeschooling. (Give just
the term, not a lot of details.) Have students
answer the question under the photo.
Read the objectives aloud, or have students
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 10.
INTRODUCTION
(pages 223–225)
Have students read the introductory text.
Again point out that opinion essays are
usually about controversial topics.
Remind students that the essays they wrote
in Chapter 9 had multiple paragraphs:
an introductory paragraph, several body
paragraphs, and a concluding paragraph.
Have students look at the labels in the
margin to the left of the writing model and
note the structure / the organization of the
essay.
Analyzing the Model
(page 223)
Before students read the model, have them
look at the title and predict the writer’s
opinion about homeschooling. As they read,
have students pay attention to the writer’s
opinion and the reasons and details she
gives in support of her opinion.
Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers.
Variation:
Have a short discussion about
question 3 to remind students that body
paragraphs sometimes, but not always, have
a concluding sentence.
Noticing Vocabulary
(page
225)
Read the introductory information aloud.
Have students read the examples. (Note:
Encourage students to notice words that
commonly appear together in the materials
that they read. Noticing is a good way for
students to learn collocations.)
Read the directions for Practice 1, Part A
aloud. Point out that the information in
parentheses indicates where students will
find the collocations in the writing model.
Have students complete the exercise. Write
the answers on the board.
Read the directions for Practice 1, Part B
aloud. Have student complete the exercise.
Then go over the answers.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 49
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
In groups, have students review strategies
for restating information by making a list
of tips (e.g., use synonyms or vary sentence
structure). Have students share their lists.
Make suggestions as needed.
EXTENSION:
Point out that students can find collocations
in dictionaries such as the Longman
Dictionary of American English. Also point
out that most English-English dictionaries
have usage notes that can give information
on how English words are used together.
Use an example of a word like sleep in
the Longman Dictionary of American
English, which has both usage notes and
collocations that provide useful information
on word patterns.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
ORGANIZATION
(pages 226–230)
Have students read the introductory text.
Introductory Paragraphs in
Opinion Essays
(page 226)
Remind students that the introductory
paragraph of an essay has general
statements / background information that
lead to a thesis statement.
Remind students that opinion essays are
about controversial issues, that is, topics
that people disagree about. Point out that
the background information in opinion
essays explains the issue.
Have students read the example. Point
out that the general statements present
the problems that teenage gangs create
and several solutions to control teenage
gangs. The general statements then narrow
to one solution—curfew laws—and an
explanation of curfew laws. Point out that
the introductory paragraph ends with a
thesis statement.
Point out that the thesis statement for this
introductory paragraph presents the opinion
of police departments about gangs and the
writer’s opinion. Emphasize that the writer
disagrees with the police. Have students
circle the word but, which signals the
opposing opinion. Have students review the
information about introductory paragraphs
in opinion essays at home.
Read the directions for Practice 2, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tasks. Then go over the answers. Do the same
for Practice 3 and the Try It Out! activity.
Variation:
If students would like to work
on another controversial topic related to
education, allow them to do so. If students
would like to change their topic, allow them
to do so before they write the introductory
paragraph.
Body Paragraphs in Opinion
Essays
(page 228)
Have students read the introductory
information. Then go over the example
thesis statement and topic sentences. Point
out that each topic sentence states a reason
that explains the writer’s opinion.
Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
Before they give reasons, have each
pair discuss both sides of the issues in
Practice 3. Have students complete the
exercise. Then go over the answers.
Concluding Paragraphs in Opinion
Essays
(page 230)
Have students read the introductory
information and example. Point out that
the concluding paragraph summarizes the
reasons / main points about controlling
gangs that are in the example for body
paragraphs at the bottom of page 228.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. With a partner, have students
complete the exercise. Have students hand
in their papers.
DEVELOPING SUPPORTING DETAILS
(pages 230–235)
Remind students that they have been using
examples regularly as supporting details
in their writing. Explain that they will now
learn about using quotations and statistics
as supporting details.
Explain the information about doing
research and citing sources that is on
page 230. (If you want students to cite
sources for their quotations and statistics
for their Chapter 10 opinion essays, see
the Extension activity on page 52 of this
manual.)
Quotations
(page 230)
Have students read the introductory
information and the example. Point out that
the quotations are supporting details in a
body paragraph that explains why curfews
are unfair.
Lo aching Notes 50
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Have students read the concluding paragraph
of the model paragraph on pages 223–224
and explain the kind of information that is
included in the concluding paragraph.
Read the rules in the chart on page 231
aloud. Have students read the examples for
each of the rules, paying attention to the
bold and highlighted information. Have
students review the information about
quotations for homework.
Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Have
students refer to the chart on page 231 as
needed. Go over the answers.
Statistics
(page 232)
Explain that statistics are numbers, that
is, costs, amounts, percentages, and so on.
Point out that statistics, like quotations, are
an excellent kind of supporting detail and
are introduced by reporting phrases.
Have students read the introductory text and
example. Point out the reporting phrases
and the numbers. Also point out that the
example explains what the statistics prove.
Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers. Do the same for the Try It
Out! activity. Point out the Writing Tip.
Applying Vocabulary
(page
235)
Have students review what they learned
about collocations on page 225.
Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers.
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
(page 236)
Have students read the introductory
information.
Conducting a Survey
(page 236)
Explain what a survey is. Have students
give examples of surveys (e.g., customer
satisfaction surveys, telemarketing phone
surveys, employee surveys, student course
evaluations). If necessary, explain the
difference between a poll (short, quick,
possibly one question) and a survey
(usually longer and more time consuming).
If students have ever completed a survey or
conducted a survey, have them describe the
experience.
Variation:
Do an online search to find an
image of a survey. Display the image on a
screen in your classroom.
Explain that students will prepare and
conduct a survey to get information for
their Chapter 10 writing assignment.
Read the paragraph that begins, “Think
of questions.... ” Include the examples of
questions for a survey about the effect of video
games on children’s education. Point out that
only the first question (the general opinion
question) is a yes-no question; the remaining
questions are wh- information questions. Have
students review the information about surveys
on page 236 for homework.
Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Make sure that students
understand the purpose of their surveys—to
gather quotations and statistics that they can
use in their Chapter 10 writing assignment.
Have students complete the task.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT
(pages 237–238)
Tell students that they will write an opinion
essay on a topic related to getting a good
education.
Have students look at the Chapter 10
scoring rubric on page 63 of this manual.
Give students a paper copy of the rubric,
display it on a screen in your classroom,
and / or put it on your course website. Go
over the rubric with students so that they
understand what they are required to do for
their Chapter 10 writing assignment and
how they will be graded.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task. Point out that
students should highlight and underline
reasons and supporting details that explain
their opinion.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Teaching Notes 51
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
EXTENSION:
Find a student survey on your campus. Have
students fill out the survey and turn it in to
the group that is conducting the survey.
ngman
Academic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Te
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task. If necessary,
have students review the Essay Outlining
section in Chapter 9 (page 213).
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
questions of the Chapter 10 Peer Review
(page 272) aloud. Have students work
with a partner and use the worksheet to
review each other’s drafts. If needed, have
students review the correction symbols in
Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have writers
revise their drafts and write draft two based
on their partner’s feedback and their own
ideas either in class or at home.
Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 10 Writer’s Self-Check
in Appendix F (page 273). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 10
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 63 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation:
Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
how to use word processing features to
format their papers.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
(page 238)
Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
this manual.
EXPANSION
(pages 238–239)
Timed Writing
(page 238)
Go over the directions. Remind students not
to skip any steps.
Read the prompt and have students
begin writing. Collect their papers after
50 minutes.
Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
grade.
Writing an Opinion for
Publication
(page 239)
Have students read the introductory
information and the model.
Read the directions under the model aloud.
Have students complete the assignment. If
possible, have students submit their opinion
pieces to your school’s newspaper.
Variation:
If your course has a website or
a blog, post your students’ opinion pieces
there.
Lo aching Notes 52
EXTENSION:
If you want your students to cite sources
in their opinion essays, have them use a
simple in-text citation. Immediately after
quotations or statistics that come from their
surveys, have students add information
in the following way: First Initial. Last
Name, survey, Month DD, YYYY. (The
first initial and last name are the first initial
and last name of the student who wrote and
conducted the survey.)
EXTENSION:
If you publish your students’ opinion
pieces on a discussion board (on your class
website) or a blog, have students comment
on each other’s posts. Remind students
that they should be respectful in their
comments, just as they are when they do
peer review.
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
53
WRITING
ASSIGNMENT
SCORING RUBRICS
emic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Writing
Assignment
Sc
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 1: ACADEMIC PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about a person who has
made a difference.
15
2.
. . . begins with a sentence that names a person who
has made a difference.
10
3.
. . . has two or more ways that the person has made a
difference.
20
4.
. . . has sentences in logical order.
10
5.
. . . uses correct formatting.
15
6.
. . . has at least one subject and one verb in every
sentence.
10
7.
. . . uses nouns and verbs correctly.
5
8.
. . . has subject-verb agreement.
5
9.
. . . has a period after every sentence.
5
10.
. . . follows capitalization rules.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Acad oring Rubrics 54
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 2: NARRATIVE PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It tells a story about a
memorable experience.
15
2.
. . . begins with a sentence that tells the experience.
10
3.
. . . has details that match the purpose of the
paragraph.
20
4.
. . . has events in logical time order.
20
5.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
6.
. . . uses both simple and compound sentences
correctly.
10
7.
. . . uses and, but, or, and so correctly.
5
8.
. . . uses commas correctly.
5
9.
. . . has a period, question mark, or exclamation mark
after every sentence.
5
10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 55
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
emic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Writing
Assignment
Sc
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 3: BASIC PARAGRAPH STRUCTURE
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about a hobby or sport.
15
2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that states the topic
and controlling idea. The topic sentence is not too
general and not too specific.
10
3.
. . . has main points that support the topic sentence.
20
4.
. . . has clear examples.
10
5.
. . . has a conclusion that restates the controlling idea
or summarizes the main points. It may also give a
final suggestion or prediction.
10
6.
. . . uses signal words correctly to introduce the main
points, the examples, and the conclusion.
10
7.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
8.
. . . uses both simple and compound sentences
correctly.
10
9.
. . . uses adjectives and adverbs correctly.
5
10.
. . . uses correct punctuation, capitalization, and
spelling.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Acad oring Rubrics 56
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 4: LOGICAL DIVISION OF IDEAS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about shopping habits.
15
2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that clearly shows
the logical division of ideas (the main points).
10
3.
. . . presents each main point, plus supporting details
such as explanations, examples, and statistics.
20
4.
. . . has unity. All of the sentences in the body
support the topic sentence.
10
5.
. . . has coherence. The sentences are in logical
order. There are enough but not too many transition
signals. Nouns and pronouns are consistent.
10
6.
. . . ends with a concluding sentence that summarizes
the main points.
10
7.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
8.
. . . does not have run-on sentences or comma
splices.
10
9.
. . . uses periods, question marks, exclamation marks,
and commas correctly.
5
10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 57
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
emic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Writing
Assignment
Sc
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 5: PROCESS PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is a process paragraph
about self-improvement.
15
2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that names the topic
and uses words such as steps, procedure, process.
10
3.
. . . has all of the necessary steps in time order, with
time order signals.
20
4.
. . . has enough details for the audience to
understand the steps in the process.
10
5.
. . . has unity. All of the sentences in the body
support the topic sentence.
10
6.
. . . has a concluding sentence that gives the last step
in the process or states the purpose of the process.
10
7.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
8.
. . . uses simple, compound, and complex sentences
correctly.
10
9.
. . . uses punctuation, especially commas in complex
sentences, correctly.
5
10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Acad oring Rubrics 58
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 6: DEFINITION PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It defines a word, concept, or
custom.
15
2.
. . . begins with a good definition topic sentence. It
includes the word or thing to be defined, a category
or group, and special characteristics.
10
3.
. . . has enough who, what, where, when, how, why
details.
20
4.
. . . has unity and coherence.
10
5.
. . . has a good concluding statement that tells why
the topic is interesting or important.
10
6.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
7.
. . . has good description with appositives and
adjective clauses.
10
8.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex
sentences correctly.
10
9.
. . . uses punctuation correctly, especially commas
with appositives and adjective clauses.
5
10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 59
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
emic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Writing
Assignment
Sc
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 7: CAUSE / EFFECT PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is a cause / effect paragraph
about a social issue.
15
2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that states the topic
and whether the paragraph will focus on causes or
effect.
10
3.
. . . presents causes or effects in logical order.
20
4.
. . . has details that give examples and explain the
causes or effects clearly.
10
5.
. . . has a concluding sentence that restates the
controlling idea about the topic or summarizes the
main causes or effects.
10
6.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly.
10
8.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex
sentences correctly.
10
9.
. . . uses punctuation correctly.
5
10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Acad oring Rubrics 60
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 8: COMPARISON / CONTRAST PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE PARAGRAPH . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It compares or contrasts
education in two different countries and includes
interview information.
15
2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that states the topic
and whether the paragraph will focus on similarities,
differences, or both.
10
3.
. . . has either block or point-by-point organization.
10
4.
. . . has balanced comparison / contrast, with the
same points, in the same order, for education in each
of the two countries.
20
5.
. . . has a concluding sentence that restates the
topic sentence or summarizes the similarities and /
or differences. There may also be a final opinion or
recommendation.
10
6.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly.
10
8.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex
sentences correctly.
10
9.
. . . uses punctuation correctly.
5
10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 61
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
emic
Writing
Series
3,
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Writing
Assignment
Sc
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 9: ESSAY ORGANIZATION
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE ESSAY . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about kinds of problems
with nonverbal communication in English.
15
2.
. . . has a funnel introduction that moves from
general to more specific information about the topic.
10
3.
. . . has a thesis statement in the last sentence of the
introduction that states the topic and what the writer
wants to say about the topic.
10
4.
. . . has body paragraphs that support the thesis
statement. Each body paragraph describes one kind
of problem with nonverbal communication.
20
5.
. . . has unity. Each body paragraph has a topic
sentence and only those examples, statistics, facts,
etc. that are related to the topic sentence.
10
6.
. . . has a conclusion that restates the thesis and / or
summarizes the main points, and gives the writer’s
final opinion, recommendation, prediction, etc.
about the topic.
10
7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly.
5
8.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
9.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex
sentences correctly.
10
10.
. . . uses punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
correctly.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Acad oring Rubrics 62
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 10: OPINION ESSAYS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
THE ESSAY . . .
YOUR
SCORE
MAXIMUM
SCORE
1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is an opinion essay about
getting a good education.
15
2.
. . . has an introduction that clearly explains the
problem or issue.
10
3.
. . . has a thesis statement in the last sentence of the
introduction that presents the opposing view and
then the writer’s opinion.
10
4.
. . . has body paragraphs with reasons that support
the writer’s opinion, plus details that include
examples, statistics, and/or quotations.
20
5.
. . . has unity. Each body paragraph has a topic
sentence and only those examples, statistics,
quotations, etc. that are related to the topic sentence.
10
6.
. . . has a powerful conclusion that restates the thesis
and/or summarizes the main points and may have a
call for action.
10
7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly.
5
8.
. . . uses correct formatting.
5
9.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex
sentences correctly.
10
10.
. . . uses punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
correctly, especially punctuation for quotations.
5
TOTAL
100
Comments:
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 63
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
64
CHAPTER QUIZZES
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 1 QUIZ
A.
Find the errors in capitalization. Make corrections.
1. there was a terrible earthquake in haiti on tuesday, january 12, 2010.
2. earthquake victims received help from famous people such as bill clinton.
3. there was also a lot of support from hollywood actors such as sean penn.
4. the united nations is an international organization with headquarters in new york city.
5. the un can be seen in one of my favorite movies, north by northwest.
6. next semester, i will take english, math, and biology 101.
7. the university that i attend is located in eastern canada.
8. many of the students from africa speak french with the local residents.
B.
Use what you know about subject-verb patterns and prepositional phrases in
sentences. Circle the correct noun or verb form.
1. Volunteers (realization / realize) the importance of helping others.
2. I read about the (development / develop) of a volunteer music program.
3. Members of the Chicago Symphony Orchestra regularly (participation / participate) in
the program.
4. The musicians (entertainment / entertain) people in schools and even prisons.
5. The (beauty / beautify) of music can be part of everyone’s life.
6. An (organizer / organize) of the volunteer program is cellist Yo-Yo Ma.
C.
Find errors in noun and verb forms, subject-verb agreement, fragments, and
capitalization. Make corrections.
1. I was born on september 21, 1994 in the city of San Juan, Puerto Rico.
2. My father a performer with the San Juan Symphony. is a violinist.
3. He often travel with the orchestra to Europe and asia.
4. I currently a student at the Peabody Conservatory of the Johns Hopkins University in
baltimore.
5. The educate at this school is excellent. All of the professors is wonderful.
6. My father and mother will come to my graduate next year.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 65
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 2 QUIZ
A.
Read the sentences. Number them to create a time-order narrative. Then check ()
the box that gives the writer’s purpose.
By lunchtime, I had a long shopping list.
It was about 25% less money than I expected.
At the end of the workday, I opened the envelope and took out my paycheck.
In short, I learned a lesson that everyone should know—the government gets its tax
money first, and workers get what remains.
My first payday at my first job was very surprising.
I couldn’t believe it when I looked at the amount of the check.
Early that morning, I started thinking about all the things I could buy.
What is the writer’s purpose? to inform to persuade to entertain
B.
Complete the narrative paragraph. Use the words from the box. Capitalize and
punctuate them correctly. Use each word once.
My classmates and I had an incredible experience as we were leaving school yesterday.
we got on the elevator.
1. 2.
we were on the elevator alone. the doors opened on the
3.
8th floor a serious looking man in a business suit got
4.
on. It was the president of the university! There were several seconds of total silence.
the president started talking. He knew we were nervous
5.
he asked us a few questions about our classes. When the
6.
elevator doors opened on the first floor, we felt like we had a new “friend.”
(continued on next page)
apter Quizzes 66
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
after our last class at first so
and finally then
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 2 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
C.
Read the sentences. Add commas as needed.
1. I love any celebration that has crowds music and fireworks.
2. I go to the New Year’s Eve celebration in my hometown every year.
3. Last year it was raining but the celebration was still fantastic.
4. First there was music and dancing in the street.
5. There was jazz and rock music so the atmosphere was lively.
6. At midnight the fireworks started and everyone in the crowd cheered.
7. After the fireworks my friends and I were hungry so we went to a restaurant.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 67
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 3 QUIZ
A.
Check () the good topic sentences. What is wrong with the others? Write TS (too
specific) or TG (too general).
1. Studying vocabulary is part of learning a new language.
2. Alphabet and telephone are English words with Greek origins.
3. Electronic dictionaries have several advantages over paper dictionaries.
4. In addition to word definitions, English dictionaries have information about grammar
and pronunciation.
5. There are fast food restaurants in countries around the world.
6. A typical meal at a fast food restaurant has more than 700 calories.
7. Dairy Queen and Pizza Hut are popular fast food restaurants.
8. Americans continue to eat at fast food restaurants for three reasons.
B.
Add the main points from the box under the correct topic sentence.
Topic Sentence: Air travel is becoming increasingly expensive.
Main Points:
Topic Sentence: International air travel is often uncomfortable.
Main Points:
(continued on next page)
apter Quizzes 68
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
The
cost
of
airplane
tickets
gets
higher
every year.
Seats
are
generally
small
and
close
Travelers
are
on
international
flights
for
long periods of time.
Many
airlines
no
longer
serve
free
meals, so passengers must pay for food.
More
and
more
airlines
require
passengers
to pay an extra fee to check their luggage.
Time zone
changes
cause
problems.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 3 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
C.
Find errors in signal words, and in adjective and adverb forms. Do not change
punctuation. Make corrections.
It takes a lot to be a marathon runner. To begin with, marathoners need great physical
and mental strength to complete their 26.2-mile races successful. Next, running a marathon
requires great commitment and discipline. Amateur runners active begin their long hours
of training months before a race. They run three to four days a week. They also work out
in the gym and pay close attention to parts of their daily routine for example their diet
and sleep schedule. In addition, marathoners need emotional support. Such as, they find a
running partner or join a group of runners to help them through the long hours of training.
On the day of the race, marathoners feel energized when they hear the loudly cheers
of their family and friends. It is clearly that there are many requirements for marathon
success.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 69
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 4 QUIZ
A.
Complete the paragraph with transition signals from the box. Capitalize and
punctuate them correctly. Use each signal once.
a second kind of shopper
finally
however
all in
all
first
of
all
such
as
There are three types of shoppers that you will commonly see in shopping malls.
there is the recreational shopper. These individuals
1.
spend a lot of time at the mall. they make few
2.
purchases. They spend most of their time looking at the merchandise, looking at
other shoppers, and looking for ways to have fun.
3.
is the power shopper. Power shoppers enter the mall empty handed but leave with
bags full of items shoes, jewelry, and cosmetics.
4.
shoppers in the in-and-out category do just what their
5.
name suggests. They go in the mall, buy what they need, and leave as quickly as possible.
the different kinds of shoppers add to the atmosphere of
6.
malls.
(continued on next page)
apter Quizzes 70
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 4 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
B.
Read each sentence. Write if there is a run-on or comma splice error. Then correct
each sentence that you marked. There may be more than one possible correction.
1. Emails are fast and easy, so they have replaced letters for many people.
2. Text messages are popular social networking sites are another common way of
communicating.
3. Americans used to visit the post office regularly. However, a trip to the post office
is rare these days.
4. Some people pay their credit card bills by mail, others pay online.
5. The post office has mailing supplies you can buy envelopes and boxes, for
example.
6. The postal worker weighs your package, then you pay the shipping cost.
7. I want to return a pair of pants that I bought online, therefore, I need to go to the
post office.
8. The post office has beautiful stamps. I plan to get some to add to my stamp
collection.
C.
Find errors in unity, coherence, pronoun consistency, and noun consistency.
Make corrections.
An animal living in a modern zoo enjoys several advantages over an animal in the wild.
The first advantage is that a zoo animal is separated from their natural enemies. Many zoos
have free admission. Another advantage is that zoo employees feed the animal regularly.
As a result, they will never have to hunt for food or suffer in times when food is hard to
find. The animal is protected, so it lives without risk of being attacked. A third advantage
of living in zoos is that veterinarians give the animals regular checkups and any special
medical care it needs. Opponents of zoos feel that animals should live in their natural
environment. In short, zoos have a number of benefits.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 71
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 5 QUIZ
A.
Read the sentences. Number them in time order. Then check () the box that gives
the writer’s audience.
First, get an application form from the Office of Financial Aid in Room 232 of the
Administration Building.
Next, get a letter of recommendation from one of your instructors.
If you complete the application process and do well in your classes this year, you
have an excellent chance of receiving a scholarship.
After you complete the application form, write a personal statement that explains
why you should receive scholarship funds.
Finally, turn in the application form and the letters before the March 1 deadline.
Second, fill the application out completely and accurately.
To apply for a scholarship for next year, complete these steps.
Who is the audience for the paragraph? students parents of students
B.
Combine the clauses and the subordinators in parentheses to make complex
sentences. Do not change the order of the clauses. Use correct capitalization and
punctuation.
1. (when) Students get home from school. They want a quick and easy meal.
2. (if) You look in your refrigerator. You should find everything you need.
3. (after) You break two fresh eggs into a bowl. Mix in salt, pepper, and three tablespoons
of milk.
4. (so that) Add fresh vegetables to the mixture. You can increase the nutritional value of
your eggs.
5. (as) The eggs cook. You should push them around gently with a fork.
6. (because) You will want to make scrambled eggs often. They are delicious and nutritious.
(continued on next page)
apter Quizzes 72
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 5 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
C.
Find errors in time-order signals, dependent clauses, capitalization, and
punctuation. Make corrections.
Follow this simple process. So that you can improve your English vocabulary. First,
keep a small notebook in your pocket, purse, or backpack. You can also use a digital
tablet or smart phone if you have one. You simply need a place to write useful words and
phrases. Second pay attention to vocabulary. However, don’t write a word or phrase in your
notebook, until you hear it at least three times. After you encounter the vocabulary item
several times. You will know it is important. Next add information to your notebook when
you go home each night. Write details that you remember. If you are uncertain about the
spelling or meaning of the vocabulary use your dictionary. Finally, review the contents of
your vocabulary notebook at the end of each week because it will help you remember the
new vocabulary.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 73
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 6 QUIZ
A.
Check () the good topic sentences for definition paragraphs. What is wrong with
the others? Write NCat (no category) or NChar (No characteristics).
1. IMAX is a movie projection system.
2. A meteorologist is a scientist who studies the weather.
3. Presbyopia is a vision problem that keeps older people from focusing on what is
close to them.
4. A condiment adds to the flavor of sandwiches and other food.
5. The equator is an imaginary line that circles the center of the earth.
6. A phoneme is the part of language that is the smallest unit of sound.
B.
Circle the best relative pronoun for each adjective clause.
1. Impressionism, (which / that / who) became popular in the 19th century, was first
developed in France.
2. Impressionism was developed by artists (who / whom / which) focused on light and
color in their work.
3. Claude Monet, (who / that / which) was a leader of the Impressionist movement,
painted scenes from the French countryside.
4. Many artists paint scenes from the areas (that / which / where) they live.
5. Most paintings (that / who / when) you see in museums are worth millions of dollars.
6. I visited the Louvre in 2010, (which / where / when) I traveled to Paris.
7. I enjoyed the art history course (which / that / where) I took last year.
(continued on next page)
apter Quizzes 74
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 6 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
C.
Find errors in appositives and adjective clauses. Add punctuation or change one
word to correct each error.
Walter Gropius, a German-born architect, designed simple “glass box” buildings that
they changed the look of cities worldwide. He was particularly influential from 1919
to 1932, which he was the director at the Bauhaus a German school of design. At the
Bauhaus, Gropius was a leader of the International Style, that helped reshape architecture.
In contrast to the ornately decorated stone structures that was popular in earlier times,
Gropius created steel and glass buildings that had straight lines and no decoration. He
made another major contribution to the building industry by making designs that builders
could mass-produce them. Gropius was also known for his belief in the value of teamwork.
In sum, Gropius and his followers transformed cities from Toronto to Tokyo, which their
influence can still be seen today.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 75
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 7 QUIZ
A.
Students often do not get enough sleep. Identify the causes and effects for their lack
of sleep. Write C next to the four causes. Write E next to the four effects.
1. Students have part-time jobs after school.
2. Students have trouble paying attention in class.
3. Students have problems with short-term and long-term memory.
4. Students go out with their friends and come home late.
5. Students get sick easily.
6. Students have a lot of assignments to do.
7. Students eat more and gain weight.
8. Students spend hours watching television and playing video games.
B.
Combine the clauses and the transition signals in parentheses to make complex
sentences. Do not change the order of the clauses. Use correct capitalization and
punctuation.
1. (therefore) Most soft drinks contain caffeine. We should limit the number of soft drinks
we have each day.
2. (because) Soft drinks are also a problem. They contain sugar or other sweeteners.
3. (so) I am trying to lose weight. I am eating smaller amounts of food at each meal.
4. (since) A small green salad has fewer calories than a sandwich and potato chips. I eat a
salad for lunch every day.
5. (because of) There are health concerns. Shoppers want to buy organic foods, which are
produced without the use of human-made chemicals.
6. (consequently) Organic farming is time consuming and expensive. Shoppers pay a high
price for organic fruits and vegetables.
(continued on next page)
apter Quizzes 76
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 7 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
C.
Find errors in transition signals, fragments, run-ons, and comma splices. Add,
delete, or move one word to make corrections. Do not change capitalization or
punctuation. Make corrections.
1. Public transportation is important because of it allows residents and visitors to move
easily around the city.
2. Parking fees are high in the downtown area, because more commuters have started
taking public transportation instead of driving to work.
3. As a result overcrowded trains, it is difficult to get a seat during rush hour.
4. Commuters are angry and upset, Mayor Lee is requesting increases in ticket prices on
buses and subway trains.
5. Consequently, Mayor Lee says that our buses and trains require costly repairs. City
Transit System fare increases are necessary in his opinion.
6. Since Mayor Lee has powerful supporters in city government, will almost certainly get
the fare increases that he wants.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 77
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 8 QUIZ
A.
Write T if an item is true. Write F if it is false.
1. A comparison / contrast paragraph must focus on either similarities or differences.
2. When you compare two things, you analyze their similarities.
3. The point-by-point method of organization is better than the block method of
organization.
4. It is important to have the same points of support, in the same order, in a
comparison / contrast paragraph.
5. Likewise is a transition signal that shows differences.
6. A writer can give an opinion or a recommendation in the conclusion of a
comparison / contrast paragraph.
7. The topic sentence of a comparison / contrast paragraph should name the topic
and indicate the controlling idea.
8. The word equally is a transition signal that shows similarities.
B.
Combine the clauses and the transition signals in parentheses to make complex
sentences. Do not change the order of the clauses. Use correct capitalization and
punctuation.
1. (although) I have strong computer skills. I do not like taking online classes.
2. (both. . . and) Online instruction is offered at this university. Face-to-face classes are
offered at this university.
3. (not only. . . but also) Students in online courses complete reading assignments. Students
in online courses participate in group discussions.
4. (but) In a classroom, I can get answers to my questions immediately. I have to wait up to a
day to get email answers from my online professor.
5. (similarly) Students take exams in traditional face-to-face classes. There are tests in online
courses.
6. (unlike) My online courses have not given me a chance to make new friends. My face-to-
face classes have given me a chance to make friends.
(continued on next page)
apter Quizzes 78
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 8 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
C.
Find errors in transition signals, parallelism, fragments, run-ons, and comma splices.
Add, delete, or move one word to make corrections. Do not change capitalization or
punctuation.
1. There are both similarities and are differences in writing an academic paragraph and
giving a formal speech in class.
2. Students should give clear examples not only in academic writing but also in formal
class presentations. Similar, both compositions and speeches should have a conclusion.
3. The ideas in academic paragraphs must be developed both complete and logically just
like the ideas in a formal presentation.
4. You must pay attention to spelling when you are writing, although you have the more
difficult problem of correct pronunciation when you are giving a speech.
5. Signals such as in conclusion and in summary equally important for academic
paragraphs and formal speeches.
6. I always feel nervous when I have to do a timed writing in class, I am anxious and
fearful when I stand up to give a speech, too.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 79
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 9 QUIZ
A.
Write T if an item is true. Write F if it is false.
1. A funnel introduction moves from general to specific.
2. In an essay, the thesis statement of an essay is the first sentence of the
introduction.
3. A thesis statement includes the topic of an essay and a controlling idea.
4. Each body paragraph of an essay has a topic sentence.
5. Transition signals are used only within paragraphs.
6. Unity means that the ideas in an essay have logical organization.
B.
Read the sentences in each group. Then number them to create a good funnel
introduction.
Paragraph 1
However, each culture develops its own musical forms and styles.
Because there are people from different cultures who live in the United States, there is
great variety in American music.
Music is truly a universal language.
In the United States, the connection between music and culture can be seen in three
styles of music: bluegrass, Cajun, and Latin jazz.
Paragraph 2
When daylight saving time is in effect, there is an additional hour of sunlight available
for evening activities.
Daylight saving time, which is also called summer time, is the practice of moving
clocks forward one hour during warm weather months.
In fact, daylight saving time has a number of negative effects.
Although daylight saving time is widely used, there are complaints when it begins each
year.
C.
Find errors in punctuation. Make corrections.
In short Mr. Smith had several qualities of a great teacher. He was well informed
about his subject. In addition to knowledge. Mr Smith had a great love of history, and his
enthusiasm for it rubbed off on his students. Furthermore his lectures were well organized,
and he returned papers and tests promptly, even though he taught five different classes. His
classes were interesting and he told funny stories to keep even the sleepiest student awake
and engaged in learning. Mr. Smith taught more than just history, Mr. Smith also taught us
to love learning.
apter Quizzes 80
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 10 QUIZ
A.
Circle the best contrast signal to complete each thesis statement for an opinion essay.
1. (Although / However / Despite) sidewalk cafés are good business for downtown
restaurants in the summer months, I oppose these outdoor eating areas for three reasons.
2. (On the other hand / Though / Despite) the protection that bike helmets give, I feel that
riders should not be required to wear helmets for two very important reasons.
3. According to city officials, local parks close at 11:00 p.m. due to safety concerns. (Even
though / Moreover / However), I believe that the parks should be open to the public at
all times.
4. Loud music and cell phone conversations can certainly be annoying, (and / but / however)
I strongly disagree with the decision to have “quiet cars” on suburban commuter trains.
5. (While / However / In spite of) it may be true the new shopping mall will provide jobs
and increase tax revenues, I think that we will get similar benefits by having small
family-owned stores on Main Street.
6. The majority of students are against a tuition increase because of their personal concerns
about money. (Despite / In contrast / In addition), I am in favor of the proposed increase
because the university needs additional funds to pay for higher instructional costs.
B.
Read the paragraph. Write T if an item is true. Write F if it is false.
In short, I am in favor of a maximum speed limit of 55 m.p.
H
. on highways because
it simply makes sense. Driving at speeds faster than 55 m.p.
H
. saves little time, especially
on crowded highways. In addition, high speed driving can lead to accidents, and when
those accidents occur they are likely to cause serious injuries or even death. Driving at
a maximum speed of 55 m.p.
H
. helps automobiles use less gas, which saves money and
is good for the environment. I urge state lawmakers to lower high speed limits, and I
encourage all motorists to “drive at 55” regardless of the speed limit.
1. This paragraph is the introduction for an opinion essay.
2. In the writer’s opinion, all cars should travel at 55 m.p.
H
.
3. In the paragraph, the writer summarizes the reasons for her opinion.
4. The paragraph is probably part of an essay that has two body paragraphs.
5. Statistics about car accidents are probably included in the essay.
6. The paragraph has a call to action.
(continued on next page)
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quizzes 81
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
Longman
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Ch
NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 10 QUIZ
(continued from previous page)
C.
Find errors in quotation marks, commas, and capitalization. Make corrections.
1. The owner of a restaurant on State Street said, “my profits increase by 27% during the
summer months”.
2. “Customers,” he said, “Enjoy eating outdoors in the fresh air and sunshine.”
3. One of the commuters who I interviewed stated, “I want to be able to relax and talk to
my friends when I am on the train.
4. “We are already overworked” explained a conductor on the train. He added, “there is no
way to ensure that the train cars remain quiet.”
5. In his responses to my survey questions, one of my professors wrote, “we desperately
need to increase the bandwidth on the school’s wifi.
6. “How can I teach effectively without technology?” He asked.
7. “We expect costs for electricity and cleaning staff to go up approximately 10%” said
the president.
apter Quizzes 82
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. Duplication for classroom use is permitted.
83
CHAPTER QUIZ
ANSWER KEY
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Quiz
CHAPTER QUIZ ANSWER KEY
am
CHAPTER
1
QUIZ
T
H
A.
1. there was a terrible earthquake in haiti on
T
J
tuesday, january 12, 2010.
E
2. earthquake victims received help from famous
B C
people such as bill clinton.
T
3. there was also a lot of support from
H S P
hollywood actors such as sean penn.
T
U
N
4. the united nations is an international
N
Y
organization with headquarters in new york
C
city.
T UN
5. the un can be seen in one of my favorite
N
N
movies, north by northwest.
N
I
E
6. next semester, i will take english, math, and
B
biology 101.
T
I
7. the university that i attend is located in
C
eastern canada.
M
A
F
8. many of the students from africa speak french
with the local residents.
B.
1. realize
2. development
3. participate
4. entertain
5. beauty
6. organizer
S
C.
1. I was born on september 21, 1994 in the city
of San Juan, Puerto Rico.
is
2. My father a performer with the San Juan
He
Symphony. is a violinist.
s
3. He often travel with the orchestra to Europe
A
and asia.
4. I currently a student at the Peabody
Conservatory of the Johns Hopkins University
B
in baltimore.
education
5. The educate at this school is excellent. All of
are
the professors is wonderful.
6. My father and mother will come to my
graduation
graduate next year.
CHAPTER
2
QUIZ
A.
3, 6, 4, 7, 1, 5, 2
The writer’s purpose is to inform.
B.
1. After our last class,
2. At first,
3. Then
4. , and
5. Finally,
6. , so
C.
1. I love any celebration that has
crowds
,
music
,
and fireworks.
2. (no commas needed)
3. Last year
,
it was raining
,
but the celebration
was still fantastic.
4. First
,
there was music and dancing in the
street.
5. There was jazz and rock music
,
so the
atmosphere was lively.
6. At midnight
,
the fireworks started
,
and
everyone in the crowd cheered.
7. After the fireworks
,
my friends and I were
hungry
,
so we went to a restaurant.
Long Answer Key 84
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
.
social
CHAPTER
3
QUIZ
A.
Check sentences 3, 8
Too specific: 2, 4, 6, 7
Too general: 1, 5
B.
Topic Sentence: Air travel is becoming
increasingly expensive.
Main Points: The cost of airplane tickets gets
higher every year.
More and more airlines require passengers to pay
an extra fee to check their luggage.
Many airlines no longer serve free meals, so
passengers must pay for food.
Topic Sentence: International air travel is often
uncomfortable.
Main Points: Travelers are on international
flights for long periods of time.
Seats are generally small and close together.
Time zone changes cause problems.
C.
It takes a lot to be a marathon runner. To
begin with, marathoners need great physical and
mental strength to complete their 26.2-mile races
CHAPTER
4
QUIZ
A.
1. First of all,
2. However,
3. A second kind of shopper
4. such as
5. Finally,
6. All in all,
B.
X
2. Text messages are popular.
S
networking sites are another common
way of communicating.
X
4. Some people pay their credit card bills
O
by mail
.
, others pay online.
X
5. The post office has mailing supplies.
Y
you can buy envelopes and boxes, for
example.
X
6. The postal worker weighs your
T
package, then you pay the shipping
cost.
X
7. I want to return a pair of pants that I
successfully
successful. Next, running a marathon requires
great commitment and discipline. Amateur
actively
runners active begin their long hours of training
months before a race. They run three to four days
a week. They also work out in the gym and pay
close attention to parts of their daily routine for
such as
example their diet and their sleep schedule. In
addition, marathoners need emotional support.
For
example
Such as they find a running partner or join
a group of runners to help them through the
long hours of training. On the day of the race,
marathoners feel energized when they hear the
loud
loudly cheers of their family and friends. It is
clear
clearly that there are many requirements for
marathon success.
T
bought online
.
, therefore, I need to go
to the post office.
C.
An animal living in a modern zoo enjoys
several advantages over an animal in the wild.
The first advantage is that a zoo animal is
its
separated from their natural enemies. Many zoos
have free admission. Another advantage is that
zoo employees feed the animal regularly. As a
it
result, they will never have to hunt for food or
suffer in times when food is hard to find. The
being attacked. A third advantage of living in
zoos is that veterinarians give the animals regular
checkups and any special medical care it needs.
Opponents of zoos feel that animals should live
in their natural environment. In short, zoos have
a number of benefits.
animal is protected, so it lives without risk of
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quiz Answer Key 85
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Quiz
CHAPTER
5
QUIZ
A.
2, 5, 7, 4, 6, 3, 1
The audience for the paragraph is students.
B.
1. When students get home from school, they
want a quick and easy meal.
2. If you look in your refrigerator, you should
find everything you need.
3. After you break two fresh eggs into a bowl,
mix in salt, pepper, and three tablespoons
of milk.
4. Add fresh vegetables to the mixture so that
you can increase the nutritional value of
your eggs.
5. As the eggs cook, you should push them
around gently with a fork.
6. You will want to make scrambled eggs often
because they are delicious and nutritious.
C.
s
Follow this simple process. So that you
can improve your English vocabulary. First,
keep a small notebook in your pocket, purse, or
backpack. You can also use a digital tablet or
smart phone if you have one. You simply need a
place to write useful words and phrases. Second
,
pay attention to vocabulary. However, don’t write
a word or phrase in your notebook, until you hear
it at least three times. After you e
y
ncounter the
vocabulary item several times
,
. You will know
it is important. Next
,
add information to your
notebook when you go home each night. Write
details that you remember. If you are uncertain
about the spelling or meaning of the vocabulary
,
use your dictionary. Finally, review the contents
of your vocabulary notebook at the end of each
week because it will help you remember the new
vocabulary.
CHAPTER
6
QUIZ
A.
Check sentences 2, 3, 5, 6,
No category: 4
No characteristics: 1
B.
1. which 5. that
2. who 6. when
3. who 7. that
4. where
C.
Walter Gropius, a German-born architect,
designed simple “glass box buildings that
they changed the look of cities worldwide.
He was particularly influential from 1919 to
when
1932, which he was the director at the Bauhaus
,
a German school of design. At the Bauhaus,
Gropius was a leader of the International Style,
which
that helped reshape architecture. In contrast to
were
the ornately decorated stone structures that was
popular in earlier times, Gropius created steel
and glass buildings that had straight lines and no
decoration. He made another major contribution
to the building industry by making designs that
builders could mass-produce them. Gropius
was also known for his belief in the value of
teamwork. In sum, Gropius and his followers
where
transformed cities from Toronto to Tokyo, which
their influence can still be seen today.
CHAPTER
7
QUIZ
A.
1. C 5. E
2. E 6. C
3. E 7. E
4. C 8. C
B.
1. Most soft drinks contain caffeine. Therefore,
we should limit the number of soft drinks we
have each day.
2. Soft drinks are also a problem because they
contain sugar or other sweeteners.
3. I am trying to lose weight, so I am eating
smaller amounts of food at each meal.
4. Since a small green salad has fewer calories
than a sandwich and potato chips, I eat a salad
for lunch every day.
5. Because of health concerns, shoppers want
to buy organic foods, which are produced
without the use of human-made chemicals.
6. Organic farming is time consuming and
expensive. Consequently, shoppers pay a high
price for organic fruits and vegetables.
Long Answer Key 86
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
C.
1. Public transportation is important because of
it allows residents and visitors to move easily
around the city.
2. Parking fees are high in the downtown area,
so
because more commuters have started taking
public transportation instead of driving to
work.
of
3. As a result overcrowded trains, it is difficult
3. The ideas in academic paragraphs must be
completely
developed both complete and logically just
like the ideas in a formal presentation.
4. You must pay attention to spelling when
but
you are writing, although you have the more
difficult problem of correct pronunciation
when you are giving a speech.
5. Signals such as in conclusion and in summary
to get a seat during rush hour.
for
are
equally important for academic paragraphs
4. Commuters are angry and upset, Mayor Lee
is requesting increases in ticket prices on
buses and subway trains.
5. Consequently, Mayor Lee says that our buses
Consequently,
and trains require costly repairs. City Transit
System fare increases are necessary in his
opinion.
6. Since Mayor Lee has powerful supporters in
he
city government, will almost certainly get the
fare increases that he wants.
CHAPTER
8
QUIZ
A.
1. F 5. F
2. T 6. T
3. F 7. T
4. T 8. T
B.
1. Although I have strong computer skills, I do
not like taking online classes.
2. Both online instruction and face-to-face
classes are offered at this university.
3. Students in online courses not only complete
reading assignments but also participate in
group discussions.
4. In a classroom, I can get answers to my
questions immediately, but I have to wait
up to a day to get answers from my online
professor.
5. Students take exams in traditional face-to-
face classes. Similarly, there are tests in
online courses.
6. Unlike my online courses, my face-to-face
classes have given me a chance to make
friends.
C.
1. There are both similarities and are differences
in writing an academic paragraph and giving
a formal speech in class.
2. Students should give clear examples not only
in academic writing but also in formal class
Similarly
presentations. Similar, both compositions and
speeches should have a conclusion.
and formal speeches.
6. I always feel nervous when I have to do a
and
timed writing in class, I am anxious and
fearful when I stand up to give a speech, too.
CHAPTER
9
QUIZ
A.
1. T 4. T
2. F 5. F
3. T 6. F
B.
Paragraph 1: 2, 3, 1, 4
Paragraph 2: 2, 1, 4, 3
C.
In short
,
Mr. Smith had several qualities of
a great teacher. He was well informed about his
subject. In addition to knowledge.
,
Mr Smith
had a great love of history, and his enthusiasm
for it rubbed off on his students. Furthermore
,
his
lectures were well organized, and he returned
papers and tests promptly, even though he taught
five different classes. His classes were interesting
,
and he told funny stories to keep even the
sleepiest student awake and engaged in learning.
Mr. Smith taught more than just history
.
, Mr.
Smith also taught us to love learning.
CHAPTER
10
QUIZ
A.
1. Although 4. but
2. Despite 5. While
3. However 6. In contrast
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Chapter Quiz Answer Key 87
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Chapter
Quiz
,
,
B.
1. F 4. F
2. F 5. T
3. T 6. T
C.
1. The owner of a restaurant on State Street said,
M
“my profits increase by 27% during the
summer months”.
.”
e
2. “Customers,” he said, “Enjoy eating outdoors
in the fresh air and sunshine.
3. One of the commuters who I interviewed
stated, “I want to be able to relax and talk to
my friends when I am on the train.
4. “We are already overworkedexplained a
T
conductor on the train. He added, “there is
no way to ensure that the train cars remain
quiet.”
5. In his responses to my survey questions, one
W
of my professors wrote, “we desperately need
to increase the bandwidth on the school’s
wifi.”
6. “How can I teach effectively without
h
technology?” He asked.
7. “We expect costs for electricity and cleaning
staff to go up approximately 10%” said the
president.
Long Answer Key 88
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
89
STUDENT BOOK
ANSWER KEY
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
STUDENT BOOK ANSWER KEY
CHAPTER 1
(pages 230)
Questions about the Model
(page 4)
1. The paragraph is about George Lucas.
2. George Lucas has changed the film industry in
many ways.
3. Examples of capitalization are George Lucas (a
person’s name), Star Wars, Harry Potter, Pirates
of the Caribbean, and Star Trek (movie titles),
and THX and CGI (abbreviations).
4. In Sentence 1, “has changed” is the verb.
PRACTICE 1: Identifying Nouns and
Verbs in Word Families
(page 4)
Noun
Verb
writer
write
1.
contributor
2.
contribution
contribute
1. educator
2. education
educate
improvement
improve
1.
revolution
2.
revolutionary
revolutionize
PRACTICE 2: Forming Nouns
(page 5)
assistance
beautification
brightness
criticism
excitement
leader
simplification
Try It Out!
(page 10)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 3: Applying Capitalization
Rules
(page 12)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. El Salvador—place on a map
3. San Salvador—place on a map
4. United States—place on a map
5. New York—place on a map
6. Aunt Rosa—title and name of a person
7. Brooklyn—place on a map
8. City College—name of a school
9. English—name of a language
10. Spanish—name of a language
PRACTICE 4: Correcting Capitalization
Errors in Sentences
(page 12)
H
2. her major is business.
T
C
3. thanksgiving is a holiday in both canada and
U S
the united states, but it is celebrated on different
days in the two countries.
I
T
4. it is celebrated on the fourth thursday in
N U S
november in the united states and on the second
M
O
C
monday in october in canada.
I
T
5. istanbul is a seaport city in turkey.
G
C
B
6. greenhills college is located in boston,
M
massachusetts.
I
A
7. i am taking four classes this semester: american
S E
history, sociology 32, economics 40, and a
digital product design course.
I
E
H
8. i just read a good book by ernest hemingway
T
O
M
S
called the old man and the sea.
M
S
9. my roommate is from the south, so she speaks
E
english with a southern accent.
T
J
B
10. the two main religions in japan are buddhism
S
and shintoism.
Long Answer Key 90
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
PRACTICE 5: Correcting Capitalization
Errors in a Paragraph
(page 13)
I
Y
i enjoyed reading your paragraph. you are the
C
A
I
I
first person from central america i have met. i was
C
I
D
living in chicago before i moved here last december.
U E
until now, everyone in my english classes came from
A
C
T
V
asian countries, such as china, thailand, and vietnam,
M
E
I
or from countries in the middle east. i would like
F
I
to know more about your goals. for example, i
want to know how a nurse is different from a nurse
I
practitioner. i would also like to know how many
B
science classes you need to take after biology 101 to
I
become a nurse practitioner. in your paragraph, you
S
say that your only special talent is speaking spanish,
I
but i think you have other talents if you are going to
Y
work in the field of medicine. your science classes
will enable you to get a job, but being able to take
care of others is a very special talent.
C L
christine li
Try It Out!
(page 13)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 6: Identifying Subjects,
Verbs, and Prepositional Phrases
(page 15)
3. Audiences loved the film and the characters
(in it).
4. George Lucas wrote the story and planned the
special effects.
5. He worked (with talented artists and engineers).
6. Lucas and his team designed and built an
imaginary world (of good and evil).
7. (In the original Star Wars), Luke Skywalker
becomes a freedom fighter.
8. The heroes (in Luke Skywalker’s life) are Jedi
knights.
9. Darth Vader represents the evil Empire and
always wears black.
10. (At the end of the film), moviegoers applauded
the defeat (of the evil Empire).
PRACTICE 7: Using Nouns and Verbs
Correctly
(page 15)
2. Obi-Wan’s wisdom and life lessons transform
Luke Skywalker (into a Jedi knight)
3. George Lucas’s THX sound system and
computer-generated images really improve the
battle scenes (in Star Wars).
4. An innovator (like Lucas) experiments (with
new ideas).
5. Action films are full (of excitement) (for movie
fans).
PRACTICE 8: Making Subjects and
Verbs Agree
(page 17)
Subject
2. Basketball games on television make big profits
for the NBA.
Subject
3. The sale of T-shirts, hats, and other NBA
products is also good for business.
Subject
4. Some of the NBA games are on television in
countries outside the United States.
Subject
5. Some of the success of the NBA is because of
individual players.
Subject
6. There were more NBA games on TV in China
after 2002, the year that Yao Ming started
playing for the Houston Rockets.
Subject
7. There was a very good reason for the NBA’s
increase in popularity.
Subject
8. Most of the new Chinese fans were originally
fans of Ming.
Subject
9. Now each of the NBA games on Chinese
television attracts millions of viewers.
Subject
10. Ming’s popularity with Chinese fans has made
him one of the most important athletes ever to
play in the NBA.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 91
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
xample,
help
Is
an
excellent
PRACTICE 9: Editing a Paragraph for
Errors in Subject-Verb Agreement
(page 17)
Golf is no longer just a favorite sport of wealthy
middle-aged businessmen or senior citizens. Young
are
people around the world is playing the game, and
have
some of them has caused a lot of excitement. One
is
of the young stars are Sergio Garcia, a fascinating
golfer from Spain. Garcia was born in 1980 and
started golfing at the age of three. He became a
professional golfer in 1999 at the age of 19. Garcia
caught the world’s attention by hitting a golf shot
at a target from behind a tree with his eyes closed.
Two other young golf stars are Michelle Wie and
are
Ryo Ishikawa. Both of them is quite different
from the traditional golfer. Wie, born in Hawaii in
1989, is Korean-American. She shocked everyone
by competing against men—and beating many of
them—at the age of fourteen. Today she is one
of the world’s best female golfers. Ishikawa is a
professional Japanese golfer who was born in 1991.
In 2007, he became the youngest player ever to win
a professional golf tournament in Japan. Each of
has
his victories since then have shown his incredible
athletic skill, and he has become a favorite with
fans. In 2011, after a terrible earthquake in Japan,
Ishikawa impressed his fans once again by promising
to donate all of the money he earned that year to
are
help the earthquake victims. Of course there is still
older golfers who continue the traditions of the sport,
but these three young athletes show how golf is
changing.
PRACTICE 10: Correcting Sentence
Fragments
(page 19)
work
3. City Year volunteers in the United States,
England, and South Africa.
X
4. For e
they
elementary and middle
school children with their homework.
are
5. They role models for young children.
X
7.
City Year is
way for university students
to learn from life experiences.
they
8. At the end of their City Year, receive
money to pay for their university tuition.
PRACTICE 11: Editing a Paragraph to
Correct Sentence Fragments
(page 19)
My best friend is Suzanne. We have known each
She
helped
other since childhood. Helped me in a very special
way. At the age of ten, I moved to a new town.
It was
Was very scary for me to go to a new school.
was
I very shy. In fact, I was afraid to speak to anyone.
Suzanne asked me to eat lunch with her on my first
day. During the next several months, she helped
me to adjust to life in school and out of school,
is
too. Now Suzanne in Venezuela with her husband
and three children. We have not seen each other for
eight years. However, we stay in touch by email and
We telephone
on Facebook. Telephone each other at least once a
month. Suzanne changed my life. We will be friends
forever.
Long Answer Key 92
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
X
X
X
PRACTICE 12: Using Nouns and Verbs
in Sentences
(page 20)
A
Noun
Verb
bravery brave
creation
creativity
creator
create
encouragement encourage
enjoyment
enjoy
equality
1. equal
2. equalize
length
lengthen
1.
modernism
2.
modernization
modernize
transformation
transform
B
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. Steve jobs transformed the music industry with
the Apple iPod.
2. J. K. Rowling created Harry Potter and changed
the way young people feel about reading.
3. Thomas Alva Edison lengthened our days. He
invented the electric light bulb.
4. Martin Luther King Jr. fought for equality of all
people.
5. Pablo Picasso helped to make modernism a
popular style of art in the early 20th century.
Try It Out!
(page 23)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 23)
Answers will vary.
CHAPTER 2
(pages 3150)
Questions about the Model
(page 32)
1. The purpose of the narrative is to entertain
readers with an exciting story.
2. 1, 7, 11, 18
3. suddenly in Sentence 4; at first in Sentence 5;
then in Sentence 6; meanwhile in Sentence 10;
at last in Sentence 12; then in sentence 14; and
next in Sentence 16.
PRACTICE 1: Identifying Compound
Nouns
(page 33)
something—Sentence 7
dining table—Sentence 8
bedroom—Sentence 9
meanwhile—Sentence 10
herself—Sentence 10
nobody—Sentence 13
cell phone—Sentence 14
nothing—Sentence 17
tea cups—Sentence 17
dinner plates—Sentence 17
PRACTICE 2: Forming Compound
Nouns
(page 33)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
Mother Earth, earthworm, earth science
weekday, week night
PRACTICE 3: Identifying Time-Order
Signals
(page 34)
suddenly, then, at first
PRACTICE 4: Using Time-Order
Signals
(page 35)
A
2. Then
3. At the beginning of November,
4. Meanwhile,
5. Soon
6. A week before Thanksgiving,
7. Early in the morning,
8. After that,
9. About 2:00 in the afternoon,
10. Finally,
B
2. At 9:00 a.m.,
3. After our trip to the salon,
4. Several hours before the party,
5. At the beginning of the party,
6. Next,
7. Then
8. Later,
9. After that,
10. Finally,
PRACTICE 5: Arranging Sentences in
Time Order
(page 37)
Group 1: 4, 2, 7, 5, 8, 1, 6, 3
Group 2: 8, 6, 5, 1, 3, 4, 2, 7
Group 3: 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, 5, 1, 8, 2
Try It Out!
(page 38)
Answers will vary.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 93
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
PRACTICE 6: Identifying the Main
Purpose of a Narrative
(page 38)
1. I 2. E 3. P
PRACTICE 7: Writing According to
Your Purpose
(page 39)
A
1, 2, 5
B
To inform
Questions about the Model
(page 40)
1. two
2. He was truly generous when he gave the rice
balls to the mice, and he did not ask for a lot in
return.
Practice 8: Identifying Compound
Sentences
(page 42)
A
2.
, but (compound sentence)
3.
and (simple sentence)
4.
,
and (compound
sentence)
5.
, so (a compound sentence)
7.
and (simple sentence)
9.
, or (compound sentence)
10.
, but (compound sentence)
12.
and (simple sentence)
13.
,
and (compound
sentence)
14.
, so (compound sentence)
15.
,
and (compound
sentence)
16.
, so (compound sentence)
B 2.
SS
3.
SS
4.
SS
5.
CS
. . . sad, and . .
.
6.
SS
7.
SS
8.
CS
. . . rope, or . .
.
9.
CS
.
.
. rope,
but .
.
.
10.
SS
11.
CS
.
.
. decision,
but .
.
.
12.
CS
.
. . mountains,
so . .
.
13.
SS
14.
SS
15.
SS
16.
SS
Practice 9: Forming Compound
Sentences
(page 42)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. She heard a noise and decided to go back to her
enclosure.
3. She walked for a long time, but she couldn’t
find the road.
4. Finally, she became very tired and tried to rest,
but her fear prevented her from sleeping.
5. Suddenly, a wolf appeared and looked at her
hungrily.
6. She shouted for help, but no one heard her.
7. The wolf ate Blanchette, and the poor old man
never saw his little goat again.
8. Blanchette wanted to be free, but she did not
realize that freedom can be accompanied by
danger.
Practice 10: Writing Compound
Sentences
(page 43)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 44)
Answers will vary.
Practice 11: Using Commas Correctly
(page 44)
A
2. Tomiko and Keiko are from Japan
,
and Nina
and Daisy are from Mexico.
4. Last week
,
the girls decided to have a joint
birthday party
,
so they invited several friends
for dinner.
5. Nina wanted to cook Mexican food
,
but
Keiko wanted to have Japanese food.
6. Finally
,
they agreed on the menu.
7. They served Japanese tempura
,
Mexican
arroz con pollo
,
Chinese stir-fried vegetables
,
and American ice cream.
8. First
,
Nina made the rice.
10. After that
,
Tomiko prepared the vegetables.
11. After dinner
,
Daisy served the dessert.
B
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 12: Using Compound
Nouns in Sentences
(page 46)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 47)
Answers will vary.
Long Answer Key 94
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
CHAPTER 3
(pages 5178)
Questions about the Model
(page 52)
1. taking a break / taking time off from work /
relaxing
2. Relaxing has specific benefits.
3. summarizes the main points
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Forming
Adjectives
(page 53)
A
9. positive
10. wonderful
11. regular
12. healthy, additional
B
2. beneficial
3. creative
4. energetic
5. functional
6. helpful
7. productive
8. readable
9. studious
10. stressful
Practice 2: Predicting Content from
the Controlling Idea
(page 55)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. Types of jobs that are dangerous. Examples of
the dangers of specific jobs. Reasons that some
jobs are dangerous.
2. Examples of repetitive and boring jobs.
Problems (e.g., carpal tunnel syndrome and
accidents) for workers who have repetitive and
boring jobs. A narrative about a typical day at a
repetitive and boring job.
3. Kinds of jobs that are perfect for college
students. Examples of perfect jobs for college
students. Reasons that a specific job is perfect
for college students. A contrast between a job
that is good for students and a job that is not
good for students.
Practice 3: Identifying Good Topic
Sentences
(page 55)
A
Check sentences 3, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12
Too specific: 5, 7
Too general: 4, 11
B
2. a 3. c
Practice 4: Writing Good Topic
Sentences
(page 58)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. There are a number of reasons that people do
not eat breakfast.
3. Travelers who want to visit Grand Canyon
National Park should plan their trip carefully.
Try It Out!
(page 60)
Answers will vary.
Practice 5: Writing Main Points
(page 61)
Answers will vary.
Practice 6: Using Example Signals
(page 63)
2. such as
3. For instance,
Practice 7: Identifying Main Points
and Examples
(page 63)
Example: Others play sports.
Main Point: The next benefit is creativity.
Example: Individuals with hobbies such
as photography, travel, and music develop
new talents and get ideas that they can use at
school or in the office.
Main Point: Finally, interests outside of work
can lead to a positive attitude.
Example: For instance, when volunteers help
children learn to read, they feel wonderful
about what they have achieved. Then they feel
like working harder when they return to their
regular responsibilities.
Practice 8: Identifying Effective
Concluding Sentences
(page 65)
b
Practice 9: Writing Effective
Concluding Sentences
(page 66)
Answers will vary.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 95
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
Practice 10: Putting Sentences in the
Correct Order
(page 67)
A
8, 3, 10, 9, 2, 6, 5, 4, 1, 7
B
Main Point: The first type of game will allow you
to relax quietly but will also keep your brain active.
Example: For example, sudoku mentally
challenges players to look for patterns with
numbers.
Example: Other brain games such as
crossword puzzles, word search puzzles, and
word jumbles require language skills.
Main Point: Next, if you prefer spending time
with others, there are games with a social element.
Example: For instance, when you play
checkers or chess or when you play cards with
a group of friends, you are also developing
personal relationships.
Example: The same is true of board games
such as Monopoly and Settlers of Catan,
which have been bringing people together for
friendly competition for decades.
Main Point: Finally, there are games for people
who like the idea of being on a team and enjoy
physical activity.
Example: The most obvious examples are
sports such as basketball, baseball, and soccer,
but party games such as charades can get
quite physical as well.
Concluding Sentence: Indeed, the wide
variety of games offers something to just about
everyone.
Try It Out!
(page 68)
Answers will vary.
Questions about the Model
(page 69)
1. peaceful, sunny, and adventurous
2. typically
3. According to the paragraph, people like
adventure travel for the chance to experience the
unknown. They like experiences that are new
and exciting.
Practice 11: Identifying Adjectives
and Adverbs
(page 70)
A
2. Backpackers and trekkers typically visit
mountainous areas (on a trip).
3. Smart travelers carefully research and plan
the details (of their departure and arrival).
4. Websites quickly provide helpful information
(for vacationers).
5. Active travelers may sit and relax quietly (for
part of their trip).
B
2. adjective: mountainous adverb: typically
3. adjective: smart adverb: carefully
4. adjective: helpful adverb: quickly
5. adjective: active adverb: quietly
PRACTICE 12: Choosing between
Adjective and Adverbs
(page 71)
economical
possible
specifically beautiful
cheaply wise
closely significantly
final basic
intelligent
PRACTICE 13: Editing a Paragraph for
Word Form Errors
(page 71)
Foodies love incredible meals, so they eat and
ly
drink adventurous on their vacations. In their
global
globally travels, they enthusiastically try the local
cuisine. In addition to popular restaurants with
professional chefs, they visit family restaurants and
unusual
bravely eat unusually foods in open-air markets.
typical
Another typically activity for food lovers is taking
cooking classes. With their instructor, they shop for
speical
specially ingredients and watch demonstrations.
Then they skillfully use what they have learned. True
foodies usually do one final thing before the end of
ly
a trip. They careful put all of their new recipes in a
ly
safe place so that they can quick use them when they
get home. Clearly, these travelers want good food
both at home and on the road.
PRACTICE 14: Using Adjectives
(page 72)
A
enjoyable negative
reliable useful
analytical direct
specific cautious
B
Answers will vary.
Long Answer Key 96
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
PRACTICE 15: Outlining an Academic
Paragraph
(page 75)
A
1. Supporting Detail: for individuals who
want physical challenges; e.g., scuba diving
on The Great Barrier Reef, cross-country
skiing in Yellowstone, and exploring the
jungles of the Amazon by boat
2. Supporting Detail: for anyone who likes
high levels of excitement and danger
B. Main Point: Soft adventure still gives travelers
an opportunity to have new and exciting
experiences in beautiful locations, but it is
usually less risky and more comfortable.
1. Supporting Detail: less danger in
studying a language during a homestay but
still thrilling
2. Supporting Detail: activities such as
hot-air ballooning and bird watching for a
fresh way to see the world
B
Topic Sentence: There are three kinds of bad
drivers you see on the streets and highways of
almost any country.
A.
Main Point: The first kind of bad driver is
the aggressive driver who has big dreams of
being a Grand Prix racer.
1. Supporting Detail: quick to leave when
traffic light turns green
2. Supporting Detail: too fast; above the
speed limit and always in the passing lane
B.
Main Point: The second kind of bad driver
is the busy modern multitasker; e.g., working
mothers and overworked businesspeople.
1. Supporting Detail: other activities while
driving; e.g., eating, drinking coffee, talking
on the phone, and disciplining children
C.
Main Point: The last kind is the cautious driver
who drives extremely slowly and carefully.
1. Supporting Detail: No faster than 40 mph
on highways; down to 30 mph on every
curve
2. Supporting Detail: Almost completely
stopped to make a turn
Concluding Sentence: In conclusion, bad
drivers can be speedsters, “slowsters,” or just
inattentive motorists, but you have to watch out
for all of them!
CHAPTER 4
(pages 79101)
Questions about the Model
(page 81)
1. three reasons, Sentence 2 (the topic sentence)
2. the first reason is (Sentence 3), that leads me
to the second reason (Sentence 8), finally
(Sentence 15)
3. examples and explanations
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Finding
Synonyms
(page 81)
A
2. d 5. b
3. a 6. c
4. f 7. e
B
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. business, firm
2. complex, difficult
3. helpful, useful
4. catastrophe, failure, ruin, tragedy
5. big, crucial, essential, key, major, significant,
vital
6. charge, cost, fee
PRACTICE 2: Recognizing Logical
Division
(page 83)
“Why I Don’t Have a Credit Card” (the writing
model); “Secrets of Good Ads” (Practice 4,
Paragraph 1); “Cookies, but Not the Ones to Eat”
(Practice 4, Paragraph 2); “Kinds of Salespeople”
(Practice 5, Paragraph 2); “Part-Time Jobs”
(Practice 6); “Black Friday” (Practice 10); “Getting
a Parking Space at the Mall” (Practice 11);
“Why Advertisers Care about Young Shoppers”
(Practice 13).
PRACTICE 3: Outlining for Logical
Division
(page 84)
A.
Main Point: The first reason is that using
a piece of plastic instead of cash makes
shopping too easy.
1. Supporting Detail: buy unnecessary items
2. Supporting Detail: buy $75 pink sandals
without enough money to pay for them
B.
Main Point: That leads me to the second
reason I refuse to have a credit card. I would
end up owing money.
1. Supporting Detail: buy a lot like
shopaholic Sara
2. Supporting Detail: have a big debt like
Sara; now $4,000 in debt
3. Supporting Detail: be in debt for years if
monthly interest charges are higher than
minimum monthly payments
C.
Main Point: I avoid using credit because
I have difficulty understanding credit card
agreements.
1. Supporting Detail: difficult legal
vocabulary
2. Supporting Detail: fine print—small type
with important details
3. Supporting Detail: late fees or higher
interest rates
Concluding Sentence: To sum up, credit cards may
be convenient for some people, but for me, they are a
plastic ticket to financial disaster.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 97
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
man
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teachers
Manual
Student
Book
Try It Out!
(page 84)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 4: Editing Paragraphs for
Unity
(page 85)
Paragraph 1: Teenagers have a surprising amount of
money to spend, so advertisers research
teenage fads and fashions.
Paragraph 2: Some people believe that cookies will
damage their computers, but this is not
true.
PRACTICE 5: Editing Paragraphs for
Coherence
(page 86)
Paragraph 1
Move: In 2007, the iPhone achieved great success,
especially because of the variety of apps that were
available for it.
To follow: One year later, in 2003, BlackBerry
further developed smart phone technology.
Paragraph 2
Move: Like a friend, he asks how you are and listens
attentively as you tell him about your life.
To follow: The first type of salesperson is the one
who pretends to be your best friend.
PRACTICE 6: Identifying Consistent
Use of Nouns and Pronouns
(page 88)
Part-time jobs are beneficial for students in a
number of ways. First, of course, they provide
much needed income. They make it possible
for students not only to pay their bills but also
to have extra spending money for clothing and
entertainment. Next, part-time jobs offer valuable
experience. Students who have them quickly learn
the importance of being responsible, following
directions, and working as members of a team. Some
part-time jobs can also teach useful skills such as
basic accounting or database management. Finally,
having part-time jobs while going to school teaches
students how to become efficient. Working students
must learn to balance their schedules so that they
are able to complete their academic assignments
and keep up with the duties of their jobs. All in all,
part-time employment has significant advantages for
students.
PRACTICE 7: Editing a Paragraph for
Consistency
(page 89)
Young people who are interested in fashion
buyers
may want to consider working as a buyer for retail
stores. Retail buyers work for department stores
and large chain stores. They look for and choose the
stores
merchandise to sell in the store. Retail buyers often
specialize in one type of merchandise, such as men’s
They
casual clothing or women’s shoes. You choose the
they
their
merchandise that you think will sell well in your
their
stores and appeal to your customers. Buyers also
travel to trade shows and fashion shows to look at
They
merchandise. He or she will purchase products about
six months before the merchandise appears in the
They
stores. You need to be able to predict fashion trends,
understand retail sales, and work cooperatively with
managers in sales, advertising, and marketing.
PRACTICE 8: Comparing Two
Paragraphs for Coherence
(page 92)
A
Paragraph 2 is more coherent. It has transition
signals to connect ideas. It also repeats key
nouns and uses synonyms such as female-women
and shoppers-customers.
B
Clothing store owners who understand the
differences between male and female shoppers
can use this knowledge to design their stores
effectively. Female customers use their five
senses when they shop. For example, women
want to touch and feel fabrics and see themselves
in clothes. Because of women’s shopping style,
owners of women’s clothing stores place the
latest fashions and clothes with luxury fabrics
near the entrance. Furthermore, they put items
near one another to allow women to visualize
how several items will look together as an outfit.
They also group clothes not by item type but
by style—classic or casual, for instance. Most
Long Answer Key 98
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
men, on the other hand, go shopping out of
necessity. They buy clothes only when they have
to. Men get a pair of jeans because their old
ones have worn out. They probably want to buy
exactly the same type of jeans. Moreover, men
prefer to buy at a store that has everything in its
place. They like all shirts together over here and
all pants together over there. This way, they can
purchase what they need quickly and leave the
store. You can see that men’s clothing stores are
arranged very differently from women’s for good
reason.
PRACTICE 9: Using Transition Signals
for Similar Ideas
(page 93)
2.
, and
3.
Similarly,
4.
also
PRACTICE 10: Using Transition
Signals for Logical Division of Ideas
and Examples
(page 94)
2. A second strategy
3. For example,
4. Then
5. Finally,
6. such as
PRACTICE 11: Using Various
Transition Signals for Coherence
(page 95)
2. For example
3. however
4. Next
5. so
6. such as
7. also
8. Finally
9. To sum up
PRACTICE 12: Correcting Run-ons and
Comma Splices
(page 97)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
X
3. At many schools, students must pay high
tuition fees. Textbooks cost a lot, too.
X
4. Saving money is not easy. It takes careful
planning.
X
5. First, you make a budget, and then you
follow it carefully.
X
7. Last month, my credit card bills were
high. I owed more than $700.
PRACTICE 13: Editing a Paragraph to
Correct Run-ons and Comma Splices
(page 98)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
There are three main reasons why advertisers
target young people. First of all, advertisers know
that individuals in the 18–to–34 age group do a lot
of consumer spending. When young people go to
college and start to live on their own, for example,
they have to buy many basics. For school, they need
books, computer equipment, and other items. For the
home, they need furniture, kitchen appliances, and
O
dishes
.
of course they may also want a luxury item
such as a television. A second reason to target young
shoppers is that they tend to be more impressionable
T
than older adults
.
therefore, they are easier to
influence. Advertisers use young people’s concern
T
about “the cool factor” to sell them products
.
they
know that young adults often make purchases to keep
up with the latest styles. Finally, advertisers focus
on young consumers because 18-to-34-year-olds
and
have a lifetime of buying ahead of them, advertisers
want them to become loyal to a brand. If consumers
buy a product and grow attached to it when they
are young, they are likely to continue to buy it
throughout their lifetimes. Building brand loyalty is
I
an important advertising tool
.
it works for all kinds of
products from small items like running shoes to large
purchases such as cars. In short, young adults may
not have a great deal of money, but advertisers work
very hard to get them to buy their products now and
in the future.
Practice 14: Using Near Synonyms to
Avoid Repetition
(page 99)
A
young shoppers (A second reason to target young
shoppers . . . )
young adults (. . . young adults often make
purchases . . . )
young consumers (Finally, advertisers focus on
young consumers . . . )
B
Answers will vary.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 99
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
an
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
A
After you have received a helpful response
CHAPTER 5
(pages 102120)
Questions about the Model
(page 104)
1. As an experienced student, I know that it is
easier to make a good impression on your course
instructors if you follow these fundamental steps.
The words if you follow these fundamental steps
lets readers know that the paragraph will explain
a process.
2. First, before you go to class, do all of the
assigned reading and homework.
Second, arrive for class a few minutes early.
Next, participate actively throughout the lesson.
Finally, when the class meeting ends, remain
seated.
3. It gives the positive result of following the steps
in the process. The information helps show the
purpose of the paragraph.
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Forming
Phrasal Verbs
(page 104)
A
clear up—Sentence 18
going on—Sentence 7
jump at—Sentence 12
keep up—Sentence 4
speak up—Sentence 13
turn off—Sentence 8
B
2. break down
3. fall through
4. mix up
5. wipe out
6. drop in
PRACTICE 2: Writing Topic Sentences
for Process Paragraphs
(page 106)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 3: Identifying and Using
Time-Order Signals
(page 107)
A
first—Sentence 3; second—Sentence 5;
next—Sentence 9; finally—Sentence 15
B
2. Second,
3. The third step
4. Finally
5. To sum up,
PRACTICE 4: Arranging Supporting
Sentences in Time Order
(page 108)
Group 1: 2, 7, 4, 1, 6, 5, 8, 3
Group 2: 1, 6, 8, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7
PRACTICE 5: Stating the Purpose in
Concluding Sentences
(page 109)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 6: Identifying the Audience
(page 109)
A
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
The intended audience for the model paragraph
is students who need tips for success in school.
They could be students who have not been
getting good grades or new students.
The topic sentence specifically states that the
writer is an experienced student who has been in
school and knows how to get good grades. Along
with each step in the paragraph, the writer gives
details that provide the kind of information that
students with problems or new students might
need.
B
The intended audience is new international
students.
Circled text: you and your classmates . . . put
everything into your bag or backpack . . . Even if
it is your first emergency situation
Try It Out!
(page 110)
Answers will vary.
Questions about the Model
(page 111)
1. simple
2. sentences 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16
3. two SV combinations connected by before
PRACTICE 7: Identifying and
Analyzing Complex Sentences
(page 114)
A
Sentences 1, 3, 15
B
2. It is usually impossible to get a response
people.
3.
two business days
,
you should send a
second email.
4.
,
send a follow-up email to thank the
professor.
5.
your instructors may send out important
notices.
6.
subject line of an email
,
you had better pay
attention.
Longm nswer Key 100
If you have not received an answer within
Check your school email regularly since
Whenever you see the word test in the
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
right away because professors are very busy
After the teacher collected the tests
7.
you have received permission from your
instructor.
8.
handed out their test.
9.
The students worked on the test problems
10.
CHAPTER 6
(pages 121147)
Questions about the Model
(page 123)
1. courage
2. the quality of being brave in a dangerous or
difficult situation
3. the writer gives the origin of courage and
explains how the origin is connected to the
meaning of the word; the writer also gives
examples of courageous people
11.
12.
writing
they put down their pencils.
,
she
dismissed the class.
,
she promised to post their
test scores in the grade book of their course
website.
PRACTICE 1: Exploring a Word’s
History
(page 123)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. Astro means “star.”
2. An astronaut travels in space (to the stars).
Astronomy is the scientific study of the stars. An
aster is a star-shaped flower.
3. Naut means “ship.”
4. The words are all related to ships, sailors, and
water. An astronaut is a traveler / sailor in a
PRACTICE 8: Writing Complex
Sentences
(page 115)
A
2. f 5. d
3. a 6. b
4. e
You will not be late for early morning
classes if you follow several time-efficient steps.
Begin the process by deciding what to wear the
next day before you go to bed at night. Then
get out of bed in the morning as soon as your
alarm clock rings instead of sleeping an extra
five or ten minutes. You should keep your alarm
as far from your bed as possible because it will
force you to get up and stay up. Then when you
are in the shower, stick to a two-minute limit
to save not only water but also time. The final
step requires you to bring your breakfast to class
unless your professor has rules against food in
the classroom.
B
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 115)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 9: Using Phrasal Verbs in
Sentences
(page 117)
Answers will vary.
spaceship. A nautilus is a type of sea animal.
Nautical an adjective that means “relating to
ships and sailors.”
PRACTICE 2: Learning the Meaning of
Idioms
(page 124)
go the distance—Sentence 4
put everything on the line—Sentence 9
from head to toe—Sentence 18
go to pieces—Sentence 18
in my book—Sentence 20
PRACTICE 3: Choosing a Topic
Sentence for a Definition Paragraph
(page 125)
b
PRACTICE 4: Completing Topic
Sentences for Definition Paragraphs
(page 126)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 5: Identifying the Kind of
Support in a Definition Paragraph
(page 126)
Supporting sentences: It is also called a USB drive,
thumb drive, jump drive, or pen drive. No matter
what it is called, the device is the same. A flash drive
is similar to a small computer hard drive. However,
it has no moving parts, and it can be easily removed
and carried in a pocket, in a bag, or on a keychain. A
flash drive usually connects to a computer through
a USB port and comes in a variety of shapes, sizes,
and colors.
c
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 101
Do not be absent on the day of a test unless
The students were silent as the professor
until the teacher told them to stop.
As soon as the instructor told them to stop
Before she left
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
an
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
A
,
PRACTICE 6: Choosing Concluding
Sentences for a Definition Paragraph
(page 127)
d
Try It Out!
(page 128)
Answers will vary.
Questions about the Model
(page 129)
Sentence 3: No Rooz, Iranian New Year, which
begins on the first day of spring, is one of these.
The underlined which clause gives extra information
about Iranian New Year.
Sentence 5: On a special table, they display seven
foods with names that start with the letter s in
Persian, the language of Iran.
The underlined that clause gives necessary
information about the seven foods on the Iranian
New Year table.
2. Persian is the language of Iran. The comma
indicates that a definition or explanation of
Persian follows.
3. Iranian New Year and Halloween both have a
connection to nature. Iranian New Year is on the
first day of spring. Halloween began hundreds
of years ago as a celebration of the end of the
farming season in Ireland and England.
PRACTICE 7: Identifying and
Punctuating Appositives
(page 131)
NI
3. In the movie, Bill Murray is meteorologist
Phil Connors.
EI
4. Phil Connors has to go to Punxsutawney
,
a small town in the mountains of western
Pennsylvania.
EI
5. On February 2, Punxsutawney has a
celebration for Groundhog Day an old
mid-winter holiday.
NI
6. Phil Connors and his coworker Rita plan
to stay in Punxsutawney for just 24 hours.
EI
7. The worst kind of winter weather, a
blizzard
,
forces Phil and Rita to remain in
Punxsutawney.
EI
8. Romantic comedies funny movies about
,
love
,
always have a happy ending, and
Phil and Rita’s February 2 story does, too.
PRACTICE 8: Identifying and
Punctuating Adjective Clauses
(page 132)
NI
2. Before Christianity existed, people in
northern and central Europe worshiped a
goddess whom they called Eostre.
EI
3. Eostre which means east was the goddess
,
,
of spring.
NI
4. Every spring, people who worshiped her
held a festival to give thanks for the return
of the sun’s warmth.
NI
5. They offered the goddess cakes that they
baked for the festival.
NI
6. These cakes were very similar to the hot
cross buns that bakeries now sell at Easter.
EI
7. Also, the custom of coloring eggs which
,
families do at Easter
,
came from ancient
cultures.
EI
8. Even the popular Easter Bunny who brings
,
chocolate eggs and other candy to children
on Easter Sunday
,
has pagan roots.
PRACTICE 9: Writing Complex
Sentences with Subject Pronouns
(page 134)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. Many Christians do not eat certain foods during
Lent, which is the six-week period before Easter
Sunday.
3. People who practice the Hindu religion cannot
eat beef.
4. Muslims and Jews cannot eat pork, which is
considered unclean.
5. Muslims cannot eat or drink at all in the daytime
during Ramadan, which is a holy month of
fasting.
6. The festival, which follows the end of Ramadan,
lasts for three days.
PRACTICE 10: Writing Complex
Sentences with Object Pronouns
(page 136)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
A
2. The special food that Koreans eat on Chuseok
includes songpyun rice cakes.
3. Kimchi, which Koreans prepare with
cabbage, other vegetables, and spices, is also
part of a typical Chuseok meal.
4. The traditional activities that Koreans have
for Chuseok show the importance of family in
Korean culture.
Longm nswer Key 102
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
B
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. The name of the festival is Loy Krathong, which
English speakers translate as “Festival of the
Floating Leaf Cups” or “Festival of Lights.”
3. Thais float little boats, which they have made
out of banana leaves, lotus, or paper, down a
river in the evening.
4. The Loy Krathong boats, which Thais have
decorated with lighted candles, incense, coins,
and flowers, float on the water in the moonlight.
5. Thais want the wish that they have made with
their boat to come true.
PRACTICE 11: Writing Complex
Sentences with When or Where
(page 138)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. The Cinco de Mayo holiday commemorates
the Battle of Puebla on May 5, 1862, when the
Mexican army defeated the invading French
army.
2. The spring equinox in the Northern Hemisphere
occurs in March, when daytime and nighttime
are approximately equal in length.
3. On the Fourth of July, Americans go to places
where they can get great views of traditional
fireworks shows.
4. Rio de Janeiro, where millions of people
celebrate Carnaval each year, is famous for its
beaches, its mountains, and its music.
PRACTICE 12: Editing a Paragraph to
Correct Adjective Clauses
(page 140)
A leap year occurs in those years when we add a
leap day to February. In a leap year, February has 29
days instead of 28. We add a leap day because a solar
which
year, that is the actual time it takes for the Earth to
travel around the sun, is different from a calendar
study
year. According to scientists who studies the Earth’s
movement, it takes 365.242199 days for our planet
to make one full revolution around the sun. The
Gregorian calendar, which people throughout most
of the world use, has a 365-day year. By adding an
extra day nearly every four years, the Gregorian
calendar leaps forward and stays in line with the
who
solar year. Emperor Julius Caesar, whom ruled Rome
more than 2,000 years ago, came up with the idea
for leap year. The Julian calendar
,
which was named
after him, was very accurate but not quite exact
enough. It had too many leap days. The problem
was finally solved in 1582, when Pope Gregory XIII
introduced a new calendar. The Gregorian calendar
adds
uses a formula that add leap days, but only in certain
years. The years must have numbers that they can
be evenly divided by four. However, years ending
in “00” are leap years only if they can be evenly
divided by 400. Thus, the year 1900 was not a leap
year, but 2000, 2004, 2008, and 2012 were. Italy,
where
Portugal, Poland, and Spain, which the Catholic
Church had great influence, were the first to adopt
the Gregorian calendar. Today, it is a widely used
calendar that still has an effective leap year formula.
PRACTICE 13: Writing Complex
Sentences with Adjective Clauses
(page 140)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 141)
Answers will vary.
Practice 14: Using Word Origins and
Idioms
(page 142)
A
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. Economist comes from a Greek word that means
“manager of the house.”
2. In Homer’s Odyssey, a man named Mentor was
an advisor, and today a mentor is an experienced
person who advises a less experienced person.
3. Robot comes from the Czech word robota,
which means “work.”
B
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 144)
Answers will vary.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 103
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
an
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
A
CHAPTER 7
(pages 148170)
Questions about the Model
(page 149)
1. There are three important causes for the success
of Vélib’.
The focus is on causes.
2. Sentence 3: First, Paris leaders planned carefully
to avoid missteps.
Sentence 8: Second, the Paris government
made Vélib’ bikes affordable for riders with the
cooperation of a large advertising company.
Sentence 11: Finally, Vélib’ has been successful
because of effective publicity.
3. a cause
PRACTICE 1: Identifying the Meaning
of Prefixes + Base Words
(page 150)
2. inescapable / not able to escape, not able to
avoid or get away from
3. misunderstand / wrong understanding
4. outgrow / grow and exceed the size of
something (e.g., clothing)
5. preexisting / exist before
6. readjust / adjust again, make additional changes
7. subconscious / below consciousness, not aware,
not realizing
8. uninvolved / not involved, not participating
PRACTICE 2: Writing Topic Sentences
(page 153)
Paragraph 1: a
Paragraph 2: d
PRACTICE 3: Outlining a Cause /
Effect Paragraph
(page 155)
A.
Main Point (Effect): The most obvious benefit
has been the increase in activity among people
of all ages.
1. Supporting Detail: excellent exercise from
bikes
2. Supporting Detail: better health and
well-being
B.
Main Point (Effect): Users of Vélib’ also report
another positive effect of the bike sharing
program. They say they experience more day-to-
day enjoyment.
1. Supporting Detail: more time outdoors
2. Supporting Detail: enjoyment of Parisian
architecture, art, parks, and street life
C.
Main Point (Effect): Bike riders in Paris praise
Vélib’ for its socializing effects.
1. Supporting Detail: bond between cyclists;
help from experienced to inexperienced
riders
2. Supporting Detail: greeting and chatting
3. Supporting Detail: less crowding on trains and
buses with other angry commuters
Concluding Sentence: In conclusion, Parisians
hope that Vélib’ will result in fewer cars and less
pollution in the future, but for now they are enjoying
the positive effects that the bike sharing program has
already produced.
PRACTICE 4: Editing a Cause / Effect
Paragraph for Unity and Coherence
(page 156)
Move: The most obvious effect is that rooftop
gardens make any city more beautiful and livable,
whether they are seen up close, from skyscrapers
above, or from the city streets below.
To follow: Rooftop gardens are badly needed green
spaces that have many positive effects on urban
neighborhoods.
Cross out: However, rooftop gardens require careful
planning. / A number of local governments have
developed plans to fight air pollution.
PRACTICE 5: Adding Details to
Cause / Effect Support
(page 157)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 6: Writing Concluding
Sentences
(page 158)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 159)
Answers will vary.
Questions about the Model
(page 161)
1. consequently in Sentence 5, as a result in
Sentence 8, thus in Sentence 10
other instances: as a result in Sentence 13, thus
in Sentence 14; the words are used to introduce
the beneficial effects of precycling
2. Pre- means “before.” People who precycle
think about protecting the environment before
they use certain products. Re- means “again” or
“back.” People who recycle use products again
or take steps to make new products from old
products.
3. The writer’s apartment is more livable. Because
she doesn’t have glass, plastic, paper, and metal
to recycle, there is more space for her. She can
feel comfortable in her small apartment.
Longm nswer Key 104
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
PRACTICE 7: Using Cause / Effect
Transition Signals for Coherence
(page 163)
Paragraph 1
2. so
3. since
4. Therefore
5. because of
Paragraph 2
1. so
2. due to
3. Because
4. Consequently
5. for
PRACTICE 8: Combining Sentences
with Cause / Effect Signals
(page 164)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
3. Sunlight produces vitamin D, so we need
sunlight for a healthy body.
4. Vitamin D is important because of its role in
bone development.
5. Sunlight affects the human body clock. As a
result, regular exposure to the sun helps people
sleep better.
6. Some psychologists recommend spending time
in the sun, for sunshine makes their patients feel
happier.
7. Due to a decrease in sunlight in winter, Seasonal
Affective Disorder, SAD, affects people in many
parts of the world.
8. Since people spend time outdoors on sunny
days, they are more likely to be physically active
and get the exercise the need.
9. The warmth of the sun relieves minor aches and
pains. Consequently, there is an added benefit to
sunshine.
PRACTICE 9: Editing a Paragraph to
Correct Sentence Structure
(page 166)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
It is easy to understand why people are changing
from their traditional banking to online banking.
First, customers decide to manage their money
b
online. Because banks offer them special rewards in
return. For example, some banks reduce their fees or
give cash back when people change from paper to
T
online services,
.
therefore, customers eagerly make
the switch. Second, online banking is becoming
more popular because it saves time. Online
customers can use a mobile phone or computer to
so
take care of many of their banking needs
,
they go
to the bank less often. As a result of using online
services, they do not spend time traveling to the
bank or standing in line when they get there. Finally,
online banking is safe. Since many customers fear
t
becoming victims of identity theft.
,
They want to be
able to check their account balances regularly from
home. They use online banking to make sure their
money is still in their account and not in the hands
of cyber criminals. Because of factors like these.
o
Online banking is on the rise.
PRACTICE 10: Using Words with
Prefixes
(page 167)
Answers will vary.
CHAPTER 8
(pages 171196)
Questions about the Model
(page 173)
1. Topic sentence: To understand 21st century
education, let’s examine the similarities and
differences between the schools of 50 years ago
and the schools of today.
Topic: changes in education
Controlling idea: there are similarities and
differences between schools of 50 years ago and
the schools of today
2. areas of study then and now, methods of
teaching and learning then and now, and the
purpose of education then and now; the author
explains each of the points by comparing and
contrasting education—that is, presenting
similarities and differences between—today and
50 years ago
3. There are two sentences in the conclusion:
19
In
summary, education in the 21st century is firmly
rooted in the basics of traditional education
from the 1950s and 1960s.
20
However, modern
education has expanded what students learn,
how they learn it, and why.
4. The writer uses many transitions signals for
coherence such as first (Sentence 2), next
(Sentence 6), and finally (Sentence 11), which
signal the main points of the paragraph. Signals
such as the same (Sentence 13), however
(Sentence 14), and in contrast (Sentence 16) are
also important for coherence because they show
the similarities and differences in schools of
50 years ago and the schools of today.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 105
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
,
an
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
A
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Finding
Antonyms
(page 174)
A
2. f 5. c
3. e 6. a
4. b 7. d
B
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. cease, end, stop
3. contract, lessen, shrink
4. lesser, minor, small
5. fake, false, imaginary
6. abbreviated, brief, short
PRACTICE 2: Writing Topic Sentences
(page 177)
Paragraph 1: c
Paragraph 2: a
PRACTICE 3: Identifying Point-by-
Point and Block Paragraphs
(page 179)
Paragraph 1: Point-by-Point
Paragraph 2: Block
PRACTICE 4: Arranging a
Comparison / Contrast Paragraph in
Logical Order
(page 179)
7, 4, 10, 6, 11, 2, 8, 5, 9, 1, 3
PRACTICE 5: Writing Concluding
Sentences
(page 180)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 181)
Answers will vary for block or point-by-point
organization and the outline.
Questions about the Model
(page 182)
1. 1, 2, 13
2. The topic sentence is Sentence 2. It indicates
that the paragraph will discuss mostly
differences.
3. although in Sentence 2, but in Sentence 4, but in
Sentence 5, and whereas in Sentence 6.
PRACTICE 6: Using Parallelism with
Comparison Signals
(page 185)
2. negatives
3. end with special punctuation
4. difficult
5. for academic English
6. effectively
PRACTICE 7: Combining Ideas with
Comparison Signals
(page 186)
Answers will vary. Possible answers are:
2. English language movies appear in theaters
worldwide. English is commonly used on the
Internet, too.
3. British English has become an international
language. Similarly, American English is now
heard in locations around the globe.
4. Just as English is the language spoken in Britain
and the United States, English is the language
spoken in Canada, Australia, and New Zealand.
5. More than 350 million people speak English as
their first language. Likewise, millions of people
speak English as an additional language.
PRACTICE 8: Writing Sentences with
Comparison Signals
(page 186)
Answers will vary. Possible answers are:
2. Knowing a second language is useful not only
for travel but also for employment.
3. Like Latin, the Greek language is the origin of
many English words.
4. Loan words such as mosquito, patio, and plaza
have the same spelling in English and Spanish.
5. Both word knowledge and cultural experience
play a role in language learning.
PRACTICE 9: Using Contrast Signals
(page 189)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 10: Writing Sentences with
Contrast Signals
(page 190)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 11: Using Antonyms
(page 190)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 191)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 193)
Answers will vary.
Longm nswer Key 106
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
CHAPTER 9
(pages 198221)
Questions about the Model
(page 200)
1. Just like words, body language is an important
and effective form of communication.
Therefore, anyone who intends to live, work, or
study in another country should learn the body
language of that culture.
2. The topic sentence of each body paragraph
is the first sentence of the paragraph. Body
Paragraph 1 focuses on communication through
the human face. Body Paragraph 2 focuses on
communication through gestures of the head,
shoulders, arms, and hands. Body Paragraph
3 focuses on communication through physical
contact, or the lack of it.
3. Each body paragraph is introduced by a
transition word: first (Body Paragraph 1),
another important means of communicating
(Body Paragraph 2), and in addition to (Body
Paragraph 3).
4. The essay uses logical division of ideas.
PRACTICE 1: Comparing Formal and
Everyday Vocabulary
(page 201)
2. e 3. a 4. g 5. b 6. c 7. h 8. f
PRACTICE 2: Writing Funnel
Introductions
(page 204)
Paragraph 1: 4, 3, 2, 1
Paragraph 2: 4, 1, 3, 2
Paragraph 3: 3, 1, 2
PRACTICE 7: Outlining an Essay
(page 214)
. . .
II. A. 1. b. In Asian countries, faces reveal
less emotion, less quickly
. . .
II. A. 2. b. Direct eye contact if interested;
unblinking eyes if bored,
distracted, angry, or defensive
II. A. 2. c. In Latin America, looking down
used for respect
II. B. The gestures that people make with
their heads, shoulders, arms, and
hands are another important means of
communicating.
. . .
II. B. 1. b. In Bulgaria, shaking means “Yes”;
nodding means “No
II. B. 2. A shrug has various means in
Western culture.
. . .
II. B. 2. b. Shows lack of interest
. . .
II. B. 3. b. Many cultures, “O” means
“everything is OK”; in France
and Belgium means “zero” /
“worthless”, in Japan symbolizes
money; in Russia, Brazil, and
Turkey is an insult
. . .
PRACTICE 3: Writing Topic Sentences
for Body Paragraphs
(page 205)
Answers will vary.
. . .
II. C. 1. a. Like personal space around them
II. C. 2. b. Rarely hold hands
PRACTICE 4: Identifying Concluding
Paragraphs
(page 206)
Essay 2: 2
Essay 3: 2
Essay 4: 1
PRACTICE 5: Using Transition Signals
between Body Paragraphs
(page 210)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
3. Furthermore
4. In addition to
5. Moreover
6. On the other hand
PRACTICE 6: Adding Transition
Signals to Topic Sentences
(page 212)
Answers will vary.
Practice 8: Grouping Ideas Logically
(page 217)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 218)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 9: Using Formal Vocabulary
(page 218)
1. various
2. provides regarding
3. typically determine
4. significant serves
5. estimate sufficient
6. somewhat extended
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual
Student Book Answer Key 107
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
an
Academic
Writing
Series
Fourth
Edition,
Teacher’s
Manual
Student
Book
A
,
CHAPTER
10
(pages
222–239)
Questions about the Model
(page 224)
1. The writer’s opinion about homeschooling
appears in the last sentence of the introduction:
Although it may not be the best option for
all students and all families, I am in favor of
homeschooling for three reasons.
Based on this thesis statement, the reader can
expect three body paragraphs.
2. The writing model contains three body
paragraphs. The topic sentence of each body
paragraph is the first sentence of the paragraph.
Each body paragraph is introduced by a
transition word: first of all (Body Paragraph 1),
the second reason that (Body Paragraph 2), and
finally (Body Paragraph 3).
3. Body Paragraph 3 has a concluding sentence:
As a result of the education that his parents
gave him, my friend is now a well-balanced
individual who knows how to be an adult and
still have fun.
4. The concluding paragraph acknowledges the
opposing view and then summarizes the benefits
of homeschooling. It ends with a call to action.
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Using
Collocations
(page 225)
A
2. experienced
3. effective
4. styles
5. computer
6. local
7. counselors
8. individual
B
2. percentage
3. community
4. skills
PRACTICE 2: Analyzing Thesis
Statements for Opinion Essays
(page 226)
A
The writer is in favor of homeschooling. The
contrast signal that connects the writer’s opinion
to the opposing point of view is although.
B
but
PRACTICE 3: Writing Thesis
Statements for Opinion Essays
(page 227)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 228)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 4: Writing Reasons to
Support an Opinion
(page 229)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 230)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 5: Punctuating Quotations
(page 231)
2.
As a result
,
he added
,
most young children do
not spend enough time reading and developing
other academic skills.
3.
My research indicates that nearly 50% of
children ages five to eight have a television in
their bedroom
,
Prof. Thompson reported.
4.
What is happening to family relationships
when children are spending a great deal of time
alone, in front of a television?
Prof. Thompson
asked.
5.
In addition to watching television, children
as young as age three and a half are now using
computers on a regular basis
he continued.
H
6. The professor asked
,
how can children get the
educational benefits of television and computers
without suffering the negative effects of too
much technology?
PRACTICE 6: Identifying Supporting
Details
(page 232)
1. statistics
2. examples and quotations
3. examples
Try It Out!
(page 233)
Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 7: Using Collocations
(page 235)
Answers will vary.
Try It Out!
(page 236)
Answers will vary.
Longm nswer Key 108
© 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc.
| 1/118

Preview text:


Longman Academic Writing Series 3 Paragraphs to Essays KEY
english (Đại học Hoa Sen) Longman Academic 3 Writing Series
FOURTH EDITION PARAGRAPHS TO ESSAYS Teacher’s Manual Jane Curtis
with contributions from Lindsey Rothschild
Educational Technology Consultant
Longman Academic Writing Series 3: Paragraphs to Essays, Fourth Edition Teacher’s Manual
Copyright © 2014 by Pearson Education, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior permission of the publisher.
Pearson Education, 10 Bank Street, White Plains, NY 10606
Staff Credits: The people who made up the Longman Academic Writing Series 3
Teacher’s Manual team, representing editorial, production, design, and manufacturing,
are Eleanor Barnes, Shelley Gazes, Amy McCormick, Lise Minovitz, Liza Pleva, and Joan Poole.
Text Composition: TSI Graphics ISBN-10: 0-13-291567-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-13-291567-0 CONTENTS
Introduction ................................................................................................ iv
General Teaching Notes .............................................................................. 1
Chapter Teaching Notes .............................................................................. 9
Chapter 1 Notes .............................................................................................. 10
Chapter 2 Notes .............................................................................................. 14
Chapter 3 Notes .............................................................................................. 18
Chapter 4 Notes .............................................................................................. 22
Chapter 5 Notes .............................................................................................. 26
Chapter 6 Notes .............................................................................................. 29
Chapter 7 Notes .............................................................................................. 35
Chapter 8 Notes .............................................................................................. 39
Chapter 9 Notes .............................................................................................. 44
Chapter 10 Notes ............................................................................................ 49
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics ..................................................... 53
Chapter Quizzes .......................................................................................... 64
Chapter Quiz Answer Key ........................................................................ 83
Student Book Answer Key ...................................................................... 89 c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manu al ● Contents iii INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the new edition of Level 3 in the Longman Academic Writing Series, a five-level
series that prepares English language learners for academic coursework. This book, formerly
called Introduction to Academic Writing, is intended for intermediate students in university,
college, or in secondary school programs. It offers a carefully structured approach that focuses on
writing as a process. It teaches rhetoric and sentence structure in a straightforward manner, using
a step-by-step approach, high-interest models, and varied practice types.
Like the previous editions, this book integrates instruction in paragraph and essay organization
and sentence structure with the writing process. It carefully guides students through the steps of
the writing process to produce the well-organized, clearly developed paragraphs that are essential
to academic writing in English. You will find a wealth of realistic models to guide writers and
clear explanations supported by examples that will help your students through typical rough
spots. These explanations are followed by the extensive practice that learners need to assimilate
writing skills and write with accuracy and confidence. There are interactive tasks throughout
the text—pair work, small-group activities, and full-class discussions—that engage students in
the learning process and complement the solitary work that writers must do. The tasks progress
from recognition exercises to controlled production and culminate in communicative Try It Out activities.
The first part of this book presents comprehensive chapters on how to format and structure
basic and specific types of academic paragraphs. Students will learn how to organize different
paragraph types, including narrative, process, definition, cause / effect, and comparison / contrast
paragraphs. In the second part, learners are introduced to the basic concepts of essay writing.
Finally, the extensive appendices and a thorough index make the text a valuable and easy-to-use reference tool.
What’s New in This Edition
Instructors familiar with the previous edition will find these new features:
• Chapter objectives provide clear goals for instruction;
• Two new vocabulary sections, Noticing Vocabulary and Applying Vocabulary explain specific
types of vocabulary from the writing models and support its use in the Writing Assignment;
• Selected writing models have been updated or replaced, while old favorites have been retained and improved;
• Try It Out! activities challenge students to be creative and apply the skills they have studied;
• Writing Tips contain strategies that experienced writers use;
• Self-Assessments ask students to evaluate their own progress;
• Timed Writing practice develops students’ writing fluency. c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Introduction iv The Teacher’s Manual
The Teacher’s Manual includes everything you need to teach this course. It includes these features:
• General Teaching Notes explain how to use the Student Book effectively;
• Chapter Teaching Notes provide step-by-step instructions on how to teach each section, as
well as variations and expansions for the practice activities;
• Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics facilitate fair and easy grading. They can be
photocopied and used for all students in the class;
• Chapter Quizzes assess students’ writing and editing skills. They can be photocopied and used
for all students in the class. An answer key for the quizzes is also provided;
• The Student Book Answer Key provides answers for all Student Book practice activities. c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Introduction v GENERAL TEACHING NOTES 1 GENERAL TEACHING NOTES
These notes describe the chapter organization in the Student Book and provide general suggestions
on how to approach each section. They also include information about the Writing Assignment
Scoring Rubrics and Chapter Quizzes in this manual, as well as suggestions on how to integrate
technology and a brief description of MyEnglishLab Writing 3 (www.myenglishlab.com for
additional writing skill practice, composition practice, and assessments). Step-by-step teaching
suggestions for the Student Book are in the Chapter Teaching Notes that follow. Student Book
The Student Book contains 10 chapters divided into two parts. Part I (Chapters 1–8) presents
comprehensive chapters on how to format and structure basic and specific types of academic
paragraphs. Students will learn how to organize different paragraph types, including narrative,
how-to, definition, cause / effect, and compare / contrast paragraphs. In Part II (Chapters 9
and 10), learners are introduced to the basic concepts of essay writing. Finally, the extensive
appendices and a thorough index make the text a valuable and easy-to-use reference tool.
The chapters are generally organized as described below. Chapter Opener
This page includes the chapter title, a photo, and a list of objectives. The chapter title and photo
provide an opportunity for students to express ideas about the chapter theme, exercise their
imaginations, and share their experiences. The objectives preview the chapter writing skills and
provide a roadmap for teachers and students. You may want to spend 10 to 15 minutes on this page. Introduction
The introduction includes a brief presentation of the elements of academic writing or the genre
that is the focus of the chapter. This section has the following additional components. Writing Model
Each chapter presents a model paragraph (Chapters 1–8) or a model essay (Chapters 9–10). These
provide appropriate models for the chapter Writing Assignment. The models are followed by questions
that help students notice the important structure, content, and language displayed in the models. You
may want to add your own questions and have students further analyze the writing models.
N o t i c i n g Vocabulary
This section highlights, explains, and provides practice with useful words and phrases from the
model paragraphs. Types of vocabulary include word families, compound words, synonyms,
antonyms, and collocations. Students have the opportunity to review the vocabulary later in the
chapter and apply it in the chapter writing assignment. c. , In
Skill-Building: Organization n tio a c u
The organization sections focus on the structure and content of paragraphs and essays. In Part I, d E
the focus is on the paragraph. Chapter 1 presents an introduction to the basic features and n o rs
the format of academic paragraphs. Chapter 3 deals with paragraph structure. Chapter 2 and a e P
Chapters 4–8 explore rhetorical patterns that include narration, logical division of ideas, process, y b 4 1
definition, cause / effect, and comparison / contrast. In Part II, the focus in on essays. Chapter 9 0 2
guides students from paragraph to essay writing, and Chapter 10 presents opinion essays. © Lo
ngman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● General Teaching Notes 2
Skill-Building: Sentence Structure
The sentence structure sections help students to understand the building blocks of simple,
compound, and complex sentences, including how to correct fragments, run-ons, and comma
splices. Brief explanations and clear charts help students understand the basic elements of English sentence structure.
Practice Activities for Organization and Sentence Structure
Practice activities in both the organization and the sentence structure sections reinforce
information that is presented. Activities progress from controlled to productive. Try It Out!
activities challenge students to apply what they have learned. An Answer Key for the activities is
on pages 89–108 of this manual.
Going Over Explanations in the Skill-Building Sections: Options
1. Read the material aloud as students look at their books. Pause to restate or stress key
points, add examples, and/or ask questions to check comprehension.
2. Have students read the material first, either for homework or in class. Then call on students to read the material aloud.
3. Have students close their books. Use a projector to display the page to the class so that all
eyes are on the same part of the text. Read the material aloud or have students do so.
Practice and Try It Out! Activities: Options
1. Have students complete activities alone to develop independent thinking.
2. Ask students to complete tasks with partners or in small groups to increase interaction and
promote communication and collaboration skills.
3. Have students complete tasks at home if tasks are time consuming and/or class time is limited.
4. As students are working on the activities, walk around the classroom. Observe what
students are doing and offer help as needed.
Going Over Answers to Practice and Try It Out! Activities: Options
1. Go over the answers orally (e.g., call on individual students or read the answers aloud)
when a task has students choose from among options shown in the book. For activities
with a large amount of text (e.g., an entire paragraph), have students number the lines of
the paragraph so that they can easily discuss their answers.
2. Have a student or students write answers on the board and then go over the answers. Give
writers the chance to correct their own errors before eliciting corrections from the class.
Alternatively, select students to read and correct items on the board. In this way, more
students can be involved in the correction process.
3. Have students compare answers with a partner or members of a group and discuss any questions or disagreements.
4. Have pairs or groups of students who worked together compare answers with another pair or group.
5. Have students exchange books with a partner and check each other’s answers.
6. Display a practice exercise from the book using, for example, a document camera and c.
projector or an interactive whiteboard. Have the class tell you or a student how to complete , In n or correct the sentences. tio a c u
7. Display the answers on a shared website. Have students check their work at home. d E n
8. Collect students’ written work or view their online postings. Correct their work outside of o rs a class. e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● General Teaching Notes 3
A p p l y i n g Vocabulary
This section provides an opportunity for students to apply the vocabulary from the Noticing
Vocabulary section and prepares them to use these words and phrases in the writing assignment.
Writing Process and Writing Assignments
The writing process as presented in this book has five steps, which are explained and illustrated
on pages 21–27 of the Student Book. Each writing assignment clearly and systematically leads
students through the following steps, helping them internalize the process.
Step 1: Prewrite to get ideas. Students generate ideas through a variety of strategies such as
listing, freewriting, and clustering. This step may be done in class, with students working alone or with partners.
Step 2: Organize your ideas. Students select main points from Step 1 and organize them in a
logical order. Students often prefer to do this step at home, but it may also be done in class.
Step 3: Write the first draft. Students use their prewriting notes and any outline they have
prepared to write the first draft of their paper. This step can be done in class or for homework.
If done in class, you can assist and observe what students can do in a given length of time. If
done for homework, class time is saved, and students who need it can take more time for the assignment at home.
Step 4: Revise and edit the draft. Students review the content and organization of their
draft and make notes for revisions. In class, they work with a partner to peer review each
other’s work. (Peer review is explained on pages 25–26 of the Student Book.) A Peer Review
Worksheet provided at the back of the Student Book for each chapter’s writing assignment
guides the reviewers through the process. After peer review, students mark up their own papers
with changes to be made and write a second draft. Students then use the Writer’s Self-Check
provided at the back of the Student Book for each chapter to review their second drafts. They
mark up their papers with additional changes. If needed, have students review the correction
symbols in Appendix E (pages 250–252).
Step 5: Write a new draft. In this step, students write a new (final) draft to turn in to you.
If possible, allow an additional one or two days between the second and final draft to give
students time to see their writing with fresh eyes.
Collecting and Evaluating Writing Assignments: Options
1. Have students hand in or email their work to you. Another option is to have students
upload their assignments to a blog or a class website.
2. You may also want to collect students’ prewriting, marked-up first drafts, and writer’s self-
checks to understand their thinking and assess their progress.
3. For suggestions on how to evaluate student work and give feedback, see the Writing
Assignment Scoring Rubrics on pages 53–63 of this manual. See page 7 of this manual for
more information about the rubrics. For correction symbols, see Appendix E on page 250 of the Student Book.
4. You may want to give students feedback before they submit their final drafts. For example,
some instructors do not grade but give students guidance and direction on their second c.
drafts. You can do this by using criteria on the Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics and , In n
pointing out three or four points for individual improvement. tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Lo
ngman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● General Teaching Notes 4
Organizing and Storing Assignments: Options
1. Have students keep their handwritten writing assignments, or printouts of paragraphs, in a
folder (portfolio) that they use for that purpose only.
2. Have students working on computers set up a system of folders to store their drafts for
each writing assignment. Give them guidelines for naming their files and for renaming
them when they write a new draft. Portfolio Assessment
Some teachers use student portfolios to assess students’ assignments over the course. For the
purposes of assessment, a portfolio is a paper or electronic folder that includes these parts:
(1) two to four samples of final drafts of student assignments along with the earlier drafts,
and (2) an introduction in which students explain what they have learned throughout the term.
Advantages of portfolio assessment are:
• It encourages students to notice and appreciate their progress through the course.
• It encourages students to evaluate their strengths and weaknesses as writers.
• It involves students in the evaluation process.
Depending on the approach of an instructor or department / program, portfolio assessment may
count as 30 to 50 percent of the final grade. Suggested Procedure
1. At the beginning of the course, explain the process and grading system to students. Tell
them to keep copies of final assignments in a paper or electronic folder.
2. At the end of the course, have students review their assignments and select the ones they
want to revise for inclusion in the portfolio. (You may stipulate which assignments they may choose from.)
3. Have students prepare the introduction to the portfolio. The following questions should
help them assess their learning:
How have your writing practices changed?
How has your writing improved?
What are your strengths as a writer?
What are your weaknesses?
How do the papers you have included demonstrate your progress and strengths?
4. Provide a grade for students’ assignments and self-assessment.
5. Discuss the grades and self-evaluations with students if needed. Self-Assessment
All chapters include self-assessment checklists. These give students the chance to review the
chapter objectives and reflect on what they have learned in the chapter. They decide which skills
they can do well and which they need to practice more. You can go over this list with the class
to get a general sense of how students assess their progress. You can also have students give you
their self-evaluations. This feedback will help inform what kind of review or additional practice your students need. c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● General Teaching Notes 5 Options
1. On note cards, have students write what they can do well and what they need to practice
more. Then collect the note cards.
2. Have students email you about what they understand well and what they need to practice more.
3. If your students keep journals, have them write about their progress and/or doubts about the chapter.
4. Use the information from the self-assessments as the basis for one-on-one conferences with students.
Expansion (Parts I and II)
This section includes two activities to help students further develop their writing ability. The first
is a timed writing, and the second varies from chapter to chapter. Timed Writing
Timed-writing tasks prepare students for situations in which they need to organize their ideas
and write quickly, such as tests. If desired, you can display a large clock on a screen in your
classroom. Remind students to follow the suggested times for the timed writing. The Timed
Writing prompt relates to the chapter theme and writing genre. Feel free to replace the suggested
prompts with topics that suit your particular class. If you decide to do so, select a topic that
is related to themes that students have explored in the chapter to help reduce the pressure
that students feel when writing in class under time restrictions and to allow students to better
demonstrate what they have learned in the chapter. Additional Writing
In this section, students have an opportunity to expand on the chapter theme and practice an
expanded list of academic writing skills, including journaling, summarizing, paraphrasing,
writing emails to professors, and writing an opinion for publication. Journaling
Keeping a journal encourages students to write about what interests them and provides them a
safe place for them to express themselves in English. Journal entries can also serve as starting
points for more formal paragraph assignments. To foster fluency, it is best to respond only to the
content, ignore errors (unless content is unclear), and avoid grading based on accuracy. Options
1. Have students write their journal entries in a paper or electronic notebook.
2. Have students post journal entries on a blog. The blog can be set up to be viewed by the
teacher only or by the whole class. It can include photos, audio, and video.
3. Have students begin each class by writing in their journals for 5–10 minutes.
4. With the student’s permission, read especially thoughtful, funny, or intriguing journal entries to the class. c. Appendices , In n tio a
The appendices provide a list of grammar terms used in the text, charts illustrating types c u d
of sentences, a chart of sentence types and connecting words, transition signals, rules for E n o
punctuation, correction symbols, the Peer-Review Worksheets, and the Writer’s Self-Check rs a e Worksheets. P y b 4 1 0 2 © Lo
ngman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● General Teaching Notes 6
The Online Teacher’s Manual
Features specific to the Teacher’s Manual that will help you teach this course include the following items.
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics
The photocopiable Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics on pages 53–63 of this manual help you
grade completed assignments fairly and easily. They also help students understand the basis for
their grades. Each rubric reflects the chapter skills focus, the Writing Assignment directions, and
the Writer’s Self-Check worksheet criteria. You can adjust the point system for each criterion
to suit the needs and goals of your class. Below the rubric in the Comments section, you can
write specific comments and suggestions to the student, such as: “Great details! Be careful about spelling.” Suggested Procedure
1. Hand out copies of the rubric or post it to a class website so that students can refer to it
when completing the assignment.
2. After you collect the assignments, use the rubrics to score students’ work.
3. Return the rubrics with the marked-up assignments.
4. Follow up with teacher-student consultations as needed. Chapter Quizzes
The photocopiable chapter quizzes on pages 64–82 of this Teacher’s Manual will help you assess
your students’ proficiency with the material covered in the chapter. Each quiz has three parts
and easily gradable items worth 20 points. Parts A and B cover the organization and sentence
structure sections of each chapter. Part C is an editing exercise. The quizzes can be used in class or as take-home assignments.
Chapter Quiz Answer Key
Use the answer key on pages 83–88 to score the quizzes yourself. Alternatively, copy the
answers, write them on the board, or post them to a class website. Have students correct their
own papers or exchange papers and correct a partner’s paper.
Student Book Answer Key
Answers to the practice exercises in the Student Book are on pages 89–108 of this Teacher’s Manual. Integrating Technology
Using technology engages students, increases their motivation, and helps them develop skills
that are vital for full participation in higher education. Technology can also facilitate interaction
among students outside of class. Such interaction can promote a sense of community and foster
the supportive culture essential to a classroom of developing writers. Here are some things to c.
consider when integrating technology in an academic writing course. , In n tio a c u d Student Skill Levels E n o rs
Many students have access to computers, tablets, and smart phones and already have technology a e P
skills. They use applications to communicate in writing (via email, text messaging, and social y b 4
networking sites) and to self-publish (on blogs and other websites). Students with little or no such 1 0 2
experience can acquire the skills they need with help from you and their classmates. ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● General Teaching Notes 7
Learning Management Systems
Some schools provide a learning management system (LMS). You can also use free web-based
learning management systems. An LMS provides a password-protected community for you and
your students, and it gives you a place to keep course materials, such as information for students,
work written by students, and teacher records. An LMS also offers students a way to submit
assignments, post to a blog, communicate with you, and participate in online class discussions.
Students who are familiar with social networking sites will already have some skills needed to use an LMS. Free Online Tools
A variety of free online tools can help you set up systems for organizing or showcasing students’ work. For example:
A class website gives you a place to post your syllabus, provide other course information, and publish student work.
A wiki allows all class members to contribute writing, discuss ideas, and provide feedback.
Online presentations allow students to showcase their individual or collaborative work and are
easily embedded within an LMS, website, or wiki.
Blogs allow individual students to publish their writing easily. MyEnglishLab Writing
Outside of class, students can go to MyEnglishLab Writing 3 at www.myenglishlab.com for
additional writing skill practice, composition practice, and assessments. This online program includes:
• Automatically graded and teacher-graded pre-tests and post-tests
• Automatically graded skill presentation and practice (grammar, sentence structure, mechanics,
punctuation, and organization) with feedback on errors
• Genre-specific writing presentations, models, and teacher-graded assignments
• Timed and untimed writing options
• A gradebook that both teachers and students can access c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Lo
ngman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● General Teaching Notes 8 CHAPTER TEACHING NOTES 9 CHAPTER TEACHING NOTES PA R T I
Analyzing the Model (page 3) C H A P T E R 1
• Read the model paragraph aloud, and have Academic students read along silently.
• Have students work with a partner or in a Paragraphs
small group to answer the questions about (pages 2–30)
the model. Go over the answers.
CHAPTER OPENER (page 2)
Noticing Vocabulary (page 4)
• Write the chapter title on the board and
read it aloud. Elicit examples from students
• Have students read the explanation about
of academic writing. Put examples on the word families. board.
Variation: Write examples of noun and
• Have students look at the photos and say
verb pairs (e.g., writer-write, division-
what they know about the movie Star
divide, multiplication-multiply) on the
Wars and George Lucas. Have students
board. Include a pair that has more than
answer the question under the photos. Use
one possible answer (e.g., identity-identify,
student answers to write a list on the board
identification-identify). Explain the concept
of the ways that George Lucas changed
of word family. Then have students read the moviemaking.
explanation and the chart of examples.
• Point out the list of objectives. Explain
• Point out that the words in the chart come
that these are the skills that students will
from the model paragraph. Also point out
learn in the chapter. Read the objectives
the spelling patterns in noun and verb word
aloud, or have students read them. Do not endings.
spend much time at this point defining or
• Read the directions for Practices 1 and
explaining terms used in the objectives.
2 aloud. Point out that students must use
nouns and verbs from the writing model
INTRODUCTION (pages 3–5)
to complete Practice 1. Point out the noun
endings that students can use in Practice 2.
• Go over the introductory text. Emphasize
Have students complete the tasks. Then go
that academic writing is the kind of writing
over the answers with the class.
students do in school and that there are
rules to follow in academic writing. EXTENSION:
• Point out that students will have many
opportunities to practice academic writing
In small groups, have students make a list
in your class, starting with Chapter 1 of the
of four to five additional noun-verb pairs Student Book.
that they have noticed when reading in
English. Encourage students to add the
words to their notebooks, or compile a list
and post it on your class website or blog. EXTENSION:
Lead a discussion about the kinds of
writing that students do in a typical day. c. , In n
Make a list of student answers on the
ORGANIZATION (pages 5–10) tio a
board. Find out whether students have done c
• Have students read the introductory text. u d
academic writing and, if so, ask for details E
Point out the important terms: paragraph, n o
of their academic writing experience. rs
topic, controlling idea, format. a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 10
Formatting the Page (page 6)
• Return the paragraphs that students wrote
for the Try It Out! activity on page 10.
• Explain when students will do handwritten
(Read the paragraphs before returning them
academic writing in your class and when
to learn more about your students’ writing
they will do work on a computer. Point
styles and proficiency levels, but do not
out that there are formatting rules for both
mark the papers.) Read the directions for
handwritten work and work done on a
the Try It Out! activity on page 13 aloud. computer.
Have students complete the activity.
• Focus first on the format of handwritten
assignments. Point out the terms and rules EXTENSION:
on page 6. If possible, display the example
on page 7 on a screen in your classroom.
Have students rewrite their self-introduction
Then do the same for the computer
paragraphs and hand them in. Mark the formatting information.
paragraphs using the correction symbols
in Appendix E on pages 250–252. Limit
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
your corrections to (1) “nfs” (needs further
activity on page 10 aloud. Because it is
support); (2) what students have learned
students’ first academic writing assignment
in Chapter 1 (capitalization, subject-verb
in this book, have them do the exercise
agreement, and fragments); and (3) one
in class. Walk around the classroom as
or two recurring sentence structure or
students are working. Check the format
grammar problems that you see. Do not
of their paragraphs and provide help as
return the papers until students have
needed. Collect students’ papers.
completed the Sentence Structure section of
Variation: If you have students who choose Chapter 1.
to use a computer for their self-introductions,
have them bring laptops to class.
SENTENCE STRUCTURE (pages 14–20)
• Go over the Writing Tip on page 10. Have
• Put these three examples on the board:
students add a title to the paragraph that 1. Luke Skywalker.
they wrote for the Try It Out! activity.
2. Luke Skywalker and his friends battled.
3. Luke Skywalker and his friends battled
MECHANICS (pages 10–13) the evil Empire.
• Explain that academic writing requires
• Have students read the definition of a
correct capitalization. Then go over the
sentence at the top of page 14 and identify introductory text.
which of the three examples best fits the
• Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud. definition of a sentence.
Have students use the chart on pages 10–11
to complete the exercise. Go over the
Simple Sentences (page 14) answers.
• Put the following terms on the board:
• Read the directions for Practices 4 and 5
subject, verb, simple sentence, compound
aloud. Have students complete the tasks
subject, compound verb. Explain the
alone. Go over the answers. (Note: Students meanings.
can mark pages 10 and 11 in their books
• Go over the introductory text. Point out the
[e.g., with a paper clip or a small piece of
simple sentence patterns and the examples.
paper] so that they can easily go back to the
Also point out how nouns and verbs fit c.
chart on those pages to find capitalization
into the simple sentence patterns. For more , In n rules when they need them.) tio
information, students can look at the list a c u
• Explain that students may often be asked d
of grammar terms in Appendix A on pages E n
for their opinions. Point out that students o 240–242. rs a
should always be respectful when giving e P y
their opinions and that they must have b 4 1
reasons to explain their opinions. 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 11
Phrases (page 15)
• Read the directions for Practices 10 and 11
aloud. Point out that all four errors in
• Have students read the example sentences
Practice 11 are fragment errors. Have
at the top of the page. Point out that the
students complete the exercises. Then go
groups of words in parentheses are phrases. over the answers.
Emphasize that a phrase is not a sentence—
it is a group of words, but it does not have a
Variation: Have students work with subject + verb combination.
a partner to compare their answers for
• Point out that the phrases in the example
Practices 10 and 11 before you go over
sentences all contain a preposition followed answers with the class. by a noun or pronoun.
• Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud. EXTENSION:
Have students work with a partner to
Return students’ self-introduction
complete the task. Check the answers of the
paragraphs from the Try It Out! activity
first two students who finish the exercise.
on page 13 with your corrections. Explain
Then have those two students check the
what the correction symbols mean. Have
answers of the next two pairs that finish.
students look at the correction symbols in
Have students continue checking the
Appendix E on pages 250–252. In class,
work of their classmates until everyone’s
have students rewrite their paragraphs
work has been checked. Do the same for
(either handwritten or typed). Answer Practice 7.
questions and provide help as needed. Post
the revised and edited paragraphs on a class
Subject-Verb Agreement (page 16) website or blog.
• Have students read the examples at the top
of the page. Then have students look at the
Applying Vocabulary (page 19)
five rules for agreement, paying special
• Have students go to page 4 and review the
attention to the highlighted subjects and
information about noun and verb forms. verbs.
Say a verb and have students call out the
• Read the directions for Practices 8 and 9
noun that is in the same word family.
aloud. Point out that all five errors in
• Read the directions for Practice 12, Part A
Practice 9 are subject-verb agreement
aloud. Have students fill in the chart. Go
errors. Have students complete the tasks.
over the answers. Display the chart so that Then go over the answers.
students can see the correct word forms.
Variation: Have students write the
• Read the directions for Practice 12, Part B
complete paragraph for Practice 9 as a
aloud. Emphasize that students must use
homework assignment. Have them use two
nouns or verbs from the chart in Part A.
different colors of ink—one to write the
Have students complete the task.
paragraph and another to make corrections.
When checking the papers, also look at how
THE WRITING PROCESS (pages 21–27)
students formatted the paragraph and make suggestions for improvement.
• Go over the introductory text.
Fragments (page 18)
Listing (page 21) c.
• Review the patterns for simple sentences
Step 1: Explain the purpose of prewriting , In n
on page 14. Then go over the introductory
and that listing is just one prewriting tio a c u
text on page 18. (Remind students that
technique that good writers use. Have d E n
they can refer to the list of grammar
students read the first two examples and o rs a
terms in Appendix A on pages 240–242 if
discuss the differences. Next, have students e P y necessary.)
explain what the writer did in the third b 4 example. 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 12
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
activity at the top of page 23 aloud. Have
students write draft one either in class
students complete the task alone.
or at home. Depending on your course
requirements, have students review the page
Step 2: Have students read the introductory
formatting rules for handwritten or typed text. assignments on pages 6–9.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
activity at the bottom of page 23 aloud.
students read the procedures for peer review
Have students complete the task alone.
(page 253). Then summarize the procedures
Step 3: Have students read the introductory
and read the questions on the Chapter 1
text and first draft. Point out that there
Peer Review (page 254) aloud. Have
are errors and that the author will make
students work with a partner and use the
revisions later in the writing process.
worksheet to review each other’s drafts. If
Step 4: Explain revising and editing.
needed, have students review the correction
Point out the Chapter 1 Peer Review
symbols in Appendix E (pages 250–252).
worksheet in Appendix F (page 254).
Have writers revise their drafts and write
Explain that students did peer review when
draft two based on their partner’s feedback
they completed the Try It Out! activity on
and their own ideas either in class or at page 13. home.
• Have students read the first draft with peer
• Have students read the Writer’s Self-Check
edits and comments on page 25 and look
section (page 253). Go over the Chapter 1
for changes in the second draft on page 26.
Writer’s Self-Check (page 255). Then have
Point out the Chapter 1 Writer’s Self-Check
students revise their writing further. You
(page 255), and explain its purpose.
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
editing before they write their final drafts.
students read and note the differences in
the final draft on page 27. If you wish,
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
point out the Chapter 1 Writing Assignment
students write their final drafts and turn
Scoring Rubric on page 54 of this Teacher’s
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 1
Manual, and explain its purpose.
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 53 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts. EXTENSION:
Conduct a discussion about the writing
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 29)
process. Ask questions like these: Which
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
prewriting techniques have you used in the
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6
past? Were they helpful? How many drafts
of this manual. Point out that students will
of a paper do you usually write? Why is it
practice all of the skills listed again.
useful to write multiple drafts?
EXPANSION (pages 29–30)
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 27–28)
Step 1: Have students bring the lists that
Timed Writing (page 29)
they made for the Try It Out! activity at
the top of page 23 to class. Go over the
• Read the instructions aloud. (Note: c.
instructions for Step 1 (on page 27). Have
Students may be uneasy about writing with , In n tio
students answer the question in Step 1 and
a time limit. Reassure them that they will a c u d
make any changes to their lists.
not be graded.) Encourage them not to skip E
the prewriting step because it will help n o rs
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
them write a better paragraph. a e
students modify their outlines or create new P y b 4
ones based on changes that they made to 1 0 2 their lists in Step 1. ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 13
• Read the prompt. Indicate when students C H A P T E R 2
should begin writing. Signal them when the Narrative
suggested time for each step is up (i.e., after
2 minutes, 9 minutes, 15 minutes, etc.)
Paragraphs (pages 31–50)
• Collect the papers after 30 minutes.
• Conduct a brief discussion about the timed
CHAPTER OPENER (page 31)
writing experience. Ask students how it felt.
• Write the chapter title on the board and read
Did they follow all the steps? Were they
it aloud. Point out that a narrative tells a
able to finish in time? What, if anything, story.
will they do differently next time?
• Have students look at the photo and answer
• Decide how you will mark students’
the question, giving specific details as
papers. It may be enough to check the appropriate.
topic sentence, supporting sentences, and
conclusion. It is not necessary to mark
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students errors or give a grade.
do so. Point out that students will write
about their own memorable experience at the end of Chapter 2.
Journal Writing (page 30)
• Ask a few introductory questions: “What
Variation: Have students imagine what
is a journal? What is its purpose or value?
happened before the photo was taken. In
Have you ever kept a journal? How did
small groups, have students tell a story
you write it (by hand in a notebook or
about what happened. Have a reporter from
on a computer)? Who read it? Have your
one or two groups tell their group’s story to
teachers ever asked you to keep a journal?” the class.
• Provide information about how students
will produce journals for your class.
INTRODUCTION (pages 32–33)
Explain who will read their journal entries.
• Go over the introductory text. Emphasize
• Point out the Writing Tip on page 30.
again that a narrative paragraph tells a story in time order.
• Go over the introductory text and the prompt.
Analyzing the Model (page 32)
• Have students write in class or at home.
You may also choose to have them begin
• Read the model paragraph aloud, and have
writing in class and complete their entries students read along silently. for homework.
• Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions. Go
Variation: Instead of the journal topic
over the answers with the class.
given on page 30, have students write
about a topic of your choice or one of the 
following topics: your favorite possession,
Noticing Vocabulary (page 33)
your worst habit, the people you live with, a
• Have students read the explanation. Then
movie star or singer you like.
read the directions for Practice 1 aloud. Have
students complete the tasks. Then go over EXTENSION:
the answers. Do the same for Practice 2. c. , In
Regularly begin class by having students
Variation: Have students note that for n tio a
write in their journals for 10–15 minutes
pronunciation, the first word in a compound c u d
on topics related to those they have been or
word is stressed. As an example, point out E n o
will be working on in class. See more on
the difference in word stress between green rs a e
journaling in the General Teaching Notes
house (a house that is green; not a compound P y b on page 6 of this manual.
noun) and greenhouse (a glass building used 4 1 0
for growing plants; a compound noun). 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 14
PURPOSE (pages 38–39) EXTENSION:
• Go over the introductory text, pointing out
In small groups, have students make a
that most stories have a purpose. Clearly
list of four to five additional compound
explain the terms inform, persuade, and
nouns that include one of the words in the entertain.
Practice 2 box (e.g., daytime, daylight,
• Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
daycare, nighttime, nightlife, night owl,
Have students complete the task with a
grandmother, stepmother). Encourage
partner or in a small group. Go over the
them to add the words to their notebooks, answers.
or compile a list and post it on your class website or blog.
• Lead a class discussion based on the
questions at the bottom of page 38. ORGANIZATION
• Read the directions for Practice 7, Parts A (pages 34–38)
and B aloud. Make sure that students know
• Have students read the introductory text.
the meaning of blizzard. Have students
Point out the importance of time order in
complete the tasks. Then go over the narrative paragraphs. answers.
Time Order Signals (page 34) EXTENSION:
• Have students look at the chart. Emphasize
Have students return to the same groups
that these words and phrases are important
that they were in when they told a story
because they help the reader follow the
about an important family event or a funny
order of actions and events in a narration.
experience in their life. Have students
Also point out the use of commas.
choose one story and discuss the purpose of
• Read the directions for Practice 3. Have
that story. Have students identify details in students complete the task.
the story that are important for the purpose.
• Read the directions for Practice 4, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete each
SENTENCE STRUCTURE (pages 39–44)
paragraph and then read each one from start to end.
• Have students read the introductory text on page 39.
• Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students complete the task and then
Analyzing the Model (page 39)
compare their answers with a partner.
• Explain that “Omusubi Kororin” is a
Variation: Have students explain how they
folktale. Ask students to explain what a
knew the logical time order for each group
folktale is and give examples. Then go over of sentences. the introductory text.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
• Read the model aloud, and have students
activity aloud. Have students complete the read along silently.
exercise. Collect their papers.
• Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about EXTENSION:
the model. Go over the answers.
Divide the class into small groups. Have c. , In
each student tell the group a story about an n tio
important family event or a funny experience a c u
in their life. Encourage students to ask their d E n
classmates questions when the events are not o rs a e
clear. Have students emphasize time-order P y
signals in their storytelling. b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 15
Compound Sentences (page 40)
PUNCTUATION (pages 44–46)
• Write this sentence on the board: An old
• Have students read the introductory text.
couple lived in the countryside. Point out
the single subject-verb combination. Then
Three Comma Rules (page 44)
contrast the sentence with the example at
• Have students read the examples in the
the bottom of page 40. Do not give a lot of
chart, paying special attention to the
detail—focus on the fact that there are two
highlighted commas. Point out the rules for
clauses (two subject-verb combinations) commas.
and that the word so connects them.
• Read the instructions for Practice 11,
• Point out the meaning of simple sentence
Parts A and B aloud. Have students and compound sentence.
complete the tasks and then compare
answers with a partner. Discuss the answers
Coordinating Conjunctions
with the class, focusing on meaning and the (pages 41–44) use of commas.
• Have students read the examples in
the chart. Discuss the meaning of the
Applying Vocabulary (page 46)
coordinating conjunctions. Also point out
• Have students turn to page 33 to review the
that there is a comma after the first subject-
information about compound nouns.
verb combination (clause) of a compound sentence.
• Read the directions for Practice 12 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise,
• Have students review the four patterns for
writing true sentences about themselves. Go
simple sentences on page 14. Point out that over the answers.
there is no comma between two words or
two phrases in a simple sentence.
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
• Read the directions for Practice 8, Parts A (pages 46–47)
and B aloud. Have students complete the tasks. Go over the answers.
• Have students read the introductory text.
Variation: In Part B, have students
underline the subject(s) in each sentence
Freewriting (page 47)
once and double underline the verb(s) as
• Explain the meaning of freewriting and
they are doing the exercise so that they
have students read the example. Point
can see simple sentences and compound
out that the writer put down ideas in no sentences more easily.
particular order and that she focused
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
on ideas only (not sentence structure,
Have students complete the exercise and
grammar, spelling, etc.) to write about her
then write the sentences on the board. Do earthquake experience. the same for Practice 10.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
• Read the directions for Practice 10 aloud.
activity. Have students complete the task.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers with the class.
Variation: Bring an alarm clock to class or
set the alarm on your phone to 10 minutes.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
When the alarm sounds, students must stop
activity on page 44 aloud. Have students
writing. Avoid using a traditional “alarm c.
do the exercise and hand it in. Mark , In
sound”—students usually react more n tio
corrections that focus on coordinating a
positively to time limits when they hear a c u d conjunctions. ringtone or music. E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 16
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 48–49)
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 49)
• Tell students that they will write a narrative
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
paragraph about a memorable experience in
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6
their lives. Then have students look at the
of this manual. Point out that students will
Chapter 2 scoring rubric on page 55 of this
practice all of the skills listed again.
manual (give students a paper copy of the
rubric, display it on a screen, and/or put it
EXPANSION (pages 49–50)
on your course website). Go over the rubric
so that students understand what they are
Timed Writing (page 49)
required to do for their writing assignment
• Go over the directions. Remind students not and how they will be graded. to skip any steps.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
• Point out the Writing Tip. students complete the task.
• Read the prompt and have students begin
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
writing. Collect their papers after 30
students complete the task. Remind them minutes.
to include information that is related to the purpose of their narrative.
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
It may be enough to write encouraging
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
comments about the content of the writing. students complete the task.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have grade.
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
Journal Writing (page 50)
questions on the Chapter 2 Peer Review
(page 256) aloud. Have students complete
• Go over the introductory text and the
the task. If needed, have students review possible journal topics.
the correction symbols in Appendix E
• Have students write in class or at home. (pages 250–252).
You may also choose to have them begin
• Have students review the Writer’s Self-
writing in class and complete their entries
Check section of Appendix F (page 253). for homework.
Go over the Chapter 2 Writer’s Self-Check
• Point out the Writing Tip.
in Appendix F (page 257). Then have
students revise their writing further. You EXTENSION:
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
Use journaling as a way to set up a dialogue
editing before they write their final drafts.
between you and your students. Respond to
student journal entries by making comments
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
and asking questions that will encourage
students write their final drafts and turn
students to think more deeply, supply more
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 2
detailed information, communicate personal
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric ideas and feelings, etc.
on page 55 of this Teacher’s Manual to
evaluate students’ final drafts.
Variation: Have students submit their c.
second draft to you via email or a learning , In n
management system. If needed, explain tio a c
how to use word processing features to u d E format their papers. n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 17 C H A P T E R 3 EXTENSION: Basic Paragraph
Have students review the information Structure
about noun-verb pairs from Chapter 1 (pages 51–78)
(page 4). Then have them create a word
family chart with three columns: nouns, CHAPTER OPENER (page 51)
verbs, and adjectives. Have students write
• Write the chapter title on the board
the adjectives from Practice 1, Part B in
and read it aloud. Point out that most
the chart and then use their knowledge
academic paragraphs have a similar style of
and their dictionaries to add noun and organization.
verb forms. Point out that some noun and
verb forms may be identical and that there
• Have students look at the photo and
may not be a noun or verb for every word
describe what the people in the picture family.
are doing and explain what the purpose of
the activity is. Make certain that students
explain the word leisure. Have students
ORGANIZATION (pages 54–68)
answer the question under the photo.
• Have students read the introductory text.
(Depending on the previous discussion,
Then lead a class discussion about the
students will expand on or summarize the sandwich illustration.
discussion when they answer the question.)
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students
The Topic Sentence (page 54)
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 3.
• Have students read the introductory text.
In each of the examples, point out the two
parts of a good topic sentence: the topic and
INTRODUCTION (pages 52–53) the controlling idea.
• Go over the introductory text. Point out
• Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
again that academic paragraphs have a
Have students complete the task with a
common style of organization. Also point
partner or in a small group. To go over the
out that students will write a paragraph
answers, write each topic sentence on the
using this style of organization at the end of
board. Then write student answers under Chapter 3. each topic sentence.
Analyzing the Model (page 52)
Variation: Write the three topic sentences
in Practice 2 on the board. As pairs or
• Read the model paragraph aloud, and have
groups finish the exercise, have students go students read along silently.
to the board and write one or two examples
• Have students work with a partner or in a
of supporting information under each topic
small group to answer the questions about sentence.
the model. Go over the answers.
Position of the Topic Sentence
Noticing Vocabulary (page 53) (page 55)
• Have students read the explanation about
• Have students read the text. Emphasize
adjectives and look at the example. Point
where the topic sentence usually appears in c. out the adjective suffixes. an academic paragraph. , In n tio
• Read the directions for Practice 1, Parts A a c u d
and B aloud. Have students complete the E n o
exercises. Go over the answers. rs a e P y
Variation: Have students circle the b 4 1 0
adjective suffixes in Practice 1, Part B. 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 18
Not Too General, Not Too Specific
to have three additional main points for
each topic sentence. While students are (page 55)
working, write the topic sentences and the
• Read the text aloud. Point out that it is
first main point for each topic sentence on
important for topic sentences to be not
the board. Have students add main points
too general and not too specific. Use the
under each. Go over the main points. examples on page 55.
• Read the directions for Practice 3, Parts A
Supporting Details: Examples
and B aloud. Have students complete the (page 62) tasks. Go over the answers.
• Have students read the introductory text.
Variation: Have students who complete
Point out that a complete sentence usually
each part of the exercise more quickly than
follows for example / for instance, and a
other students prepare an explanation for
noun or phrase follows such as. Also point
their choice of the best topic sentence. out punctuation.
• Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
• Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Have students do the task with a partner.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
Have students write topic sentences on the
over the answers in writing so that students
board. Go over the topic sentences.
can see capitalization and punctuation. Do the same for Practice 7.
Developing Topic Sentences (page 59)
The Concluding Sentence (page 64)
• Have students read the introductory text and
• Have students read the introductory text. Point examples.
out that there is a connection between the
• Have students explain the difference
topic sentence and the concluding sentence
between the examples at the bottom of
of an academic paragraph. Present the three
page 59 and the top of page 60.
tips about concluding sentences. Point out the
examples that accompany each tip. Also point
• Point out the sample topic sentences on
out punctuation with transition signals.
page 60. Have students underline the topic
and double underline the controlling idea in
• Read the directions for Practice 8 aloud.
each topic sentence. Go over the answers.
Have students complete the exercise. Go over the answer.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Point out the examples. Also
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
point out that students will use their topic
Have students complete the exercise. Then
sentence from the Try It Out! activity as the
have students compare their answers in
topic sentence in their Chapter 3 Writing
small groups and use the tips on page 64
Assignment. Have students do the exercise.
as the criteria for choosing their favorite concluding sentence.
Supporting Sentences: Main
Variation: Have the whole class discuss
Points (page 61)
how the tips for concluding sentences
given on page 64 are used in each of the
• Have students read the introductory text. sentences on the board.
• Write the topic sentence from the writing
• Read the directions for Practice 10, Parts
model (page 52) on the board. Have
A and B aloud. Have students complete the c.
students read the topic sentence and the , In tasks. Go over the answers. n
main points that are listed on page 61. tio a c u
Discuss the connection between the topic
• Have students bring their paper with the d E n sentence and the main points.
topic sentence that they wrote for the Try o rs
It Out! activity on page 60 to class. Read a e
• Read the instructions for Practice 5 aloud. P
the directions for the Try It Out! activity on y b
Have students complete the exercise, but 4
page 68 aloud. Have students do the task. 1 0
emphasize that it is not necessary for them 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 19
SENTENCE STRUCTURE (pages 69–72)
• Read the directions for Practice 14, Parts
A and B aloud. Remind students to write
• Have students read the introductory text.
true sentences in Part B. Encourage them to
give details as in the model, and encourage
Analyzing the Model (page 69)
them to not use be (am, is, are, was, were,
• Have students look at page 53 to review
etc.) in sentences (e.g., My personality is
what they have learned about adjectives. analytical.).
Point out that adverbs often end in -ly. Have
students pay attention to adjectives and EXTENSION:
adverbs as they read the model on page 69.
Divide the class into small groups and have
• Have students look at the photo. Explain
students answer these questions: What
that the person in the photo is skydiving and
kind of information do adjectives give?
that skydiving is a kind of adventure activity.
How do adjectives add color and detail to
Tell students that they will read about other
sentences? What kind of information do
adventure activities in the model.
adverbs give? How do adverbs add color
and detail to sentences? Have groups share
• Read the model paragraph aloud, and have
their answers with the whole class. students read along silently.
• Have students work with a partner or in a
small group to answer the questions about
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
the model. Go over the answers. (pages 73–75)
• Have students read the introductory text.
Adjectives and Adverbs in Basic
Sentences (page 70)
Outlining (page 73)
• Have students read the examples in the
• Have students read the reasons for
chart, using the yellow (subject), green
outlining and look at the examples. Have
(verb), and pink (object) highlighting to
them explain the difference between the
identify the subject-verb pattern in each
simple paragraph outline and the detailed
sentence. The parentheses will help them paragraph outline.
identify the prepositional phrases.
• Point out the meaning of transitive and
The Detailed Outline (page 74)
intransitive. Point out the objects that are
highlighted in pink in the chart. Point out
• Have students look at the photo. Ask:
that nouns following prepositions in phrases
What kind of music is this person are also objects.
probably dancing to? How do you know?”
Show photos of punk fashion, reggae
• Have students read the information below
fashion, hard rock fashion, grunge fashion,
the chart. Then point out the placement of
and so on, and have students identify the
adjectives and adverbs in the four examples. corresponding kind of music.
(Note: Remind students that they can refer
to the list of grammar terms in Appendix A
• Have students read the detailed outline.
on pages 240–242 if necessary.)
Point out the use of capital letters and
numbers. Point out how the outline indents.
• Read the directions for Practice 11, Parts A
• Read the directions for Practice 15, Parts
and B aloud. Have students work with a
partner to complete the tasks. Then go over
A and B aloud. Have students complete the c. , In
the answers. Do the same for Practices 12
outlines. In groups, have students compare n tio a and 13.
their outlines and discuss differences. Go c u over the answers. d E n o  rs
Applying Vocabulary (page 72) a e P y
• Have students quickly reread the b 4 1
information about adjectives on page 53. 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 20
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have EXTENSION:
students write their new drafts and turn
them in. Use the Chapter 3 Writing
In groups, have students discuss their
Assignment Scoring Rubric on page 56 of
experience with outlining. If students have
this Teacher’s Manual to evaluate students’
done academic writing in the past, have writing.
them explain when they used outlining
and what kind of outlining they did (have
Variation: Have students submit their
them describe the outlines). Have students
second draft to you via email or a learning
explain why they liked or did not like
management system. If needed, explain outlining.
how to use word processing features to format their papers.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 76–77)
• Tell students that they will write a paragraph
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 77)
about a hobby or sport that they enjoy.
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
• Have students look at the Chapter 3 scoring
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
rubric on page 56 of this manual. Give this manual.
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
EXPANSION (pages 77–78)
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
Timed Writing (page 77)
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 3 writing assignment and how they
• Go over the directions. Remind students not will be graded. to skip any steps.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
• Point out the Writing Tip. students complete the task.
• Read the prompt and have students
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
begin writing. Collect their papers after
students begin with the diagram that they 30 minutes.
made for the Try It Out! activity on page 68
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
and modify it based on changes that they
It may be enough to write encouraging
made in Step 1. Have students follow the
comments about the content of the writing.
Step 2 instructions to create a detailed outline.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have grade. students complete the task.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
Summary Writing (page 78)
students review the procedures for peer
• Have students read the introductory text and
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the the sample summary.
questions on the Chapter 3 Peer Review
Variation: Display the sample summary
(page 258) aloud. Have students complete
on page 78 on a screen in your classroom.
the task. If needed, have students review
While it is displayed, have students turn to
the correction symbols in Appendix E (pages 250–252).
page 52 and reread the writing model. Have
students compare the writing model and the
• Have students review the Writer’s Self- summary. c.
Check section in Appendix F (page 253).
• Point out the three keys to writing a , In n
Go over the Chapter 3 Writer’s Self-Check tio summary and the Writing Tip. a c
in Appendix F (page 259). Then have u d E
students revise their writing further. You
• Have students complete the task. Then n o rs
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
have them compare their summaries with a a e
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their partner. P y b 4
editing before they write their final drafts. 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 21 C H A P T E R 4
illustrate this point, have students read the paragraph under the chart. Logical Division of
• Point out the Writing Tip on page 82. Ideas
• Read the instructions for Practice 1, Parts A
(pages 79–101)
and B aloud. Have students do the exercises
with a partner. Go over the answers.
CHAPTER OPENER (page 79)
• Write the chapter title on the board and read EXTENSION:
it aloud. Explain that logical division of
ideas is a way of organizing information in
Use a dictionary such as the Longman an academic paragraph.
Dictionary of American English. Point out
where synonyms are listed and how the
• Have students look at the photo and
dictionary explains the similar yet often
describe what they can see about the
different meanings of synonyms. (Use an
woman’s shopping experience (e.g., she
example such as the word cheap. Point out
is buying clothing, enjoying the shopping
the Thesaurus label and the information
experience, and paying with a credit
contained in that section for the dictionary
card; she is shopping at what could be an entry cheap.)
upscale designer store; she is not shopping
online, not shopping at a secondhand
store, not shopping at a discount store such
ORGANIZATION (pages 82–95)
as Walmart). Have students answer the
• Have students read the introductory text. question under the photo.
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students
Logical Division of Ideas (page 82)
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 4.
• Point out that logical division of ideas is a
way of organizing information. It divides
a topic into parts. It presents one part and
INTRODUCTION (pages 80–82)
explains it, presents a second part and
• Go over the introductory text. Review
explains it, and continues in the same way
the three main parts of an academic
until the writer has finished developing
paragraph: the topic sentence, the body, the topic.
and the conclusion. Point out the body may
• Have students read the many different ways
be organized in many different ways but
of dividing a topic into parts (e.g., reasons,
that it must always have unity (focus) and
types, or advantages / disadvantages) and coherence (logic).
presenting the parts logically, one after the other.
Analyzing the Model (page 80)
• Point out that, like other academic
• Have students read the writing model. Have
paragraphs, logical division of idea
them focus on the reasons that the writer
paragraphs have a topic sentence, a body,
does not want to have a credit card.
and a conclusion. Point out that each part
• Have students work with a partner or in a
of the paragraph clearly shows the logical
small group to answer the questions about division of ideas.
the model. Go over the answers.
• Have students read the examples of topic
sentences on page 83. Point out that the c.  , In Noticing Vocabulary n (page 81)
controlling idea states how the paragraph is tio
logically divided (reasons for a vegetarian a c u
• Explain the meaning of synonyms. Have d
lifestyle, qualities of a good boss, and E
students look at the examples. n o
kinds of software). Next, have students rs a e
• Explain that dictionaries may list words
read the main points. Emphasize that these P y
as synonyms even though the words do
sentences also show the logical organization b 4 1 0
not have exactly the same meaning. To
of a paragraph. Then have students read the 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 22
supporting details. Have students finish by
are presented logically (e.g., by reasons,
reading the concluding sentences, which
types, advantages, and disadvantages).
summarize the main points of the logical
Coherence also means there are clear signals division of ideas.
that allow readers to focus on the main
points and supporting details as well as make
• Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
connections from one point to the next. Point
Have students complete the exercise.
out that students will learn about three ways
Go over the answers. Do the same for
to have coherence in their paragraphs. Practice 3.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
Putting Each Supporting Sentence
activity. Point out that students must use
in the Right Place (page 86)
many of the skills they have learned so far
to complete the exercise. Also point out that
• Have students read the introductory text.
they are going to write a topic sentence and
• Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
outline that they will use in their Chapter 4
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
Writing Assignment. Then have students answers.
work through the Try It Out! activity step- by-step.
Using Nouns and Pronouns
Consistently (page 88)
Unity in the Supporting Sentences of a Paragraph
• Have students look at the example of noun (page 85)
and pronoun consistency. Point out that
• Have students read the introductory text.
the paragraph uses students and plural
Point out that English academic writing pronouns throughout.
should be focused. Emphasize that all of the
main points and supporting details must be
• Have students review the idea of
directly related to the topic and controlling
consistency by reading the information idea.
above the example. Point out that native
speakers of English may switch from
• Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
singular to plural or switch pronouns in
Have students complete the task. Go over
informal speaking and writing but that the answers.
consistency is important for the coherence of academic writing.
Variation: Define the word irrelevant.
Have students explain why the sentences
• Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
that were removed from each paragraph
Have students complete the task. Go over were irrelevant.
the answers. Do the same for Practice 7. EXTENSION: Placing and Punctuating
Transition Signals Correctly (page 89)

Have students go back to the outline that
they prepared for the Try It Out! activity on
• Point out that students have already
page 84. Have them review the outline for
learned about time order signals, signals
unity and make any necessary changes.
for examples, and signals for concluding sentences.
• Have students read the introductory text
Coherence in the Supporting
and look at the chart. Point out that the
Sentences of a Paragraph (page 86) c.
organization of the chart corresponds to the , In n
• Have students read the introductory text.
ways that information can be presented / tio a c
Emphasize that English academic writing
organized in academic paragraphs. Also u d E
should be well organized; that is, it should
point out that the chart contains three n o rs
be logical and easy for the reader to follow.
different categories of signal words: a e P
Explain that coherence means the main
sentence connectors, coordinating y b 4
points and supporting details of a paragraph conjunctions, and others. 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 23
• Discuss each category of signal words
Finding Run-ons and Comma
separately. Point out the placement and
Splices (page 96)
punctuation of the signal words in each
• Point out that this section gives three tips
category. Use the highlighting and bold
on finding run-ons and comma splices:
print on page 91 to focus students’ attention
(1) check all sentences that have commas,
on the signal words. Have students review
(2) read long sentences aloud, and (3) look
this information for homework.
for “danger words” in the middle of a
• Read the directions for Practice 8, Parts A
sentence. Have students number the three
and B aloud. Have students complete the
tips on pages 96–97. Go over the examples tasks.
for each tip. Have students read pages 96– 97 for homework.
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Write
• Read the directions for Practice 12 aloud.
the answers on the board so that students
Have students complete the exercise.
can see capitalization and punctuation. Do
Go over the answers. Do the same for
the same for Practices 10 and 11. Also point Practice 13. out the Writing Tip. EXTENSION:
Divide the class into small groups and have EXTENSION:
students in each group discuss the problems
Have students reread the writing model on
that run-ons and fragments cause for
page 80 and then analyze it for pronoun
readers of academic writing (e.g., difficulty
consistency and/or the use of transition
seeing where one idea ends and the next signals.
begins, difficulty remembering ideas from
the beginning of a long sentence to the end,
difficulty making connections between
SENTENCE STRUCTURE (pages 96–99)
ideas when there are fragments).
• Have students read the introductory text.
Run-ons and Comma Splices
Applying Vocabulary (page 99) (page 96)
• Have students review the information about
• Have students turn to page 18 to see synonyms on page 81.
examples of sentence fragments.
• Read the directions for Practice 14, Parts
• Point out the definitions of run-on and
A and B aloud. Have students complete the
comma splice and the examples on page 96. tasks. Go over the answers.
(Note: If necessary, students can refer to
the list of grammar terms in Appendix A on pages 240–242.)
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 99–100)
• Tell students that they will write a
Correcting Run-ons and Comma
paragraph about buying habits that uses
Splices (page 96) logical division of ideas.
• Point out the three ways to correct comma
• Have students look at the Chapter 4 scoring
splices. Emphasize the highlighted
rubric on page 57 of this manual. Give
punctuation in the examples and the use
students a paper copy of the rubric, display c. , In
of sentence connectors and coordinating
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or n tio a
conjunctions. (Note: If necessary, refer
put it on your course website. Go over the c u d
students back to the chart on page 89–90
rubric so that students understand what E n o
for examples of sentence connectors and
they are required to do for their Chapter 4 rs a e coordinating conjunctions.)
writing assignment and how they will be P y graded. b 4 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 24
Step 1: Have students bring the
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 100)
brainstorming that they did for the Try it
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
Out! activity on page 84 to class. Go over
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
the instructions for Step 1. Have students this manual. complete the task.
Step 2: Have students bring the outline that
EXPANSION (page 101)
they wrote for the Try It Out! activity on
page 84 to class. Go over the instructions
Timed Writing (page 101)
for Step 2. Have students complete the task,
• Go over the directions. Remind students not
modifying their outlines based on changes to skip any steps.
that they made in Step 1. (If students have
chosen to write about a different topic, have
• Read the prompt and have students begin
them make a new detailed outline.)
writing. Collect their papers after 30 minutes.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
students follow the instructions to write the
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
first draft of their paragraph.
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
students review the procedures for peer grade.
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
questions of the Chapter 4 Peer Review
(page 260) aloud. Have students work with
Summary Writing (page 101)
a partner and use the worksheet to review
• Have students review what they learned
each other’s drafts. If needed, have students
about summary writing in Chapter 3. Go
review the correction symbols in Appendix
over the three keys to summary writing on
E (pages 250–252). Have writers revise page 101.
their drafts and write draft two based on
• Point out the Writing Tip.
their partner’s feedback and their own ideas either in class or at home.
• Have students reread “Why Advertisers
Care about Young Shoppers” on page 98
• Have students review the Writer’s Self- and summarize it.
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 4 Writer’s Self-Check
• Have students work with a partner to
in Appendix F (page 261). Then have
compare their summaries. Have students
students revise their writing further. You
use the Writing Tip and the three keys
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
to writing a summary that are listed on
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
page 101 as a writer’s self-check and make
editing before they write their final drafts.
changes to their summaries. Collect the
final version of the summaries
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
students write their final drafts and turn
Variation: Divide the class into small
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 4
groups, and have students in each group
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
compare their summaries. Have each group
on page 57 of this Teacher’s Manual to
hand in one summary. This summary can be
evaluate students’ final drafts.
a summary done by an individual student
that the group has selected, or it may be a
Variation: Have students submit their
new summary that the group members have c.
second draft to you via email or a learning , In prepared together. n
management system. If needed, explain tio a c u
how to use word processing features to d E n format their papers. o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 25 C H A P T E R 5
look and the adverb that shows direction.
Point out that in sentence 2, the two words Process Paragraphs
together have the meaning of “try to find information.”
(pages 102–120)
• Have students read the introductory text.
CHAPTER OPENER (page 102)
• Read the instructions for Practice 1, Parts A
• Write the chapter title on the board and read
and B aloud. Have students do the tasks. Go
it aloud. Have students give examples of over the answers. process (how-to) writing. EXTENSION:
• Have students look at the photo and then
describe what the instructor in the photo
In groups, have students make a list of five
is doing and what the students are doing.
to seven additional phrasal verbs that they
Discuss the meaning of active learner.
have heard or seen. Write the phrasal verbs
Have students answer the question under
on the board. Encourage students to add the
the photo. On the board, make a list of the
idioms to their notebooks, or compile a list
steps that students can take to be successful
and put it on your class website. in school.
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students
ORGANIZATION (pages 105–108)
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 5.
• Have students read the introductory text.
• Point out that, like other academic
INTRODUCTION (pages 103–104)
paragraphs, process paragraphs have a topic
sentence, a body, and a conclusion. Point
• Go over the introductory text. Point out that
out that each part of a process paragraph
like logical division, the steps in a process
is related to the topic of the paragraph and
are one more way of presenting information
the steps in the process that the paragraph
in an academic paragraph. Emphasize describes.
that the way a paragraph is organized is
connected to the topic, the controlling idea,
and the purpose of the paragraph. Topic Sentences in Process Paragraphs (page 105)
Analyzing the Model (page 103)
• Have students read the examples of topic
sentences. Point out that the topic sentence
• Have students read the model paragraph,
in a process paragraph states the topic (the
focusing on the steps for students to follow
process that will be described) and that
if they want to get good grades.
the controlling idea includes words such
• Have students work with a partner or in a
as steps, procedure, process, directions,
small group to answer the questions about
suggestions, and instructions.
the model. Go over the answers with the
class. On the board, write the main points /
Supporting Sentences in Process
the steps that students should follow.
Paragraphs (page 105) Noticing Vocabulary
• Have students read the examples of (page 104)
supporting sentences. Emphasize that these
• Explain that phrasal verbs are sometimes
are the steps and the details of the process c.
called two-word verbs / three-word verbs. , In
that is presented in the topic sentence. n tio a
• Write these two sentences on the board: c u d
1. There was a flash of light in the sky, so I E n o
looked up. 2. I looked up several words in rs a e
my dictionary. Demonstrate the meaning of P y b
looked up in sentence 1. Point out that the 4 1 0
meaning clearly has two parts—the verb 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 26
Concluding Sentences in Process
model and note the connection between the Paragraphs
topic sentence and the conclusion. (page 105)
• Have students read the examples of
• Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
concluding sentences. Point out that the
Have students work with the same
concluding sentence of a process paragraph
partner(s) that they worked with in
can give the last step in the process, or it
Practice 2. Have students look at their
can sum up the results / give the purpose of
topic sentences from Practice 2 and write the process.
conclusions on a new piece of paper.
• Read the instructions for Practice 2 aloud. EXTENSION:
Have students complete the task with a partner. Go over the answers.
Have students outline the writing model
so that they can clearly see the connection
Variation: Make sure that students’
between the topic sentence, the steps in the
sentences have a variety of words such as process, and the conclusion.
steps, process, directions, suggestions. AUDIENCE
Using Time Order in Process
(pages 109–110)
Paragraphs (page 106)
• Explain the meaning of audience as it
relates to academic writing. Then have
• Read the introductory text.
students read the introductory text.
• Have students review the time order signals
• Read the directions for Practice 6, Parts A
in the chart. Remind students that then and
and B aloud. Have students complete the
now do not take commas.
tasks. Go over the answers. For Part B, on
• Read the directions for Practice 3, Parts A
the board, write the clue words that students
and B aloud. Have students complete the call out.
task. Then go over the answers.
• Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud. EXTENSION:
Have students complete the exercise. Show
Divide the class into small groups and have
the number at the bottom of the book in
students in each group work together to
the photo and go over the meaning of call
list the kind of information that would be
number. Go over the answers to Practice 4.
included in a paragraph telling professors
what to do if they hear an emergency alarm EXTENSION: during class.
Display the sentences on a screen in your
classroom in the correct time order. Have
students call out important words that
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
helped them determine the correct time
activity aloud. Have students complete the
order. Circle the important words, and point
task in class or for homework.
out that the repetition of nouns and the use
of synonyms is important for coherence.
Variation: Have students write Paragraph 1
and Paragraph 2 on separate pieces
of paper. Then have students work in PURPOSE
groups and compare their paragraphs. (page 109) c.
Have each group select and hand in one , In n
• Have students read the introductory text.
version of Paragraph 1 and one version of tio a c
Then have them look at the conclusion of Paragraph 2. u d
the writing model and note the purpose E n o rs stated in the conclusion.
• Point out the Writing Tip. a e P y
• Have students bring their papers for b 4 1
Practice 2 to class. Before students do 0 2 ©
Practice 5, have them go back to the writing
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 27
SENTENCE STRUCTURE (pages 110–117)
• Point out the commas in the example
sentences in the subordinator chart.
• Have students read the introductory text.
• Read the directions for Practice 7, Parts A
and B aloud. Have students complete the
Analyzing the Model (page 110)
tasks. Then go over the answers.
• Read the introductory text aloud.
• Read the directions for Practice 8, Parts A
• Have students read the model. Then have
and B aloud. Have students complete the
students work with a partner or in a small
exercises. Then go over the answers.
group to answer the questions about the
Variation: Have students add a title to the model. Go over the answers.
paragraph in Exercise 8, Part A.
Clauses and Complex Sentences
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Have students complete (page 112)
the task with a partner. After each pair
• Have students read the introductory text.
of students shares their answers with
• Write the terms clause, independent clause,
another pair, collect a single version of the
simple sentence, compound sentence,
paragraph for the group of four.
dependent clause, and complex sentence
on the board. Explain the terms as outlined EXTENSION:
below. (Note: Refer students to the list of
In groups, have students compare the
grammar terms in Appendix A on pages
original “Note Taking 101” and their
240–242 for more definitions and examples.)
revised drafts of the paragraph. Have
students make a list of three to four ways
Clauses (page 112)
that their revisions improved the paragraph.
• Use the examples to explain the terms
clause, independent clause, simple
Applying Vocabulary (page 117)
sentence, and compound sentence.
• Have students review phrasal verbs on
• Point out the difference between an page 104.
independent clause and a dependent clause.
Point out that dependent clauses do not
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
have capital letters or periods, and they are
Have students complete the exercise. As not sentences.
space allows, have student write answers on
the board so that there will be two to three sentences for each item.
Complex Sentences (page 112)
• Emphasize that a dependent clause must EXTENSION:
be combined with an independent clause to
form a complex sentence.
Have students write a paragraph about
one of the topics in their journal. When
• Use the examples to show the order of the
responding to the journal, focus on the steps
independent clause and dependent clause
in the process—ask questions if the steps
in a complex sentence. Point out the use of
are unclear or incomplete. Keep audience, commas in complex sentences.
purpose, and the order of the steps in mind.
Subordinators (page 113) c. WRITING ASSIGNMENT , In
(pages 118–119) n
• Have students read the introductory text. tio a
• Tell students that they will write a c u
• Point out the meanings (time, reason, d
paragraph about self-improvement. Their E n
purpose, condition) of the subordinators in o
paragraph will describe a self-improvement rs a
the chart. Focus students’ attention on the e process. P y
highlighted words and the meaning of the b 4 1 example sentences. 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 28
• Have students look at the Chapter 5 scoring
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 119)
rubric on page 58 of this manual. Give
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
students a paper copy of the rubric, display it
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
on a screen in your classroom, and/or put it on this manual.
your course website. Go over the rubric with
students so that they understand what they EXPANSION
are required to do for their Chapter 5 writing (page 120)
assignment and how they will be graded.
Timed Writing (page 120)
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
• Go over the directions. Remind students not
students complete the task. If students need to skip any steps.
to review brainstorming techniques, they
can refer to Chapter 1 for listing (pages 21–
• Read the prompt and have students
23) and Chapter 2 for freewriting (page 47).
begin writing. Collect their papers after 30 minutes.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. If students
need review of detailed outlines, refer them
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers. to Chapter 3 (pages 73–75).
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
students follow the instructions to write the grade.
first draft of their paragraph.
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
Email to a Professor (page 120)
students review the procedures for peer
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
• Have students reread the model on
questions of the Chapter 5 Peer Review
page 111 and point out the Writing Tip
(page 262) aloud. Have students work on page 120.
with a partner and use the worksheet to
• Have students follow the steps in the model
review each other’s drafts. If needed, have
to write and send an email to you. Respond
students review the correction symbols in to the emails.
Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have writers
revise their drafts and write draft two based
on their partner’s feedback and their own C H A P T E R 6
ideas either in class or at home. Definition
• Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Check section of Appendix F (page 253). Paragraphs
Go over the Chapter 5 Writer’s Self-Check
(pages 121–147)
in Appendix F (page 263). Then have
students revise their writing further. You
CHAPTER OPENER (page 121)
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
• Write the chapter title on the board and
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
read it aloud. Have students predict how a
editing before they write their final drafts.
definition paragraph will be different from a
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have dictionary definition.
students write their final drafts and turn
• Have students look at the photo and
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 5
describe what the man’s job is. Have
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
students explain whether they think the man
on page 58 of this Teacher’s Manual to c.
is courageous. Then have students answer , In
evaluate students’ final drafts. n the question under the photo. tio a c u d
Variation: Have students submit their
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students E n o
second draft to you via email or a learning
do so. Point out the writing assignment that rs a e
management system. If needed, explain
students will do at the end of Chapter 6. P y
how to use word processing features to b 4 1 0 format their papers. 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 29
INTRODUCTION (pages 122–124)
paragraph. They are listed on page 124.
Have students study the chart on page 124.
• Have students read the introductory
information. Point out the usefulness of
• Point out that the body of a definition definition paragraphs.
paragraph generally presents what, where,
when, how, or why information that further
explains the definition in the topic sentence.
Analyzing the Model (page 122)
Have students read the examples at the
• Have students read the model paragraph, bottom of page 124.
focusing on the kinds of information that
• Explain that the concluding sentence of a
the writer includes in her definition.
definition paragraph often explains why
• Have students work with a partner or in a
the definition is important, interesting, or
small group to answer the questions about
unique. Have students read the examples at
the model. Go over the answers. the top of page 125.
• Point out the Writing Tip on page 125.
Noticing Vocabulary (page 123)
Explain that a dictionary is a good place
• Have students read the introductory
to start but that a good definition requires information and examples.
more than a dictionary definition.
• Show students or have students explain EXTENSION:
where they can find word origins in a
dictionary such as the Longman Dictionary
Display the definition of courage from a
of American English. Use these words
dictionary such as the Longman Dictionary
as examples: automatic and mobile.
of American English. Have students
Point out related words (e.g., autostart,
read the dictionary definition and reread
autobiography, automobile, mobile phone)
the writing model on pages 122–123.
and how their meanings are connected to
Have students discuss the similarities the word origins.
and differences between the dictionary
definition and the definition in the model.
• Read the directions for Practice 1 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the answers.
• Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud.
• Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
Remind students of the idiom have a big
answer. Do the same for Practices 4, 5,
heart. Have students do the task. Go over and 6. the answers.
Variation: Have students identify the
term / person / concept, the category or EXTENSION:
group, and the distinguishing characteristics
in the topic sentence in Practices 3 and 5.
In groups, have students make a list of
four to five additional idioms that they
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
have heard or seen. Write the idioms on
activity aloud. Have students complete the
the board. Encourage students to add the task. Go over the answers.
idioms to their notebooks, or compile a list
and put it on your class website or blog. SENTENCE STRUCTURE
(pages 128–142)
• Have students read the introductory text. c.
ORGANIZATION (pages 124–128) , In n tio
• Point out that definition paragraphs have Analyzing the Model a (page 128) c u d
a topic sentence, a body, and a concluding E
• Point out the photo of the No Rooz table on n o
sentence like other academic paragraphs. rs
page 129. Tell students they will read more a e P
• Go over the three key pieces of information
about the No Rooz table and other holidays y b 4
in the topic sentence of a definition
in the model on pages 128–129. 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 30
• Read the introductory text aloud. Then have
read the information about appositives on students read the model. pages 129–130 for homework.
• Have students work with a partner or in a
• Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
small group to answer the questions about
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
the model. Go over the answers. answers.
Variation: Have students remove the EXTENSION:
underlined appositive from each sentence to
In groups, have students discuss the most
see if the meaning of the sentence is clear
important holiday celebration in their home without the appositive.
country or culture. Have students explain
when the holiday is celebrated, what the
Adjective Clauses (page 131)
history of the holiday is, what the reason
• Have students read the examples. Point
for the celebration is, what people do to
out that the bold groups of words are
celebrate the holiday, and so on.
adjective clauses. Explain that the purpose
of adjective clauses is to describe nouns
Appositives (page 129)
and pronouns and that they usually
appear after the noun or pronoun that they
• Read the definition of appositives aloud.
describe. Point out that adjective clauses are
Have students read the examples. Point sometimes called
out that the bold words (the appositives) in relative clauses.
each example are nouns or noun phrases
• Write . . . that originally meant “holy
that give information about the noun that
day” on the board. Point out that adjective
immediately precedes them. (Note: You can
clauses are dependent clauses. In other
refer students to the list of grammar terms
words, they must be connected to an
in Appendix A on pages 240–242 for more
independent clause. Add “Holiday” is a information and examples.)
word from Old English, and underline it.
Point out that this is an independent clause.
Comma Rules for Appositives
Double underline that originally meant
“holy day”
and point out that this is a (page 130) dependent adjective clause.
• Write the sample sentences from page 129
• Point out that adjective clauses begin with
on the board without the appositives. Point words such as out that
who, whom, which, and that.
Persian names a specific language
Explain that these words are called and relative
fudge names a specific kind of candy—
the meanings of Persian and fudge are
pronouns and that a relative pronoun
connects the dependent adjective clause to
clear without the appositive. Therefore,
the independent clause and to the noun or
the appositives give unnecessary / extra pronoun that it describes.
information and use commas. However,
the identity of the friend is unclear in
the sentence My friend makes incredible
Comma Rules for Adjective
chocolate fudge. Therefore, the appositive
Clauses (page 132)
Tina is necessary to clearly name which
• Write the two examples at the top of
friend makes the fudge. It does not use
page 132 on the board without the commas.
adjective clauses. Point out that Every
• Point out the Writing Tip.
culture in the world has special days does c. , In
not specify which days / what kind of n
• Point out that if an appositive follows a tio a
days. Add the adjective clause to give the c
proper noun (a noun that is capitalized), the u d
necessary information. Point out that Many E
appositive uses commas. Point out that if an n o rs
appositive follows a noun with an adjective
Halloween customs started with the Celts is a e P such as
a sentence about a specific group of people.
first, last, best, worst, favorite, the y b
Add the adjective clause and explain that it 4
appositive uses commas. Have students 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 31
gives unnecessary / extra information about
• Return to the example on the board. Circle
the Celts. Add the comma. Have students
the verb in the dependent adjective clause.
state what they notice about how commas
Point out that which is a relative pronoun
are used with adjective clauses. Point out
and that like other pronouns, which gets
that adjective clauses use the same comma
its meaning from its antecedent noun.
rule as appositives. Have students read
Point out that there must be subject-verb
the information about adjective clauses on
agreement between which / Valentine’s Day pages 131–132 for homework.
and is. Point out the two examples with number 2.
• Read the directions for Practice 8 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Then
• Return to the example on the board. Add go over the answers.
the pronoun it after which. Point out that
just one pronoun, the relative pronoun,
should be used because the relative pronoun Complex Sentences with
connects the dependent adjective clause to
Adjective Clauses (page 133)
the independent clause and the noun that
• Use the Valentine’s Day example at the top
it describes. Point out the example with
of page 133 to illustrate all of the points number 3.
about adjective clauses that are presented
• Remind students that in addition to on the page.
its connecting function, which also
• On the board write two simple sentences:
functions as the subject in the dependent
Valentine’s Day is popular in many
adjective clause. Have students review
countries. + Valentine’s Day is a holiday of
the information about complex sentences love and friendship.
with adjective clauses on page 133 for
• Explain that the simple sentences can be homework.
combined into one complex sentence with
an independent clause and a dependent
Subject Pronouns: Who, Which,
clause. On the board, write Valentine’s Day,
and That (page 133)
which is a holiday of love and friendship,
• Remind students that in addition to its
is popular in many different countries.
connecting function, the relative pronoun in
Underline Valentine’s Day is popular in
a dependent adjective clause can function
many countries and point out that it is
as the subject of the clause. Have students
the independent clause. Double underline
look at the chart. Point out that who
the adjective clause which is a holiday of
and that (informal) are used as relative
love and friendship. Point out that it is a
pronouns in adjective clauses that describe
dependent clause that cannot be a sentence
people. Point out that which and that are by itself.
used as relative pronouns in adjective
• Point out that the purpose of the dependent clauses that describe things.
adjective clause is to provide information
• Have students read the examples for extra
about Valentine’s Day. Point out that
information adjective clauses at the top of
“Valentine’s Day” is the antecedent, the
page 134. Emphasize the following: When
noun that is described / modified by the
adjective clauses have commas, use who
dependent adjective clause. Point out
for people and which for things. Do not
the definition of antecedent at the top of use that. page 133.
• Have students read the examples for c.
• Point out that the dependent adjective , In
necessary information adjective clauses. n
clause must be placed as close as possible tio
Point out the options for relative pronouns. a c
to its antecedent. Point out the “confusing” u d
Have students review the information about E
and “clear” examples included with n o
subject relative pronouns on pages 133–134 rs number 1. a e for homework. P y b 4 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 32
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
Relative Adverbs: When and
Point out that the second sentence in each
Where (page 137)
pair will become the dependent adjective
• Have students read the introductory
clause. Remind students to add commas as
information at the bottom of page 137.
needed. Have students complete the exercise.
Point out that there is no difference in the
Then go over the answers, referring to the
use of relative adverbs in extra information
explanations on pages 133–134 as necessary.
and necessary information clauses.
• Have students read the examples for extra
Object Pronouns: Whom, Which,
information clauses at the top of page
That, and Ø (no pronoun) (page 135)
138. Emphasize the following: When and
• Point out that in addition to its connecting
Where replace prepositional phrases in the
function, the relative pronoun in a
examples. The prepositions do not appear
dependent adjective clause can function as
in the adjective clauses. Have students read an object in the clause.
the examples for necessary information
clauses. Emphasize the following: Where
• Have students look at the chart. Point out
replaces a prepositional phrase in the
the formal and informal options. Also point
second example. The preposition does
out the placement of the relative object
not appear in the adjective clause. Have
pronoun at the beginning of the adjective
students review the information about
clause, before the subject. Emphasize the
relative adverbs on pages 137–138 for
following: That does not appear in Extra homework.
Information boxes of the chart. Ø does not
appear in the Extra Information boxes of
• Read the directions for Practice 11 aloud. the chart.
Have students complete the exercise.
Remind students that the second sentence in
• Have students read the examples for extra
each pair will become the adjective clause.
information adjective clauses at the top
Then go over the answers, referring to the
of page 136. Point out that the relative
explanations on page 133 and on pages
pronouns function as objects in the 137–138 as necessary.
dependent adjective clauses. Emphasize
the following: When adjective clauses have
• For homework, have students read the
commas, use whom (or who informally)
examples in the chart on page 139 and
for people and which for things. Do not
review the information about relative use that.
pronouns and adverbs. (Note: Students can
mark page 139 in their books [e.g., with
• Have students read the examples for
a paper clip or a small piece of paper] so
necessary information adjective clauses
that they can easily go back to the chart for
in the middle of page 134. Point out that
information on adjective clauses / relative
the relative pronouns function as objects
clauses and relative pronouns.)
in the dependent adjective clauses. Also
point out the options for relative pronouns.
• Read the directions for Practice 12 aloud.
Have students review the information about
Have students complete the exercise.
object relative pronouns on pages 135–136
Go over the answers. Do the same for for homework. Practice 13.
• Read the directions for Practice 10, Parts A
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
and B aloud. Point out which sentence
activity aloud. Review the terms simple
will become the adjective clause. Remind
sentence, compound sentence, and complex c. , In
students to add commas as needed. Have
sentence. Have students complete the n tio a
students complete the exercises. Go over
exercise. Then go over the answers. Discuss c u d
the answers, referring to the explanations
alternative answers that students offer. E n o
on page 133 and on pages 135–136 as rs a e necessary.
Variation: Have students write the P y
sentences in the Try It Out! activity as a b 4 1 0 paragraph. 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 33
what they are required to do for their
Applying Vocabulary (page 142)
Chapter 6 writing assignment and how they
• Have students review the information about will be graded.
word origins and idioms on page 123.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
• Read the directions for Practice 14, Parts
students complete the task by using the
A and B aloud. Have students complete the
cluster diagram they developed in the Try It
tasks. Then go over the answers. Out! activity on page 144.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have EXTENSION:
students complete the task. If students need
review of detailed outlines, refer them to
All of the items in Practice 14, Part B have Chapter 3 (pages 73–75).
complex sentences. Have students read the
sentences they have written and call out the
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
dependent clause(s) in each sentence. Have students complete the task.
a student come to the board and double
Step 4: Go over the instructions for Step 4.
underline the adjective clause(s) with the
Have students review the procedures for
help of the other students in the class.
peer review in Appendix F (page 253).
Read the questions of the Chapter 6 Peer
Review (page 264) aloud. Have students
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
work with a partner and use the worksheet
(pages 143–144)
to review each other’s drafts. If needed,
• Have students read the introductory
have students review the correction symbols
information at the top of page 143.
in Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have
• Have students look at the cluster diagram
writers revise their drafts and write draft
and explain the different colors in the
two based on their partner’s feedback and
diagram; provide help as needed.
their own ideas either in class or at home.
• Have students reread the writing model on
• Have students review the Writer’s Self-
pages 122–123. Divide the class into small
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
groups and have students in each group
Go over the Chapter 6 Writer’s Self-Check
point out ideas that are in both the writing
in Appendix F (page 265). Then have
model and the cluster diagram and those
students revise their writing further. You that are not.
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
• Have students read the paragraph at the
editing before they write their final drafts. bottom of page 143.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
students write their final drafts and turn
activity aloud. Read the instructions for
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 6
each number aloud, wait for students to do
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
the activity, and then move on to the next
on page 59 of this Teacher’s Manual to
number. Have students continue developing
evaluate students’ final drafts.
their cluster diagrams on their own.
Variation: Have students submit their
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 144–145)
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
• Tell students that they will write a definition
how to use word processing features to
paragraph about a word, concept, or custom. c. format their papers. , In n
• Have students look at the Chapter 6 scoring tio a c
rubric on page 59 of this manual. Give u d
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 145) E
students a paper copy of the rubric, display n o rs
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options a e P
put it on your course website. Go over the
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of y b 4
rubric with students so that they understand this manual. 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 34
EXPANSION (pages 146–147)
what the purpose of bike sharing programs
is). Provide background information on
bike sharing programs as necessary.
Timed Writing (page 146)
• Have students answer the question under
• Go over the directions. Remind students not the photo. to skip any steps.
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students
• Read the prompt and have students begin
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
writing. Collect their papers after 30
students will do at the end of Chapter 7. minutes.
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
INTRODUCTION (pages 149–150)
It may be enough to write encouraging
comments about the content of the writing.
• Have students read the introductory text.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
• Point out that cause / effect analysis is a grade.
common task in academic writing.
Paraphrasing (page 146)
Analyzing the Model (page 149)
• Have students read the introductory text and
• Have students read the writing model. Have
examples. Point out when paraphrasing is
them focus on what made the Vélib’ bike
used for academic purposes. Emphasize the rental program successful.
importance of using paraphrasing to avoid
• Have students work with a partner or in a plagiarism.
small group to answer the questions about
• Read aloud the two sentences on page
the model. Go over the answers.
147 that students are going to paraphrase.
Have students find the two sentences in the
Noticing Vocabulary (page 150)
writing model on pages 122–123 so that
they can better understand the sentences in
• Have students read the introductory
context. Then have students paraphrase the
information. Point out that the prefixes in
two sentences and discuss them in small
the examples change the meanings of the groups. words.
• Read the instructions for Practice 1 aloud.
Go over the New Word column of the chart C H A P T E R 7
and point out how the words were formed. Cause / Effect
Have students do the exercise. Then go over the answers. Paragraphs
(pages 148–170) EXTENSION: CHAPTER OPENER
On the board, re-create the chart with just (page 148)
the prefix column filled in. Make the rows
• Write the chapter title on the board and
wide enough for multiple new words to be
read it aloud. Explain that cause / effect is
added for each prefix. Have students work
another way of focusing and organizing
with a partner to write two to three new
information in academic paragraphs.
words that have one of the prefixes from the
• Have students look at the photo and explain
chart. Have students add their new words, c.
why all the bikes in the photo are the same.
along with the base words, to the chart. , In n
Have students explain what they know tio a c
about bike sharing programs (e.g., where u d E
bike sharing programs are located, who n o rs
owns the bikes, how the payment system a e P
works, where riders can pick up and drop y b 4
off bikes, if riders can take the bikes home, 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 35
ORGANIZATION (pages 151–167)
point. Have students read and review the
information about support sentences in
• Explain that cause / effect paragraphs
cause / effect paragraphs for homework.
follow the same overall organization as
other academic paragraphs—they have a
topic sentence with a controlling idea, a
Concluding Sentences in Cause /
body that develops the controlling idea,
Effect Paragraphs (page 152)
and a conclusion related to the topic and
• Go over what may be included in controlling idea.
concluding sentences of cause / effect
• Point out that the topic of the writing model
paragraphs. Have students read the
is the success of Vélib’, and the controlling
examples as you present each point.
idea is causes of the success.
• Read the instructions for Practice 2 aloud.
• Discuss that the success of Vélib’ could
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
be analyzed in a different way. The
answers. Do the same for Practices 3–6.
controlling idea could become the effects
of the successful bike sharing system. Have EXTENSION:
students read “The Effects of Bike Sharing
Have students work in groups to write
in Paris.” Have them circle the controlling
concluding sentences that look to the
idea in the topic sentence and underline
future and/or have a prediction. Then have
the main points. Emphasize that the main
students in each group work together to write
points are all beneficial effects of Vélib’ on
concluding sentences with an opinion or
cyclists. Have students double underline the
recommendation. (These are the most difficult
concluding sentence and note its connection
types of conclusions for students to write.) to the topic sentence.
Topic Sentences in Cause / Effect
• Point out the Writing Tip at the bottom of Paragraphs
page 158. Then have students look at the (page 151)
cluster diagram on page 159 and explain
• Have students read the introductory text.
the colors. Discuss the paragraph above
Point out that the topic of a cause / effect
the cluster diagram. Point out that it is
topic sentence often presents an event or
not unusual for a cluster diagram to have
a situation (e.g., Vélib’ bike sharing is a
information that will not be included in a
success). The controlling idea then states
paragraph. Emphasize that clustering is
whether the paragraph will analyze the
a preliminary writing activity, that is, a causes or the effects.
brainstorming activity that can help writers
generate ideas and see connections between
Supporting Sentences in Cause / ideas.
Effect Paragraphs (page 152)
• Read the directions for the Try It Out! activity.
• Point out that like other academic
Point out that students will use ideas from
paragraphs, cause / effect paragraphs must
the clustering in their Chapter 7 Writing
be coherent. Point out that one way to
Assignment. Have students complete the
create coherence is to arrange the causes or
exercise. Then go over the answers.
the effects in a logical way. Point out that
the writing model is arranged in time order
SENTENCE STRUCTURE (pages 160–167)
and that “The Effects of Bike Sharing in c.
Paris” presents effects from most obvious
• Have students read the introductory text. , In n
to less obvious. Also point out that reasons tio a c u
or results could be presented from least
Analyzing the Model (page 160) d E important to most important. n o
• Have students read the model paragraph. rs a e
• Go over the outline. Focus on the order
• Have students work with a partner or in a P y b
of the main points and the logical listing 4
small group to answer the questions about 1 0
of supporting details under each main 2
the model. Go over the answers. © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 36
Cause / Effect Transition Signals
using Appendix A: Grammar Terms on
pages 240–242.) Have students complete (page 161)
the task. Go over the answers. Discuss
• Read the introductory text aloud. Then have
different ways of correcting the errors.
students look at the chart. Point out that
in addition to what students learned about EXTENSION:
transition signals in Chapter 4, the chart has
subordinating conjunctions, which students
Refer students to Appendix C on studied in Chapter 5.
pages 246–247. Point out that this is an
excellent source of not only cause / effect Sentence Connectors
but also other transition signals that they (page 161)
have studied. Point out the connection
• Emphasize that students are reviewing
between the descriptions and explanations
a sentence structure that they learned in
on pages 161–163 and the categories of
previous chapters. Then read points 1,
transition signals in Appendix C.
2, and 3 aloud. Stop after you read each
point so that students can silently read
the examples. Point out the highlighted
Applying Vocabulary (page 167)
punctuation. Do the same for Coordinating
• Have students turn to page 150 to review
Conjunctions (page 162) and Subordinating prefixes. Conjunctions (page 162).
• Read the directions for Practice 10 aloud.
Have students do the exercise and hand in
Others (page 163) their papers.
• Emphasize that because of, due to, and
as a result of have the same meaning.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 168–169)
They are prepositions and come before
nouns (or pronouns) to make prepositional
• Tell students that they will write a cause /
phrases. They do not come directly before
effect paragraph about a social issue. dependent clauses.
• Have students look at the Chapter 7 scoring
• Read points 1, 2, and 3 aloud. Stop after
rubric on page 60 of this manual. Give
you read each point so that students can
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
silently read the examples. Point out the
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or highlighted punctuation.
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
• Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
what they are required to do for their
Have students complete the exercise. Go
Chapter 7 writing assignment and how they over the answers. will be graded.
• Read the instructions for Practice 8 aloud.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
Tell students to not change the order of the
students complete the task by using either
sentences in each item so that they will not
of the cluster diagrams they developed in
reverse the causes and the effects. Point out
the Try It Out! activity on pages 159–160.
that students must add capitalization and
Have them bring the most recent version of
punctuation. Have students complete the
their cluster diagram to class.
exercise and write their sentences on the
board. Discuss alternative answers.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
students complete the task. If they need c.
Variation: Have students find each of the
review of detailed outlines, refer them to , In n
transition signals in Practice 8 in the chart Chapter 3 (pages 73–75). tio a c
on page 161. Have students review the u d E
explanations on pages 161–163 as needed.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have n o students complete the task. rs a
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud. e P y
(Note: If necessary, review the terms b 4 1
fragment, comma splice, and run-on by 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 37
Step 4: Go over the instructions for Step 4.
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
Have students review the procedures for
It may be enough to write encouraging
peer review in Appendix F (page 253).
comments about the content of the writing.
Read the questions of the Chapter 7 Peer
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
Review (page 266) aloud. Have students grade.
work with a partner and use the worksheet
to review each other’s drafts. If needed,
Double-Entry Journal Writing
have students review the correction symbols (page 170)
in Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have
writers revise their drafts and write draft
• Before they do the double-entry journal
two based on their partner’s feedback and
assignment, have students reread the
their own ideas either in class or at home. writing model on page 149.
• Have students review the Writer’s Self-
• Write the following questions on the board
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
and lead a class discussion about them:
Go over the Chapter 7 Writer’s Self-Check
Why did the Vélib’ planners want to have
in Appendix F (page 267). Then have
bike stations near bus stops and subway
students revise their writing further. You
stations? How did advertising and publicity
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
help make Vélib’ bike sharing a success? As
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
a tourist in Paris, would you use the Vélib’
editing before they write their final drafts. bikes? Why or why not?
• Have students bring their journals to class.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
On the next clean page of the journal,
students write their final drafts and turn
have students draw a vertical line down
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 7
the middle of the page for a double-entry
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
journal. Tell students that they are going to
on page 60 of this Teacher’s Manual to
write on the left and right sides of the page
evaluate students’ final drafts.
for their next journal assignment.
Variation: Have students submit their
• Point out that in a double-entry journal,
second draft to you via email or a learning
students will explain another writer’s idea
management system. If needed, explain
and then give their opinion about the idea.
how to use word processing features to
• Have students read the paragraph at the top format their papers. of page 170. SELF-ASSESSMENT
• Point out that the first step in double-entry (page 169)
journal writing is paraphrasing. Have
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
students review the four keys of effective
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of paraphrasing on page 170. this manual.
• Make sure that each student’s journal page
looks like the illustration in the middle of
EXPANSION (pages 169–170) page 170.
• Read the introductory text below the
Timed Writing (page 169)
illustration aloud. Use the illustration to
• Go over the directions. Remind students not
show students how to start their paraphrase. to skip any steps.
Have students write their paraphrase on the
left side of their journal page. Then have c.
• Read the prompt and have students , In
them complete the “I think . . . ” statement n
begin writing. Collect their papers after tio a on the right side. c 30 minutes. u d E
• Collect your students’ journals. Read and n o rs respond to them. a e P y
• Point out the Writing Tip. b 4 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 38 C H A P T E R 8
paragraph. Then have students read and find
out if their prediction is accurate. Comparison /
• Have students work with a partner or in a Contrast Paragraphs
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Then go over the answers.
(pages 171–196) EXTENSION:
CHAPTER OPENER (page 171)
Have students discuss whether the title
• Write the chapter title on the board and read
of the writing model allows readers to
it aloud. Explain that in academic writing
accurately predict the controlling idea of
comparison means looking at similarities
the paragraph. Discuss whether an element
and contrast means looking at differences.
of surprise is a good strategy for academic
Point out that comparison / contrast is writing.
another common way of presenting or analyzing a topic.
Noticing Vocabulary (page 173)
• Have students look at the photo and
describe what they see (where the people
• Have students read the introductory
are, what they are wearing, what they are
information and examples. Point out the
doing, etc.). Have students answer these Writing Tip.
questions: In what country was the photo
• Read the directions for Practice 1, Parts A
taken? When was this photo taken? How do
and B aloud. Have students complete the you know? tasks. Go over the answers.
• Have students answer the question under
the photo. Write a list of similarities and a
Variation: Limit the choice of answers for
list of differences on the board. Do not aim
Part B. Have students find the vocabulary
for detailed lists. Tell students that they will
from Part B in the writing model so that
read more about this topic in the writing
they can understand the meaning in the model.
context of the model. Then have students
select only those antonyms that fit the
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students meaning of the writing model.
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 8.
ORGANIZATION (pages 174–181)
INTRODUCTION (pages 172–174)
• Have students read the introductory
information at the bottom of page 174.
• Have students read the introductory text.
Point out that with comparison / contrast
Point out that comparison / contrast
paragraphs, students will continue to write
analysis is a common task in daily life
a topic sentence, a body, and a conclusion.
and in academic writing. Have students
give specific examples of comparing and
• Point out that the writer of the model on
contrasting from their personal experience.
pages 172–173 believes that the best way
to understand 21st century education is
not to describe it, define it, or write about
Analyzing the Model (page 172)
its effects. The writer thinks that the way
• Have students look at their list of
to understand 21st century education is to
similarities and differences between
look at similarities and differences between c.
education in the past and education today , In
the schools of 50 years ago and the schools n tio
that is on the board. Point out that they will
of today. Thus, comparison / contrast is the a c u d
get additional information on the topic as
most effect method of organization. E n o they read the writing model. rs a e
• Before they read, have students look at the P y b 4
title and predict the controlling idea of the 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 39
Topic Sentences in Comparison /
Concluding Sentences in
Contrast Paragraphs (page 175)
Comparison / Contrast Paragraphs
• Have students read the introductory (page 176)
information. Point out the two subjects
• Have students read the introductory text.
and the controlling idea in each of the
Emphasize that the concluding sentences examples.
students write for comparison / contrast
paragraphs once again can restate the
Supporting Sentences in
topic sentence, summarize or restate
the main points, and give an opinion or
Comparison / Contrast Paragraphs recommendation. (page 175)
• Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
• Have students reread the writing model,
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
finding the main points they underlined in answers.
the paragraph and noting the placement of
the main points in the outline on page 175.
• Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud.
Emphasize that the support (the main points
Have students complete the exercise.
plus the supporting details) is grouped
Go over the answers. Do the same for
and ordered by subtopics: what students Practices 4 and 5.
learn, how students learn, and why students
learn. Give students the term point-by-point EXTENSION:
organization for support that is grouped and
Divide the class into small groups. Have
presented one main point (subtopic) at a
students in half the groups write a detailed time.
outline of Paragraph 1 in Practice 2. Have
• Have students read the outline on page
the other groups write a detailed outline
176. Emphasize that all of the similarities
of Paragraph 2. Then have groups who did
between 20th and 21st century education
the point-by-point outline of Paragraph 1
are grouped together, and all of the
and groups who did the block outline of
differences between 20th and 21st century
Paragraph 2 show their outlines to each
education are grouped together. Give other.
students the term block organization for
support that is grouped and presented in this way.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity aloud. Have students do the
• Emphasize that the point-by-point outline
exercise. Have students hand in their
on 175 and the block outline on page completed outlines.
176 have identical introductions and
conclusions. Emphasize that the difference
is in the organization / presentation of main
SENTENCE STRUCTURE (pages 182–190)
points and supporting details.
• Have students read the introductory text.
• Emphasize the Writing Tip on page 176.
Have students look again at the point-
Analyzing the Model (page 182)
by-point outline of the writing model
• Have students look at the picture on page
(page 175) and the block outline of the
182 and explain what the young woman is
writing model (page 176). Focus students’
thinking and why she is confused. Provide
attention on the balanced order in which the
information about the word boot in British c.
main points and the supporting details are
English and American English if needed. , In n presented. tio a
• Read the introductory information aloud. c u d
Then have students read the model. E n o rs
• Have students work with a partner or in a a e P
small group to answer the questions about y b 4 1
the model. Go over the answers. 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 40
Transition Signals for Comparison
Paired Conjunctions (page 184) (page 183)
• Point out that this is the first time students
• Have students read the introductory text and
have learned about paired conjunctions the chart.
in this book. Have students read the introductory text.
• Before going over the transition signals
in Chapter 8, present a quick review of
• Point out the term parallelism. Explain
the rules and explanations for transition
that parallelism requires balance in
signals that students learned in Chapters 4
sentence structure. In other words, the same
and 7. Remind students of the information
grammar structure / form must follow each
on pages 161–163, and give a brief
of the two parts of paired conjunctions.
summary of that information with one set
• Write the correct and incorrect examples on
of examples. Use examples related to the
the board. Point out the use of parallelism.
writing model such as the following:
Have students read the remaining examples.
Sentence connectors: Today’s economy
Point out the part of speech labels in the
is global. Therefore, schools must prepare examples.
students to be adaptable. (Point out options
for placement and punctuation of sentence
Subordinating Conjunctions connectors.) (page 184)
Coordinating conjunctions: Today’s
• Have students look at the chart on page 183
economy is global, so schools must prepare
and note subordinating conjunctions for
students to be adaptable. (Point out the similarities.
placement of coordinating conjunctions
• Have students read the information at the
between two independent clauses and
bottom of page 184. Point out the use of punctuation.) commas.
Subordinating conjunctions: Because
today’s economy is global, schools must
Others (page 185)
prepare students to be adaptable. (Point
out that subordinating conjunctions
• Have students look at the chart on page 183
connect dependent clauses to independent
and note the signals in the Others category
clauses in complex sentences. Also point
that show similarities. Point out that in this
out the possible order of the clauses and
instance, there are three types of words and punctuation.)
phases: adjectives, prepositions, and adverbs.
Others: Because of today’s global
• Have students read the examples for
economy, schools must prepare students to
adjectives, prepositions, and adverbs.
be adaptable. (Point out that nouns, noun
Point out that adjectives describe nouns.
phrases, and pronouns follow prepositions
Point out that prepositions are followed by
to form prepositional phrases. Point out the
nouns, noun phrases, and pronouns. Point
possible order of independent clauses and
out that adverbs usually describe verbs and
prepositional phrases and punctuation.) adjectives.
• Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
Sentence Connectors (page 183)
Have students complete the exercise. Go over the answers.
• Have students look at the chart on page 183
and note the sentence connectors that show
Variation: Have students circle the word c. , In similarities.
that comes after each part of the paired n tio a c
• Have students read the examples with also.
conjunction so that they can see parallelism. u d E
Point out the placement and punctuation of
• Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud. n o rs
also. Do the same with the too examples.
Have students complete the task. Then go a e P
over the answers and discuss alternative y b 4
answers. Do the same for Practice 8. 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 41
Transition Signals for Contrast
on page 187. Then go over the answers.
(Note: Have students look at the chart and (page 187)
review the explanations on pages 187–188
• Have students read the Transition Signals as needed.)
for Contrast introductory information.
• Have students look at the chart on EXTENSION:
page 187. Point out the labels on the chart.
Refer students to Appendix B on
Remind students that they are again using
pages 243–245. Have them identify the
what they learned in Chapters 4 and 7.
sentences that they have written as simple,
compound, or complex. (When students
Sentence Connectors (page 187)
have used sentence connectors, have them
• Have students read the information about
identify the sentences as simple sentences
sentence connectors, including the example.
even when they have used semicolons.)
Do the same for Coordinating Conjunctions
(page 187), pointing out the meaning
• Read the directions for Practice 10 aloud.
of but and yet, and for Subordinating
Have students complete the exercise and
Conjunctions (page 188), pointing out the hand in their sentences.
meaning of while and whereas and the use
of commas. Also point out the meaning
Variation: Have students (speakers of
of although, even though and though.
the same language or speakers of different
Have students read the examples. Point
languages) share information from their
out that clauses with these subordinating
sentences in groups. Have each group
conjunctions follow the general rule for
select the most interesting difference
commas with dependent clauses that
between their language and English. Have a students saw in Chapter 7.
member of the group write the sentence that
describes the most interesting difference
Others (page 188)
on the board. Go over the sentences on
• Have students look at the chart on page 187
the board. Discuss the sentences for idea
and note the signals in the Others category
content and the use of transition signals.
that show differences. Point out that again
there are three types of words and phases in
Applying Vocabulary (page 190)
the Others category: prepositions, adverbs,
• Have students turn to page 173 to review and verbs.
what they learned about antonyms.
• Have students read the examples of
• Read the directions for Practice 11 aloud.
prepositions, adverbs, and verbs. Point out
Have students complete the task. Then go
that prepositions are followed by nouns,
over the answers, discussing alternative
noun phrases, and pronouns. Point out answers.
that adverbs usually describe verbs and adjectives.
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
• Point out the picture at the bottom of
(pages 191–193)
page 188. Emphasize that the same word in
British English and American English can
• Have students read the introductory text.
have different meanings. (The photo will
Point out that they have used general
also help students understand numbers 4
knowledge, personal knowledge, and c.
and 5 in Practice 9.) Point out that students
personal experience in the academic , In n tio
will continue focusing on differences in the
paragraphs that they have written so far. a c u d
exercises that immediately follow.
Explain that students will do research for E n
their next writing assignment. o rs
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud. a e
Have students complete the task, using P y b 4
words in the first three columns of the chart 1 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 42
Conducting an Interview (page 191)
Step 2: Go over the instructions. If students
need review of point-by-point and block
• Have students close their books. Then
methods of organization or outlining, refer
have them list ways to do research / them to pages 174–175.
research sources (e.g., books, newspapers,
magazines, library databases, interviews,
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have
surveys) that they are familiar with. Write students complete the task.
the list on the board. Point out that for
Step 4: Go over the instructions for Step 4.
their next writing assignment students will
Have students review the procedures for
research their topic by doing an interview.
peer review in Appendix F (page 253).
• Have students give examples of interviews
Read the questions of the Chapter 8 Peer
(e.g., on television, on the radio, online).
Review (page 268) aloud. Have students
Write their examples on the board. If
work with a partner and use the worksheet
students have ever been interviewed or
to review each other’s drafts. If needed,
done an interview, have them describe the
have students review the correction symbols experience.
in Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have
writers revise their drafts and write draft
• Have students open their books to page 191.
two based on their partner’s feedback and
Go over the tips for good interview
their own ideas either in class or at home. questions.
• Have students review the Writer’s Self-
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
activity on page 191 aloud. Have students
Go over the Chapter 8 Writer’s Self-Check complete the task.
in Appendix F (page 269). Then have
• Have students read along as you go over the
students revise their writing further. You
information in the Conducting the Actual
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
Interview section on page 192.
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
editing before they write their final drafts.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
activity on page 193 aloud. Have students
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
complete the task. Encourage students
students write their final drafts and turn
to plan and conduct their interviews in a
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 8 timely fashion.
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
on page 61 of this Teacher’s Manual to WRITING ASSIGNMENT
evaluate students’ final drafts.
(pages 194–195)
• Tell students that they will write a
Variation: Have students submit their
comparison / contrast paragraph about
second draft to you via email or a learning
education in two different countries.
management system. If needed, explain
• Have students look at the Chapter 8 scoring
how to use word processing features to
rubric on page 61 of this manual. Give format their papers.
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 8 writing assignment and how they c. will be graded. , In n
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have tio a c u
students show you the chart of information d E n
about education in their home country o rs a
and education in the country of their e P y
interviewee. Ask students to clarify b 4 1 information as needed. 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 43
they followed for their double entry journal EXTENSION: in Chapter 7.
Students will learn about citing sources
• Tell students that they will write a personal
when they take more advanced writing
response. Then read the paragraph on page
courses. If you want your students to do
196 that begins, “A personal response
citations for interview information in their exercise . . .”
comparison / contrast paragraphs, use a
• Read the directions for the personal response
simple process. First, explain that it is
exercise aloud. Point out that students
common in academic writing to do research
must complete the first part of the personal
and include ideas that are not the writer’s.
response on the left side of their journal
Also explain that it is important to give
page and the second part on the right. Point
the source for any information that does
out the illustration on page 196. Also point
not come directly from the writer. Then
out that students will not paraphrase; they
have students use a simple in-text citation.
will explain what they learned in Chapter 8
Immediately after details that come from
about block organization and point-by-point
their interviewees, have students add
organization. They will then give and explain
information in the following way: First
their opinion about cause / effect organization
Initial. Last Name, interview, Month DD,
based on their personal experience.
YYYY. (The first initial and last name
are the first initial and last name of the
• Have students complete the personal interviewee.) response activity.
• Collect your students’ journals. Read and SELF-ASSESSMENT respond to them. (page 195)
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of P A R T I I this manual. C H A P T E R 9
EXPANSION (pages 195–196) Essay Organization
(pages 198–221)
Timed Writing (page 195)
• Go over the directions. Remind students not
CHAPTER OPENER (page 198) to skip any steps.
• Write the chapter title on the board and
• Read the prompt and have students
read it aloud. At this point, say only that
begin writing. Collect their papers after
in Chapter 9, students will do academic 30 minutes.
writing that is longer.
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
• Have students look at the photo and
It may be enough to write encouraging
describe what they see. Have students state
comments about the content of the writing.
what country the people are in and how
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
they know that. Have students describe grade.
greetings in their home country or culture.
• Demonstrate two or three facial expressions
Double-Entry Journal Writing
or gestures. Ask students to demonstrate (page 196) c.
several examples of body language. Have , In n
• Have students bring their journals to class.
students define the term body language. tio a c
On the next clean page of the journal,
Have students answer the question under u d E
have students draw a vertical line down the photo. n o rs
the middle of the page for a double entry a
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students e P
journal. Tell students that they are going to y
do so. Point out the writing assignment that b 4
follow a procedure similar to the one that 1
students will do at the end of Chapter 9. 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 44
INTRODUCTION (pages 199–201) EXTENSION:
• Have students read the introductory text.
In groups, have students make a list of
• Point out that in their writing assignments
situations in which they use informal
students will continue to write about one
language, both spoken and written (e.g.,
topic, that they will have a controlling
conversations with friends, text messaging,
idea about the topic, that they will develop
and emails to friends). Then have students
the topic with main points of support
give specific examples of the actual
and supporting details, and that they will
informal language they use. Emphasize that
write a conclusion. Emphasize length as a
informal language is generally not used in
main difference between a one-paragraph academic writing. composition and an essay.
• Point out that essays have more than one
ORGANIZATION (pages 202–215)
paragraph—they have an introductory
paragraph
, several body paragraphs, and a
• Have students look at the illustration. Point concluding paragraph.
out how the sentences in the introduction,
body, and conclusion of an academic
• Have students note how many paragraphs
paragraph expand in an essay. Point out
there are in the writing model.
how the parts of an academic paragraph
correspond to the parts of an essay.
Analyzing the Model (page 199)
• Have students read the paragraph that is
• Before students read the essay have them
below the illustration. Again point out what
look at the title. As they read, have them
kind of information is in the introduction
pay attention to the kind of information that
of an essay, what kind of information is
is in each paragraph about body language.
in the body of an essay, and what kind of
• Have students work with a partner or in a
information is in the conclusion. Point
small group to answer the questions about
out the placement and purpose of a thesis
the model. Go over the answers. statement.
• Review the terms unity and coherence.
Noticing Vocabulary (page 201)
Point out that essays must have unity and
coherence. Have students explain what they
• Read the introductory information. Have
should do to write cohesive essays (group students read the examples.
and present information logically by time,
• Write these words on the board: gestures,
causes, categories, etc.; use nouns and
transmit, and emotions. Have students
pronouns consistently; and use transition
give more informal synonyms for the three signals).
words. Point out that they should give
synonyms by using their knowledge of
Introductory Paragraphs (page 203)
English vocabulary and information they
learned when they read the writing model.
• Point out the two functions of the
introductory paragraph of an essay that are
• Read the directions for Practice 1 aloud. given at the top of page 203.
Have students complete the exercise. Go over the answers.
• Point out that there are different kinds
of introductory paragraphs but that
students will write a funnel introduction c.
in Chapter 9. Have students look at the , In n tio
illustration of a funnel on page 204. Have a c u d
students explain the purpose of an actual, E n physical funnel. o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 45
• Point out that a funnel introduction starts
• Have students explain what kind of
with a general statement to get the reader’s
information is in the topic sentence of
attention and ends with a thesis statement
each body paragraph. Then have them
that presents the topic of the essay and the
explain what kind of information is in
controlling idea / what the writer wants
the remaining sentences of each body
to say about the topic. Point out that
paragraph. Have students review the
the sentences between the first general
information at the top of page 205 for
statement and the thesis statement give homework.
important background information and help
• Read the directions for Practice 3 aloud.
the reader focus on the topic of the essay.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
Emphasize that the introductory paragraph over the answers
should gradually lead the reader to the thesis statement.
Concluding Paragraphs (page 206)
• Emphasize the importance of a good
• Have students reread the last paragraph
thesis statement. Point out that the thesis
of the writing model. Point out that the
statement (1) presents the topic and what
writer does three things: (1) starts with a
the writer wants to say about the topic;
transition signal, (2) restates what she
(2) may list subtopics (e.g., in the writing
wants to say about the topic, and (3) gives a
model, the division of body language into
final comment. Point out the three purposes
facial expressions, body gestures, and
of concluding paragraphs that are listed
physical contact); and (3) may mention
at the top of page 206. Point out that for
a method of organization (e.g., causes,
number two, the writer can repeat the
effects, similarities, differences).
thesis statement in different words and/or
• Again using the illustration on page 204,
summarize the main points of an essay.
show how the introductory paragraph
Also point out that concluding paragraphs
in the writing model gradually moves
must not have new information that has
from the first general statement to the
not already been presented in an essay.
thesis statement. (See the bulleted list on
Have students review the information about page 203.)
concluding paragraphs that is on page 206
• Point out the Writing Tip on page 203. for homework.
Emphasize that the first sentence in the
• Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
introductory paragraph should not be
Have students complete the exercise. Go
too general or too far removed from the over the answers.
thesis statement. Have students read the
information about introductory paragraphs
Variation: Have students explain what is
that is on pages 203–204 for homework.
wrong with the concluding paragraph(s)
• Read the directions for Practice 2 aloud.
that they did not select for each essay.
Have students complete the exercise. Go
over the answers. Have a student read each
Transitions between Paragraphs
of the completed introductory paragraphs (page 209)
aloud. Point out how the focus of the
• Have students read the introductory text.
paragraphs moves from wide to narrow.
• For a quick review of transition signals,
have students look at the chart on page
Body Paragraphs (page 205)
209. Have students read the examples c. , In
• Have students turn to the writing model on
for meaning and note punctuation. Also n tio a
pages 199–200. Have students underline the
point out the information about besides, in c u d
thesis statement. Then have students reread
addition, and in addition to that is at the E n o
the three body paragraphs and note the bottom of page 209. rs a e
topic sentences that they underlined when P y b
they did the Questions about the Model 4 1 0 exercise. 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 46
• Have students look at the chart at the top
of page 210, reading the examples for EXTENSION:
meaning and noting punctuation. Also point
Point out the parallel structure at each level
out the Writing Tip. (Note: Refer students
of the outline of the model paragraph (e.g.,
to Appendix B [pages 243–245] for
all topic sentences are complete sentences;
sentence types and connecting words and
all main points are complete sentences; all
Appendix C [pages 246–247] for transition
details are phrases). Point out that this type signals.)
of balance is common in formal academic
• Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud. outlines.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the
answers, discussing alternative answers. Do
THE WRITING PROCESS (pages 215–218) the same for Practice 6.
• Have students read the introductory
Variation: In Practice 5, have students
information about the steps in the writing
circle the transition signal that connects the process that is on page 215.
conclusion to the rest of the essay.
Step 1: Remind students that they can
brainstorm / gather ideas for their writing
Essay Outlining (page 213)
assignments in many ways, such as listing,
freewriting, clustering, etc. Have students
• Have students read the introductory text
read Step 1 and look at the “Kinds of Lies”
and look at the outline. Point out the use listing activity.
of Roman numerals, capital letters, Arabic
numbers, and lowercase letters. Also point
Step 2: Have students review the next
out how the outline is indented each time it
step in the writing process by reading
moves from a Roman numeral to a capital
Step 2. Point out how the chart organizes
letter to an Arabic numeral to a lowercase
the information from the “Kinds of Lies” letter.
listing activity. Point out that in the chart,
the writer deleted some of the information
• Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
in the original list and added other
Have students complete the exercise in information.
steps. First, have students reread the writing
model. Next, have students look at the
• Remind students of the outlining activity
illustration on page 213 again, and point out
they did in Practice 7, and have them look
that they will follow this style when they
at the outline for “Kinds of Lies” on pages
outline the writing model. Have students 216–217.
read the five points about outlines that are
• Read the directions for Practice 8 aloud.
at the bottom of page 213. Finally, have
Have students complete the exercise. Go
students reread the directions for Practice 7 over the answers. and complete their outlines.
Variation: Have students add the EXTENSION:
conclusion of the writing model to their
In groups, have students review Step 1 and
outlines. Point out that it is missing from
Step 2 of the writing process and prepare an
pages 214–215 due to limited space.
outline for “Types of Communication.” c.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out! , In n tio
activity aloud. Point out that students will a c u d
write about the kinds of problems they have E n o
had with nonverbal communication for their rs a e
Chapter 9 Writing Assignment. Then have P y students complete the task. b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 47
Variation: Have students work on the
review each other’s drafts. If needed, have
Try It Out! activity on more than one day.
students review the correction symbols in
Writers often get ideas for their essays over
Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have writers
time, not all at once. For example, some
revise their drafts and write draft two based
students may get ideas while traveling to
on their partner’s feedback and their own
or from school, while eating dinner, or
ideas either in class or at home.
while talking to friends outside of class.
• Have students review the Writer’s Self-
Have students work together in class to
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
do the activity in number 1. Then have
Go over the Chapter 9 Writer’s Self-Check
students add to their lists for homework and
in Appendix F (page 271). Then have
continue on to the organizing and outlining
students revise their writing further. You
activities during the next class meeting.
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their
Applying Vocabulary (page 218)
editing before they write their final drafts.
• Have students review what they learned
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
about formal and informal vocabulary on
students write their final drafts and turn page 201.
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 9
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
• Read the directions for Practice 9 aloud.
on page 62 of this Teacher’s Manual to
Point out that students will replace two
evaluate students’ final drafts.
words or phrases in each item. Have
students complete the activity. Go over the
Variation: Have students submit their answers.
second draft to you via email or a learning
management system. If needed, explain
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 219–220)
how to use word processing features to format their papers.
• Tell students that they will write an essay
about the kinds of problems that they have
had with nonverbal communication in
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 220) English.
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
• Have students look at the Chapter 9 scoring
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
rubric on page 62 of this manual. Give this manual.
students a paper copy of the rubric, display
it on a screen in your classroom, and/or
EXPANSION (page 221)
put it on your course website. Go over the
rubric with students so that they understand
Timed Writing (page 221)
what they are required to do for their
Chapter 9 writing assignment and how they
• Go over the directions. Remind students not will be graded. to skip any steps.
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have
• Point out the 50-minute time limit and the students complete the task.
new suggested times for completion of each
step in the timed writing process.
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have students complete the task.
• Read the prompt and have students
begin writing. Collect their papers after
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have 50 minutes. students complete the task. c. , In
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers. n
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have tio a
It may be enough to write encouraging c u
students review the procedures for peer d
comments about the content of the writing. E n
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the o
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a rs a
questions of the Chapter 9 Peer Review e grade. P y
(page 270) aloud. Have students work b 4 1
with a partner and use the worksheet to 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 48
Summary Writing (page 221)
margin to the left of the writing model and
note the structure / the organization of the
• Read the three key points for summary essay. writing aloud.
• Have students reread the writing model on
Analyzing the Model (page 223)
pages 199–200 and write a summary of it.
• Before students read the model, have them
look at the title and predict the writer’s EXTENSION:
opinion about homeschooling. As they read,
In groups, have students review strategies
have students pay attention to the writer’s
for restating information by making a list
opinion and the reasons and details she
of tips (e.g., use synonyms or vary sentence
gives in support of her opinion.
structure). Have students share their lists.
• Have students work with a partner or in a Make suggestions as needed.
small group to answer the questions about
the model. Go over the answers. C H A P T E R 1 0
Variation: Have a short discussion about
question 3 to remind students that body Opinion Essays
paragraphs sometimes, but not always, have a concluding sentence.
(pages 222–239) CHAPTER OPENER
Noticing Vocabulary (page 225) (page 222)
• Write the chapter title on the board and read
• Read the introductory information aloud.
it aloud. Explain that opinion essays are
Have students read the examples. (Note:
usually about controversial topics, that is,
Encourage students to notice words that
topics that people disagree about.
commonly appear together in the materials
that they read. Noticing is a good way for
• Have students look at the photo and
students to learn collocations.)
describe what they see. Have students
explain where the people are, what they are
• Read the directions for Practice 1, Part A
doing, and what their relationship is.
aloud. Point out that the information in
parentheses indicates where students will
• If students have not already discussed it,
find the collocations in the writing model.
point out that the woman on the right is
Have students complete the exercise. Write
the mother of the two children and that she the answers on the board.
is educating her children at home. Give
students the term homeschooling. (Give just
• Read the directions for Practice 1, Part B
the term, not a lot of details.) Have students
aloud. Have student complete the exercise.
answer the question under the photo. Then go over the answers.
• Read the objectives aloud, or have students EXTENSION:
do so. Point out the writing assignment that
students will do at the end of Chapter 10.
Point out that students can find collocations
in dictionaries such as the Longman INTRODUCTION
Dictionary of American English. Also point
(pages 223–225)
out that most English-English dictionaries
• Have students read the introductory text.
have usage notes that can give information c.
Again point out that opinion essays are , In
on how English words are used together. n
usually about controversial topics. tio a
Use an example of a word like sleep in c u d
• Remind students that the essays they wrote
the Longman Dictionary of American E n
in Chapter 9 had multiple paragraphs: o
English, which has both usage notes and rs a e
an introductory paragraph, several body
collocations that provide useful information P y
paragraphs, and a concluding paragraph. b on word patterns. 4 1 0
Have students look at the labels in the 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 49
ORGANIZATION (pages 226–230)
out that each topic sentence states a reason
that explains the writer’s opinion.
• Have students read the introductory text.
• Read the directions for Practice 4 aloud.
Before they give reasons, have each
Introductory Paragraphs in
pair discuss both sides of the issues in
Opinion Essays (page 226)
Practice 3. Have students complete the
• Remind students that the introductory
exercise. Then go over the answers.
paragraph of an essay has general
statements / background information that
Concluding Paragraphs in Opinion lead to a thesis statement.
Essays (page 230)
• Remind students that opinion essays are
• Have students read the introductory
about controversial issues, that is, topics
information and example. Point out that
that people disagree about. Point out that
the concluding paragraph summarizes the
the background information in opinion
reasons / main points about controlling essays explains the issue.
gangs that are in the example for body
• Have students read the example. Point
paragraphs at the bottom of page 228.
out that the general statements present
the problems that teenage gangs create EXTENSION:
and several solutions to control teenage
Have students read the concluding paragraph
gangs. The general statements then narrow
of the model paragraph on pages 223–224
to one solution—curfew laws—and an
explanation of curfew laws. Point out that
and explain the kind of information that is
the introductory paragraph ends with a
included in the concluding paragraph. thesis statement.
• Point out that the thesis statement for this
• Read the directions for the Try It Out!
introductory paragraph presents the opinion
activity aloud. With a partner, have students
of police departments about gangs and the
complete the exercise. Have students hand
writer’s opinion. Emphasize that the writer in their papers.
disagrees with the police. Have students
circle the word but, which signals the
DEVELOPING SUPPORTING DETAILS
opposing opinion. Have students review the
(pages 230–235)
information about introductory paragraphs in opinion essays at home.
• Remind students that they have been using
examples regularly as supporting details
• Read the directions for Practice 2, Parts A
in their writing. Explain that they will now
and B aloud. Have students complete the
learn about using quotations and statistics
tasks. Then go over the answers. Do the same as supporting details.
for Practice 3 and the Try It Out! activity.
• Explain the information about doing
Variation: If students would like to work
research and citing sources that is on
on another controversial topic related to
page 230. (If you want students to cite
education, allow them to do so. If students
sources for their quotations and statistics
would like to change their topic, allow them
for their Chapter 10 opinion essays, see
to do so before they write the introductory
the Extension activity on page 52 of this paragraph. manual.) c. , In n
Body Paragraphs in Opinion
Quotations (page 230) tio a c u Essays d (page 228)
• Have students read the introductory E n o
• Have students read the introductory
information and the example. Point out that rs a e
information. Then go over the example
the quotations are supporting details in a P y b
thesis statement and topic sentences. Point
body paragraph that explains why curfews 4 1 0 are unfair. 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 50
• Read the rules in the chart on page 231
• If students have ever completed a survey or
aloud. Have students read the examples for
conducted a survey, have them describe the
each of the rules, paying attention to the experience.
bold and highlighted information. Have
students review the information about
Variation: Do an online search to find an quotations for homework.
image of a survey. Display the image on a screen in your classroom.
• Read the directions for Practice 5 aloud.
Have students complete the exercise. Have EXTENSION:
students refer to the chart on page 231 as needed. Go over the answers.
Find a student survey on your campus. Have
students fill out the survey and turn it in to Statistics
the group that is conducting the survey. (page 232)
• Explain that statistics are numbers, that
is, costs, amounts, percentages, and so on.
• Explain that students will prepare and
Point out that statistics, like quotations, are
conduct a survey to get information for
an excellent kind of supporting detail and
their Chapter 10 writing assignment.
are introduced by reporting phrases.
• Read the paragraph that begins, “Think
• Have students read the introductory text and
of questions.... ” Include the examples of
example. Point out the reporting phrases
questions for a survey about the effect of video
and the numbers. Also point out that the
games on children’s education. Point out that
example explains what the statistics prove.
only the first question (the general opinion
question) is a yes-no question; the remaining
• Read the directions for Practice 6 aloud.
questions are wh- information questions. Have
Have students complete the exercise. Go
students review the information about surveys
over the answers. Do the same for the Try It on page 236 for homework.
Out! activity. Point out the Writing Tip.
• Read the directions for the Try It Out! Applying Vocabulary
activity aloud. Make sure that students (page 235)
understand the purpose of their surveys—to
• Have students review what they learned
gather quotations and statistics that they can
about collocations on page 225.
use in their Chapter 10 writing assignment.
• Read the directions for Practice 7 aloud.
Have students complete the task.
Have students do the exercise. Go over the answers.
WRITING ASSIGNMENT (pages 237–238)
• Tell students that they will write an opinion
PREPARATION FOR WRITING
essay on a topic related to getting a good (page 236) education.
• Have students read the introductory
• Have students look at the Chapter 10 information.
scoring rubric on page 63 of this manual.
Give students a paper copy of the rubric,
Conducting a Survey (page 236)
display it on a screen in your classroom,
and / or put it on your course website. Go
• Explain what a survey is. Have students
over the rubric with students so that they
give examples of surveys (e.g., customer
understand what they are required to do for c.
satisfaction surveys, telemarketing phone
their Chapter 10 writing assignment and , In n
surveys, employee surveys, student course how they will be graded. tio a
evaluations). If necessary, explain the c u d
difference between a poll (short, quick,
Step 1: Go over the instructions. Have E n o
possibly one question) and a survey
students complete the task. Point out that rs a e
(usually longer and more time consuming).
students should highlight and underline P y b
reasons and supporting details that explain 4 1 0 their opinion. 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Teaching Notes 51
Step 2: Go over the instructions. Have
SELF-ASSESSMENT (page 238)
students complete the task. If necessary,
• Go over the Self-Assessment. See Options
have students review the Essay Outlining
for using the Self-Assessment on page 6 of
section in Chapter 9 (page 213). this manual.
Step 3: Go over the instructions. Have students complete the task.
EXPANSION (pages 238–239)
Step 4: Go over the instructions. Have
students review the procedures for peer
Timed Writing (page 238)
review in Appendix F (page 253). Read the
• Go over the directions. Remind students not
questions of the Chapter 10 Peer Review to skip any steps.
(page 272) aloud. Have students work
with a partner and use the worksheet to
• Read the prompt and have students
review each other’s drafts. If needed, have
begin writing. Collect their papers after
students review the correction symbols in 50 minutes.
Appendix E (pages 250–252). Have writers
• Decide how you will mark students’ papers.
revise their drafts and write draft two based
It may be enough to write encouraging
on their partner’s feedback and their own
comments about the content of the writing.
ideas either in class or at home.
It is not necessary to mark errors or give a
• Have students review the Writer’s Self- grade.
Check section of Appendix F (page 253).
Go over the Chapter 10 Writer’s Self-Check Writing an Opinion for
in Appendix F (page 273). Then have
Publication (page 239)
students revise their writing further. You
may decide to collect students’ first drafts
• Have students read the introductory
and Writer’s Self-Checks to assess their information and the model.
editing before they write their final drafts.
• Read the directions under the model aloud.
Step 5: Go over the directions. Have
Have students complete the assignment. If
students write their final drafts and turn
possible, have students submit their opinion
them in. If you wish, use the Chapter 10
pieces to your school’s newspaper.
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric
Variation: If your course has a website or
on page 63 of this Teacher’s Manual to
a blog, post your students’ opinion pieces
evaluate students’ final drafts. there.
Variation: Have students submit their
second draft to you via email or a learning EXTENSION:
management system. If needed, explain
If you publish your students’ opinion
how to use word processing features to
pieces on a discussion board (on your class format their papers.
website) or a blog, have students comment
on each other’s posts. Remind students
that they should be respectful in their EXTENSION:
comments, just as they are when they do
If you want your students to cite sources peer review.
in their opinion essays, have them use a
simple in-text citation. Immediately after c.
quotations or statistics that come from their , In n tio
surveys, have students add information a c u
in the following way: First Initial. Last d E n
Name, survey, Month DD, YYYY. (The o rs a
first initial and last name are the first initial e P y
and last name of the student who wrote and b 4 1 conducted the survey.) 0 2 © Lon
gman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Te aching Notes 52 WRITING ASSIGNMENT SCORING RUBRICS 53 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 1: ACADEMIC PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about a person who has 15 made a difference. 2.
. . . begins with a sentence that names a person who 10 has made a difference. 3.
. . . has two or more ways that the person has made a 20 difference. 4.
. . . has sentences in logical order. 10 5.
. . . uses correct formatting. 15 6.
. . . has at least one subject and one verb in every 10 sentence. 7.
. . . uses nouns and verbs correctly. 5 8.
. . . has subject-verb agreement. 5 . 9.
. . . has a period after every sentence. 5 d itte rm e p is e s 10.
. . . follows capitalization rules. 5 u m o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longman Acad e
mic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Sc oring Rubrics 54 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 2: NARRATIVE PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It tells a story about a 15 memorable experience. 2.
. . . begins with a sentence that tells the experience. 10 3.
. . . has details that match the purpose of the 20 paragraph. 4.
. . . has events in logical time order. 20 5.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 6.
. . . uses both simple and compound sentences 10 correctly. 7.
. . . uses and, but, or, and so correctly. 5 8. . . . uses commas correctly. 5 . 9.
. . . has a period, question mark, or exclamation mark 5 d itte after every sentence. rm e p is e s 10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling. 5 u m o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 55 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 3: BASIC PARAGRAPH STRUCTURE
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about a hobby or sport. 15 2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that states the topic 10
and controlling idea. The topic sentence is not too general and not too specific. 3.
. . . has main points that support the topic sentence. 20 4. . . . has clear examples. 10 5.
. . . has a conclusion that restates the controlling idea 10
or summarizes the main points. It may also give a
final suggestion or prediction. 6.
. . . uses signal words correctly to introduce the main 10
points, the examples, and the conclusion. 7.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 8.
. . . uses both simple and compound sentences 10 correctly. . 9.
. . . uses adjectives and adverbs correctly. 5 d itte rm e p is e s 10.
. . . uses correct punctuation, capitalization, and 5 u m spelling. o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longman Acad e
mic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Sc oring Rubrics 56 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 4: LOGICAL DIVISION OF IDEAS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about shopping habits. 15 2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that clearly shows 10
the logical division of ideas (the main points). 3.
. . . presents each main point, plus supporting details 20
such as explanations, examples, and statistics. 4.
. . . has unity. All of the sentences in the body 10 support the topic sentence. 5.
. . . has coherence. The sentences are in logical 10
order. There are enough but not too many transition
signals. Nouns and pronouns are consistent. 6.
. . . ends with a concluding sentence that summarizes 10 the main points. 7.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 8.
. . . does not have run-on sentences or comma 10 splices. . 9.
. . . uses periods, question marks, exclamation marks, 5 d itte and commas correctly. rm e p is e s 10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling. 5 u m o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 57 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 5: PROCESS PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is a process paragraph 15 about self-improvement. 2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that names the topic 10
and uses words such as steps, procedure, process. 3.
. . . has all of the necessary steps in time order, with 20 time order signals. 4.
. . . has enough details for the audience to 10
understand the steps in the process. 5.
. . . has unity. All of the sentences in the body 10 support the topic sentence. 6.
. . . has a concluding sentence that gives the last step 10
in the process or states the purpose of the process. 7.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 8.
. . . uses simple, compound, and complex sentences 10 correctly. . 9.
. . . uses punctuation, especially commas in complex 5 d itte sentences, correctly. rm e p is e s 10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling. 5 u m o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longman Acad e
mic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Sc oring Rubrics 58 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 6: DEFINITION PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It defines a word, concept, or 15 custom. 2.
. . . begins with a good definition topic sentence. It 10
includes the word or thing to be defined, a category
or group, and special characteristics. 3.
. . . has enough who, what, where, when, how, why 20 details. 4.
. . . has unity and coherence. 10 5.
. . . has a good concluding statement that tells why 10
the topic is interesting or important. 6.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 7.
. . . has good description with appositives and 10 adjective clauses. 8.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex 10 sentences correctly. . 9.
. . . uses punctuation correctly, especially commas 5 d itte
with appositives and adjective clauses. rm e p is e s 10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling. 5 u m o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 59 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 7: CAUSE / EFFECT PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is a cause / effect paragraph 15 about a social issue. 2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that states the topic 10
and whether the paragraph will focus on causes or effect. 3.
. . . presents causes or effects in logical order. 20 4.
. . . has details that give examples and explain the 10 causes or effects clearly. 5.
. . . has a concluding sentence that restates the 10
controlling idea about the topic or summarizes the main causes or effects. 6.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly. 10 8.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex 10 sentences correctly. . 9.
. . . uses punctuation correctly. 5 d itte rm e p is e s 10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling. 5 u m o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longman Acad e
mic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Sc oring Rubrics 60 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 8: COMPARISON / CONTRAST PARAGRAPHS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE PARAGRAPH . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It compares or contrasts 15
education in two different countries and includes interview information. 2.
. . . begins with a topic sentence that states the topic 10
and whether the paragraph will focus on similarities, differences, or both. 3.
. . . has either block or point-by-point organization. 10 4.
. . . has balanced comparison / contrast, with the 20
same points, in the same order, for education in each of the two countries. 5.
. . . has a concluding sentence that restates the 10
topic sentence or summarizes the similarities and /
or differences. There may also be a final opinion or recommendation. 6.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly. 10 8.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex 10 sentences correctly. . d itte 9.
. . . uses punctuation correctly. 5 rm e p is e s u m 10.
. . . uses correct capitalization and spelling. 5 o ro s s la r c fo n TOTAL 100 tio a lic p u . D Comments: c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 61 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 9: ESSAY ORGANIZATION
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE ESSAY . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is about kinds of problems 15
with nonverbal communication in English. 2.
. . . has a funnel introduction that moves from 10
general to more specific information about the topic. 3.
. . . has a thesis statement in the last sentence of the 10
introduction that states the topic and what the writer wants to say about the topic. 4.
. . . has body paragraphs that support the thesis 20
statement. Each body paragraph describes one kind
of problem with nonverbal communication. 5.
. . . has unity. Each body paragraph has a topic 10
sentence and only those examples, statistics, facts,
etc. that are related to the topic sentence. 6.
. . . has a conclusion that restates the thesis and / or 10
summarizes the main points, and gives the writer’s
final opinion, recommendation, prediction, etc. about the topic. 7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly. 5 8.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 . d itte 9.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex 10 rm e sentences correctly. p is e s u m 10.
. . . uses punctuation, capitalization, and spelling 5 o ro s correctly. s la r c fo n TOTAL 100 tio a lic p u . D Comments: c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longman Acad e
mic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Sc oring Rubrics 62 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 10: OPINION ESSAYS
Writing Assignment Scoring Rubric THE ESSAY . . . YOUR MAXIMUM SCORE SCORE 1.
. . . fits the assignment. It is an opinion essay about 15 getting a good education. 2.
. . . has an introduction that clearly explains the 10 problem or issue. 3.
. . . has a thesis statement in the last sentence of the 10
introduction that presents the opposing view and then the writer’s opinion. 4.
. . . has body paragraphs with reasons that support 20
the writer’s opinion, plus details that include
examples, statistics, and/or quotations. 5.
. . . has unity. Each body paragraph has a topic 10
sentence and only those examples, statistics,
quotations, etc. that are related to the topic sentence. 6.
. . . has a powerful conclusion that restates the thesis 10
and/or summarizes the main points and may have a call for action. 7.
. . . uses transition signals correctly. 5 8.
. . . uses correct formatting. 5 . 9.
. . . uses a variety of simple, compound, and complex 10 d itte sentences correctly. rm e p is e s 10.
. . . uses punctuation, capitalization, and spelling 5 u m
correctly, especially punctuation for quotations. o ro s s la r c TOTAL 100 fo n tio a lic p u Comments: . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Writing Assignment Scoring Rubrics 63 CHAPTER QUIZZES 64 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 1 QUIZ
A. Find the errors in capitalization. Make corrections.
1. there was a terrible earthquake in haiti on tuesday, january 12, 2010.
2. earthquake victims received help from famous people such as bill clinton.
3. there was also a lot of support from hollywood actors such as sean penn.
4. the united nations is an international organization with headquarters in new york city.
5. the un can be seen in one of my favorite movies, north by northwest.
6. next semester, i will take english, math, and biology 101.
7. the university that i attend is located in eastern canada.
8. many of the students from africa speak french with the local residents.
B. Use what you know about subject-verb patterns and prepositional phrases in
sentences. Circle the correct noun or verb form.
1. Volunteers (realization / realize) the importance of helping others.
2. I read about the (development / develop) of a volunteer music program.
3. Members of the Chicago Symphony Orchestra regularly (participation / participate) in the program.
4. The musicians (entertainment / entertain) people in schools and even prisons.
5. The (beauty / beautify) of music can be part of everyone’s life.
6. An (organizer / organize) of the volunteer program is cellist Yo-Yo Ma. . d itte rm e
C. Find errors in noun and verb forms, subject-verb agreement, fragments, and p is
capitalization. Make corrections. e s u m o
1. I was born on september 21, 1994 in the city of San Juan, Puerto Rico. ro s s la r c
2. My father a performer with the San Juan Symphony. is a violinist. fo n tio a lic
3. He often travel with the orchestra to Europe and asia. p u . D c
4. I currently a student at the Peabody Conservatory of the Johns Hopkins University in , In n tio a c baltimore. u d E n o rs
5. The educate at this school is excellent. All of the professors is wonderful. a e P y b
6. My father and mother will come to my graduate next year. 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 65 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 2 QUIZ
A. Read the sentences. Number them to create a time-order narrative. Then check ()
the box that gives the writer’s purpose.
By lunchtime, I had a long shopping list.
It was about 25% less money than I expected.
At the end of the workday, I opened the envelope and took out my paycheck.
In short, I learned a lesson that everyone should know—the government gets its tax
money first, and workers get what remains.
My first payday at my first job was very surprising.
I couldn’t believe it when I looked at the amount of the check.
Early that morning, I started thinking about all the things I could buy.
What is the writer’s purpose?  to inform  to persuade  to entertain
B. Complete the narrative paragraph. Use the words from the box. Capitalize and
punctuate them correctly. Use each word once. after our last class at first so and finally then
My classmates and I had an incredible experience as we were leaving school yesterday. we got on the elevator. 1. 2.
we were on the elevator alone. the doors opened on the 3. 8th floor
a serious looking man in a business suit got 4.
on. It was the president of the university! There were several seconds of total silence. . d itte
the president started talking. He knew we were nervous rm e 5. p is e
he asked us a few questions about our classes. When the s u 6. m o ro
elevator doors opened on the first floor, we felt like we had a new “friend.” s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0
(continued on next page) 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 66 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 2 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
C. Read the sentences. Add commas as needed.
1. I love any celebration that has crowds music and fireworks.
2. I go to the New Year’s Eve celebration in my hometown every year.
3. Last year it was raining but the celebration was still fantastic.
4. First there was music and dancing in the street.
5. There was jazz and rock music so the atmosphere was lively.
6. At midnight the fireworks started and everyone in the crowd cheered.
7. After the fireworks my friends and I were hungry so we went to a restaurant. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 67 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 3 QUIZ
A. Check () the good topic sentences. What is wrong with the others? Write TS (too
specific) or TG (too general).
1. Studying vocabulary is part of learning a new language.
2. Alphabet and telephone are English words with Greek origins.
3. Electronic dictionaries have several advantages over paper dictionaries.
4. In addition to word definitions, English dictionaries have information about grammar and pronunciation.
5. There are fast food restaurants in countries around the world.
6. A typical meal at a fast food restaurant has more than 700 calories.
7. Dairy Queen and Pizza Hut are popular fast food restaurants.
8. Americans continue to eat at fast food restaurants for three reasons.
B. Add the main points from the box under the correct topic sentence.
The cost of airplane tickets gets higher
Seats are generally small and close every year.
Travelers are on international flights for
Many airlines no longer serve free long periods of time.
meals, so passengers must pay for food.
More and more airlines require passengers
Time zone changes cause problems.
to pay an extra fee to check their luggage.
Topic Sentence: Air travel is becoming increasingly expensive. Main Points: .
Topic Sentence: International air travel is often uncomfortable. d itte rm Main Points: e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0
(continued on next page) 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 68 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 3 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
C. Find errors in signal words, and in adjective and adverb forms. Do not change
punctuation. Make corrections.
It takes a lot to be a marathon runner. To begin with, marathoners need great physical
and mental strength to complete their 26.2-mile races successful. Next, running a marathon
requires great commitment and discipline. Amateur runners active begin their long hours
of training months before a race. They run three to four days a week. They also work out
in the gym and pay close attention to parts of their daily routine for example their diet
and sleep schedule. In addition, marathoners need emotional support. Such as, they find a
running partner or join a group of runners to help them through the long hours of training.
On the day of the race, marathoners feel energized when they hear the loudly cheers
of their family and friends. It is clearly that there are many requirements for marathon success. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 69 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 4 QUIZ
A. Complete the paragraph with transition signals from the box. Capitalize and
punctuate them correctly. Use each signal once.
a second kind of shopper finally however all in all first of all such as
There are three types of shoppers that you will commonly see in shopping malls.
there is the recreational shopper. These individuals 1.
spend a lot of time at the mall. they make few 2.
purchases. They spend most of their time looking at the merchandise, looking at
other shoppers, and looking for ways to have fun. 3.
is the power shopper. Power shoppers enter the mall empty handed but leave with bags full of items
shoes, jewelry, and cosmetics. 4.
shoppers in the in-and-out category do just what their 5.
name suggests. They go in the mall, buy what they need, and leave as quickly as possible.
the different kinds of shoppers add to the atmosphere of 6. malls. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0
(continued on next page) 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 70 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 4 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
B. Read each sentence. Write if there is a run-on or comma splice error. Then correct
each sentence that you marked. There may be more than one possible correction.
1. Emails are fast and easy, so they have replaced letters for many people.
2. Text messages are popular social networking sites are another common way of communicating.
3. Americans used to visit the post office regularly. However, a trip to the post office is rare these days.
4. Some people pay their credit card bills by mail, others pay online.
5. The post office has mailing supplies you can buy envelopes and boxes, for example.
6. The postal worker weighs your package, then you pay the shipping cost.
7. I want to return a pair of pants that I bought online, therefore, I need to go to the post office.
8. The post office has beautiful stamps. I plan to get some to add to my stamp collection.
C. Find errors in unity, coherence, pronoun consistency, and noun consistency. Make corrections.
An animal living in a modern zoo enjoys several advantages over an animal in the wild. . d itte
The first advantage is that a zoo animal is separated from their natural enemies. Many zoos rm e p is
have free admission. Another advantage is that zoo employees feed the animal regularly. e s u m o
As a result, they will never have to hunt for food or suffer in times when food is hard to ro s s la r c
find. The animal is protected, so it lives without risk of being attacked. A third advantage fo n tio a
of living in zoos is that veterinarians give the animals regular checkups and any special lic p u . D c
medical care it needs. Opponents of zoos feel that animals should live in their natural , In n tio a c
environment. In short, zoos have a number of benefits. u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 71 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 5 QUIZ
A. Read the sentences. Number them in time order. Then check () the box that gives
the writer’s audience.
First, get an application form from the Office of Financial Aid in Room 232 of the Administration Building.
Next, get a letter of recommendation from one of your instructors.
If you complete the application process and do well in your classes this year, you
have an excellent chance of receiving a scholarship.
After you complete the application form, write a personal statement that explains
why you should receive scholarship funds.
Finally, turn in the application form and the letters before the March 1 deadline.
Second, fill the application out completely and accurately.
To apply for a scholarship for next year, complete these steps.
Who is the audience for the paragraph?  students  parents of students
B. Combine the clauses and the subordinators in parentheses to make complex
sentences. Do not change the order of the clauses. Use correct capitalization and punctuation.
1. (when) Students get home from school. They want a quick and easy meal.
2. (if) You look in your refrigerator. You should find everything you need.
3. (after) You break two fresh eggs into a bowl. Mix in salt, pepper, and three tablespoons of milk.
4. (so that) Add fresh vegetables to the mixture. You can increase the nutritional value of . your eggs. d itte rm e p is
5. (as) The eggs cook. You should push them around gently with a fork. e s u m o ro s s
6. (because) You will want to make scrambled eggs often. They are delicious and nutritious. la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0
(continued on next page) 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 72 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 5 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
C. Find errors in time-order signals, dependent clauses, capitalization, and
punctuation. Make corrections.
Follow this simple process. So that you can improve your English vocabulary. First,
keep a small notebook in your pocket, purse, or backpack. You can also use a digital
tablet or smart phone if you have one. You simply need a place to write useful words and
phrases. Second pay attention to vocabulary. However, don’t write a word or phrase in your
notebook, until you hear it at least three times. After you encounter the vocabulary item
several times. You will know it is important. Next add information to your notebook when
you go home each night. Write details that you remember. If you are uncertain about the
spelling or meaning of the vocabulary use your dictionary. Finally, review the contents of
your vocabulary notebook at the end of each week because it will help you remember the new vocabulary. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 73 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 6 QUIZ
A. Check () the good topic sentences for definition paragraphs. What is wrong with
the others? Write NCat (no category) or NChar (No characteristics).
1. IMAX is a movie projection system.
2. A meteorologist is a scientist who studies the weather.
3. Presbyopia is a vision problem that keeps older people from focusing on what is close to them.
4. A condiment adds to the flavor of sandwiches and other food.
5. The equator is an imaginary line that circles the center of the earth.
6. A phoneme is the part of language that is the smallest unit of sound.
B. Circle the best relative pronoun for each adjective clause.
1. Impressionism, (which / that / who) became popular in the 19th century, was first developed in France.
2. Impressionism was developed by artists (who / whom / which) focused on light and color in their work.
3. Claude Monet, (who / that / which) was a leader of the Impressionist movement,
painted scenes from the French countryside.
4. Many artists paint scenes from the areas (that / which / where) they live.
5. Most paintings (that / who / when) you see in museums are worth millions of dollars.
6. I visited the Louvre in 2010, (which / where / when) I traveled to Paris.
7. I enjoyed the art history course (which / that / where) I took last year. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0
(continued on next page) 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 74 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 6 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
C. Find errors in appositives and adjective clauses. Add punctuation or change one
word to correct each error.
Walter Gropius, a German-born architect, designed simple “glass box” buildings that
they changed the look of cities worldwide. He was particularly influential from 1919
to 1932, which he was the director at the Bauhaus a German school of design. At the
Bauhaus, Gropius was a leader of the International Style, that helped reshape architecture.
In contrast to the ornately decorated stone structures that was popular in earlier times,
Gropius created steel and glass buildings that had straight lines and no decoration. He
made another major contribution to the building industry by making designs that builders
could mass-produce them. Gropius was also known for his belief in the value of teamwork.
In sum, Gropius and his followers transformed cities from Toronto to Tokyo, which their
influence can still be seen today. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 75 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 7 QUIZ
A. Students often do not get enough sleep. Identify the causes and effects for their lack
of sleep. Write C next to the four causes. Write E next to the four effects.
1. Students have part-time jobs after school.
2. Students have trouble paying attention in class.
3. Students have problems with short-term and long-term memory.
4. Students go out with their friends and come home late.
5. Students get sick easily.
6. Students have a lot of assignments to do.
7. Students eat more and gain weight.
8. Students spend hours watching television and playing video games.
B. Combine the clauses and the transition signals in parentheses to make complex
sentences. Do not change the order of the clauses. Use correct capitalization and punctuation.
1. (therefore) Most soft drinks contain caffeine. We should limit the number of soft drinks we have each day.
2. (because) Soft drinks are also a problem. They contain sugar or other sweeteners.
3. (so) I am trying to lose weight. I am eating smaller amounts of food at each meal.
4. (since) A small green salad has fewer calories than a sandwich and potato chips. I eat a salad for lunch every day.
5. (because of) There are health concerns. Shoppers want to buy organic foods, which are . d
produced without the use of human-made chemicals. itte rm e p is e
6. (consequently) Organic farming is time consuming and expensive. Shoppers pay a high s u m
price for organic fruits and vegetables. o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0
(continued on next page) 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 76 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 7 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
C. Find errors in transition signals, fragments, run-ons, and comma splices. Add,
delete, or move one word to make corrections. Do not change capitalization or
punctuation. Make corrections.

1. Public transportation is important because of it allows residents and visitors to move easily around the city.
2. Parking fees are high in the downtown area, because more commuters have started
taking public transportation instead of driving to work.
3. As a result overcrowded trains, it is difficult to get a seat during rush hour.
4. Commuters are angry and upset, Mayor Lee is requesting increases in ticket prices on buses and subway trains.
5. Consequently, Mayor Lee says that our buses and trains require costly repairs. City
Transit System fare increases are necessary in his opinion.
6. Since Mayor Lee has powerful supporters in city government, will almost certainly get
the fare increases that he wants. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 77 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 8 QUIZ
A. Write T if an item is true. Write F if it is false.
1. A comparison / contrast paragraph must focus on either similarities or differences.
2. When you compare two things, you analyze their similarities.
3. The point-by-point method of organization is better than the block method of organization.
4. It is important to have the same points of support, in the same order, in a
comparison / contrast paragraph.
5. Likewise is a transition signal that shows differences.
6. A writer can give an opinion or a recommendation in the conclusion of a
comparison / contrast paragraph.
7. The topic sentence of a comparison / contrast paragraph should name the topic
and indicate the controlling idea.
8. The word equally is a transition signal that shows similarities.
B. Combine the clauses and the transition signals in parentheses to make complex
sentences. Do not change the order of the clauses. Use correct capitalization and punctuation.
1. (although) I have strong computer skills. I do not like taking online classes.
2. (both. . . and) Online instruction is offered at this university. Face-to-face classes are offered at this university.
3. (not only. . . but also) Students in online courses complete reading assignments. Students
in online courses participate in group discussions.
4. (but) In a classroom, I can get answers to my questions immediately. I have to wait up to a . d
day to get email answers from my online professor. itte rm e p is e s
5. (similarly) Students take exams in traditional face-to-face classes. There are tests in online u m o courses. ro s s la r c fo n
6. (unlike) My online courses have not given me a chance to make new friends. My face-to- tio a
face classes have given me a chance to make friends. lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0
(continued on next page) 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 78 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 8 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
C. Find errors in transition signals, parallelism, fragments, run-ons, and comma splices.
Add, delete, or move one word to make corrections. Do not change capitalization or punctuation.
1. There are both similarities and are differences in writing an academic paragraph and
giving a formal speech in class.
2. Students should give clear examples not only in academic writing but also in formal
class presentations. Similar, both compositions and speeches should have a conclusion.
3. The ideas in academic paragraphs must be developed both complete and logically just
like the ideas in a formal presentation.
4. You must pay attention to spelling when you are writing, although you have the more
difficult problem of correct pronunciation when you are giving a speech.
5. Signals such as in conclusion and in summary equally important for academic
paragraphs and formal speeches.
6. I always feel nervous when I have to do a timed writing in class, I am anxious and
fearful when I stand up to give a speech, too. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 79 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 9 QUIZ
A. Write T if an item is true. Write F if it is false.
1. A funnel introduction moves from general to specific.
2. In an essay, the thesis statement of an essay is the first sentence of the introduction.
3. A thesis statement includes the topic of an essay and a controlling idea.
4. Each body paragraph of an essay has a topic sentence.
5. Transition signals are used only within paragraphs.
6. Unity means that the ideas in an essay have logical organization.
B. Read the sentences in each group. Then number them to create a good funnel introduction. Paragraph 1
However, each culture develops its own musical forms and styles.
Because there are people from different cultures who live in the United States, there is
great variety in American music.
Music is truly a universal language.
In the United States, the connection between music and culture can be seen in three
styles of music: bluegrass, Cajun, and Latin jazz. Paragraph 2
When daylight saving time is in effect, there is an additional hour of sunlight available for evening activities.
Daylight saving time, which is also called summer time, is the practice of moving
clocks forward one hour during warm weather months.
In fact, daylight saving time has a number of negative effects.
Although daylight saving time is widely used, there are complaints when it begins each . d itte year. rm e p is e s
C. Find errors in punctuation. Make corrections. u m o ro s
In short Mr. Smith had several qualities of a great teacher. He was well informed s la r c fo
about his subject. In addition to knowledge. Mr Smith had a great love of history, and his n tio a lic p
enthusiasm for it rubbed off on his students. Furthermore his lectures were well organized, u . D c , In
and he returned papers and tests promptly, even though he taught five different classes. His n tio a c u d
classes were interesting and he told funny stories to keep even the sleepiest student awake E n o rs a
and engaged in learning. Mr. Smith taught more than just history, Mr. Smith also taught us e P y b 4 1 to love learning. 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 80 NAME: DATE: CHAPTER 10 QUIZ
A. Circle the best contrast signal to complete each thesis statement for an opinion essay.
1. (Although / However / Despite) sidewalk cafés are good business for downtown
restaurants in the summer months, I oppose these outdoor eating areas for three reasons.
2. (On the other hand / Though / Despite) the protection that bike helmets give, I feel that
riders should not be required to wear helmets for two very important reasons.
3. According to city officials, local parks close at 11:00 p.m. due to safety concerns. (Even
though / Moreover / However), I believe that the parks should be open to the public at all times.
4. Loud music and cell phone conversations can certainly be annoying, (and / but / however)
I strongly disagree with the decision to have “quiet cars” on suburban commuter trains.
5. (While / However / In spite of) it may be true the new shopping mall will provide jobs
and increase tax revenues, I think that we will get similar benefits by having small
family-owned stores on Main Street.
6. The majority of students are against a tuition increase because of their personal concerns
about money. (Despite / In contrast / In addition), I am in favor of the proposed increase
because the university needs additional funds to pay for higher instructional costs.
B. Read the paragraph. Write T if an item is true. Write F if it is false.
In short, I am in favor of a maximum speed limit of 55 m.p. . H. on highways because d itte
it simply makes sense. Driving at speeds faster than 55 m.p. rm
H. saves little time, especially e p is
on crowded highways. In addition, high speed driving can lead to accidents, and when e s u m
those accidents occur they are likely to cause serious injuries or even death. Driving at o ro s s a maximum speed of 55 m.p. la
H. helps automobiles use less gas, which saves money and r c fo
is good for the environment. I urge state lawmakers to lower high speed limits, and I n tio a
encourage all motorists to “drive at 55” regardless of the speed limit. lic p u . D
1. This paragraph is the introduction for an opinion essay. c , In n
2. In the writer’s opinion, all cars should travel at 55 m.p.H. tio a c u d
3. In the paragraph, the writer summarizes the reasons for her opinion. E n o rs
4. The paragraph is probably part of an essay that has two body paragraphs. a e P y
5. Statistics about car accidents are probably included in the essay. b 4 1 0
6. The paragraph has a call to action. 2 ©
(continued on next page)
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quizzes 81 NAME: DATE:
CHAPTER 10 QUIZ (continued from previous page)
C. Find errors in quotation marks, commas, and capitalization. Make corrections.
1. The owner of a restaurant on State Street said, “my profits increase by 27% during the summer months”.
2. “Customers,” he said, “Enjoy eating outdoors in the fresh air and sunshine.”
3. One of the commuters who I interviewed stated, “I want to be able to relax and talk to
my friends when I am on the train.
4. “We are already overworked” explained a conductor on the train. He added, “there is no
way to ensure that the train cars remain quiet.”
5. In his responses to my survey questions, one of my professors wrote, “we desperately
need to increase the bandwidth on the school’s wifi.
6. “How can I teach effectively without technology?” He asked.
7. “We expect costs for electricity and cleaning staff to go up approximately 10%” said the president. . d itte rm e p is e s u m o ro s s la r c fo n tio a lic p u . D c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Ch apter Quizzes 82 CHAPTER QUIZ ANSWER KEY 83
CHAPTER QUIZ ANSWER KEY am CHAPTER 1 QUIZ
4. I currently a student at the Peabody T H
Conservatory of the Johns Hopkins University
A. 1. there was a terrible earthquake in haiti on B T J in baltimore. tuesday, january 12, 2010. education E
5. The educate at this school is excellent. All of
2. earthquake victims received help from famous are B C the professors is wonderful. people such as bill clinton. T
6. My father and mother will come to my
3. there was also a lot of support from graduation H S P graduate next year.
hollywood actors such as sean penn. T U N
4. the united nations is an international CHAPTER 2 QUIZ N Y A. 3, 6, 4, 7, 1, 5, 2
organization with headquarters in new york
The writer’s purpose is to inform. C city.
B. 1. After our last class, T UN 2. At first,
5. the un can be seen in one of my favorite 3. Then N N 4. , and
movies, north by northwest. 5. Finally, N I E 6. , so
6. next semester, i will take english, math, and
C. 1. I love any celebration that has B crowds, music, and fireworks. biology 101.
2. (no commas needed) T I
7. the university that i attend is located in
3. Last year, it was raining, but the celebration C was still fantastic. eastern canada.
4. First, there was music and dancing in the M A F street.
8. many of the students from africa speak french with the local residents.
5. There was jazz and rock music, so the atmosphere was lively. B. 1. realize 2. development
6. At midnight, the fireworks started, and 3. participate
everyone in the crowd cheered. 4. entertain
7. After the fireworks, my friends and I were 5. beauty
hungry, so we went to a restaurant. 6. organizer S
C. 1. I was born on september 21, 1994 in the city of San Juan, Puerto Rico. is
2. My father a performer with the San Juan c. He , In n Symphony. is a violinist. tio a c s u d
3. He often travel with the orchestra to Europe E n o A rs a e and asia. P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quiz Answer Key 84 CHAPTER 3 QUIZ CHAPTER 4 QUIZ
A. Check sentences 3, 8 A. 1. First of all, Too specific: 2, 4, 6, 7 2. However, Too general: 1, 5
3. A second kind of shopper 4. such as
B. Topic Sentence: Air travel is becoming 5. Finally, increasingly expensive. 6. All in all,
Main Points: The cost of airplane tickets gets higher every year. S
B. X 2. Text messages are popular. so cial
More and more airlines require passengers to pay
networking sites are another common
an extra fee to check their luggage. way of communicating.
Many airlines no longer serve free meals, so passengers must pay for food.
X 4. Some people pay their credit card bills
Topic Sentence: International air travel is often O uncomfortable. by mail., others pay online.
Main Points: Travelers are on international
flights for long periods of time.
X 5. The post office has mailing supplies.
Seats are generally small and close together. Y
Time zone changes cause problems.
you can buy envelopes and boxes, for example. C. X
It takes a lot to be a marathon runner. To
6. The postal worker weighs your T
package, then you pay the shipping
begin with, marathoners need great physical and . cost.
mental strength to complete their 26.2-mile races
X 7. I want to return a pair of pants that I successfully
successful. Next, running a marathon requires T
bought online., therefore, I need to go
great commitment and discipline. Amateur actively to the post office.
runners active begin their long hours of training C.
months before a race. They run three to four days
An animal living in a modern zoo enjoys
several advantages over an animal in the wild.
a week. They also work out in the gym and pay
The first advantage is that a zoo animal is
close attention to parts of their daily routine for its
separated from their natural enemies. Many zoos such as
example their diet and their sleep schedule. In
have free admission. Another advantage is that
zoo employees feed the animal regularly. As a
addition, marathoners need emotional support. it For example
result, they will never have to hunt for food or
Such as they find a running partner or join
suffer in times when food is hard to find. The
a group of runners to help them through the
animal is protected, so it lives without risk of
long hours of training. On the day of the race,
being attacked. A third advantage of living in
zoos is that veterinarians give the animals regular
marathoners feel energized when they hear the loud
checkups and any special medical care it needs.
loudly cheers of their family and friends. It is clear
Opponents of zoos feel that animals should live
clearly that there are many requirements for
in their natural environment. In short, zoos have marathon success. a number of benefits.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quiz Answer Key 85 c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © CHAPTER 5 QUIZ C.
Walter Gropius, a German-born architect, A. 2, 5, 7, 4, 6, 3, 1
The audience for the paragraph is students.
designed simple “glass box” buildings that
B. 1. When students get home from school, they
they changed the look of cities worldwide. want a quick and easy meal.
He was particularly influential from 1919 to
2. If you look in your refrigerator, you should when find everything you need.
1932, which he was the director at the Bauhaus ,
3. After you break two fresh eggs into a bowl,
a German school of design. At the Bauhaus,
mix in salt, pepper, and three tablespoons of milk.
Gropius was a leader of the International Style,
4. Add fresh vegetables to the mixture so that which
that helped reshape architecture. In contrast to
you can increase the nutritional value of were your eggs.
the ornately decorated stone structures that was
5. As the eggs cook, you should push them
popular in earlier times, Gropius created steel around gently with a fork.
6. You will want to make scrambled eggs often
and glass buildings that had straight lines and no
because they are delicious and nutritious.
decoration. He made another major contribution C. s
to the building industry by making designs that
Follow this simple process. So that you
builders could mass-produce them. Gropius
can improve your English vocabulary. First,
was also known for his belief in the value of
keep a small notebook in your pocket, purse, or
teamwork. In sum, Gropius and his followers
backpack. You can also use a digital tablet or where
transformed cities from Toronto to Tokyo, which
smart phone if you have one. You simply need a
their influence can still be seen today.
place to write useful words and phrases. Second ,
pay attention to vocabulary. However, don’t write CHAPTER 7 QUIZ
a word or phrase in your notebook, until you hear A. 1. C 5. E
it at least three times. After you eyncounter the 2. E 6. C 3. E 7. E
vocabulary item several times,. You will know 4. C 8. C
it is important. Next,add information to your
B. 1. Most soft drinks contain caffeine. Therefore,
notebook when you go home each night. Write
we should limit the number of soft drinks we have each day.
details that you remember. If you are uncertain
2. Soft drinks are also a problem because they
about the spelling or meaning of the vocabulary,
contain sugar or other sweeteners.
3. I am trying to lose weight, so I am eating
use your dictionary. Finally, review the contents
smaller amounts of food at each meal.
of your vocabulary notebook at the end of each
4. Since a small green salad has fewer calories
than a sandwich and potato chips, I eat a salad
week because it will help you remember the new for lunch every day. vocabulary.
5. Because of health concerns, shoppers want
to buy organic foods, which are produced
without the use of human-made chemicals. CHAPTER 6 QUIZ
6. Organic farming is time consuming and c.
expensive. Consequently, shoppers pay a high , In
A. Check sentences 2, 3, 5, 6, n
price for organic fruits and vegetables. tio No category: 4 a c u No characteristics: 1 d E n o B. 1. which 5. that rs a e 2. who 6. when P y b 3. who 7. that 4 1 0 4. where 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quiz Answer Key 86
C. 1. Public transportation is important because of
3. The ideas in academic paragraphs must be completely
it allows residents and visitors to move easily
developed both complete and logically just around the city.
like the ideas in a formal presentation.
2. Parking fees are high in the downtown area, so
4. You must pay attention to spelling when but
because more commuters have started taking
you are writing, although you have the more
public transportation instead of driving to
difficult problem of correct pronunciation work. of when you are giving a speech.
3. As a result overcrowded trains, it is difficult
5. Signals such as in conclusion and in summary
to get a seat during rush hour. are for
equally important for academic paragraphs
4. Commuters are angry and upset, Mayor Lee and formal speeches.
is requesting increases in ticket prices on buses and subway trains.
6. I always feel nervous when I have to do a and
5. Consequently, Mayor Lee says that our buses
timed writing in class, I am anxious and Consequently,
fearful when I stand up to give a speech, too.
and trains require costly repairs. City Transit
System fare increases are necessary in his opinion. CHAPTER 9 QUIZ
6. Since Mayor Lee has powerful supporters in he A. 1. T 4. T
city government, will almost certainly get the 2. F 5. F fare increases that he wants. 3. T 6. F
B. Paragraph 1: 2, 3, 1, 4
Paragraph 2: 2, 1, 4, 3 CHAPTER 8 QUIZ C. In short A. 1. F 5. F
,Mr. Smith had several qualities of 2. T 6. T
a great teacher. He was well informed about his 3. F 7. T
subject. In addition to knowledge. 4. T 8. T , Mr Smith
had a great love of history, and his enthusiasm
B. 1. Although I have strong computer skills, I do
not like taking online classes.
for it rubbed off on his students. Furthermore,his
2. Both online instruction and face-to-face
lectures were well organized, and he returned
classes are offered at this university.
3. Students in online courses not only complete
papers and tests promptly, even though he taught
reading assignments but also participate in
five different classes. His classes were interesting group discussions. ,
4. In a classroom, I can get answers to my
and he told funny stories to keep even the
questions immediately, but I have to wait
sleepiest student awake and engaged in learning.
up to a day to get answers from my online professor.
Mr. Smith taught more than just history., Mr.
5. Students take exams in traditional face-to-
Smith also taught us to love learning.
face classes. Similarly, there are tests in online courses.
6. Unlike my online courses, my face-to-face CHAPTER 10 QUIZ
classes have given me a chance to make friends. A. 1. Although 4. but 2. Despite 5. While
C. 1. There are both similarities and are differences 3. However 6. In contrast
in writing an academic paragraph and giving a formal speech in class.
2. Students should give clear examples not only
in academic writing but also in formal class Similarly
presentations. Similar, both compositions and
speeches should have a conclusion.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quiz Answer Key 87 c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © B. 1. F 4. F 2. F 5. T 3. T 6. T
C. 1. The owner of a restaurant on State Street said, M
“my profits increase by 27% during the summer months”..” e
2. “Customers,” he said, “Enjoy eating outdoors
in the fresh air and sunshine.”
3. One of the commuters who I interviewed
stated, “I want to be able to relax and talk to
my friends when I am on the train.”
4. “We are already overworked” explained a , T
conductor on the train. He added, “there is
no way to ensure that the train cars remain quiet.”
5. In his responses to my survey questions, one W
of my professors wrote, “we desperately need
to increase the bandwidth on the school’s wifi.”
6. “How can I teach effectively without h technology?” He asked.
7. “We expect costs for electricity and cleaning
staff to go up approximately 10%” said the , president. c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Chapter Quiz Answer Key 88 STUDENT BOOK ANSWER KEY 89
STUDENT BOOK ANSWER KEY
CHAPTER 1 (pages 2–30)
PRACTICE 4: Correcting Capitalization
Errors in Sentences (page 12)
Questions about the Model (page 4) H
1. The paragraph is about George Lucas.
2. her major is business.
2. George Lucas has changed the film industry in T C many ways.
3. thanksgiving is a holiday in both canada and
3. Examples of capitalization are George Lucas (a U S
person’s name), Star Wars, Harry Potter, Pirates
the united states, but it is celebrated on different
of the Caribbean, and Star Trek (movie titles),
and THX and CGI (abbreviations). days in the two countries.
4. In Sentence 1, “has changed” is the verb. I T
4. it is celebrated on the fourth thursday in
PRACTICE 1: Identifying Nouns and N U S
november in the united states and on the second
Verbs in Word Families (page 4) M O C monday in october in canada. Noun Verb I T writer write
5. istanbul is a seaport city in turkey. G C B 1. contributor contribute
6. greenhills college is located in boston, 2. contribution M 1. educator educate massachusetts. 2. education I A
7. i am taking four classes this semester: american improvement improve S E 1. revolution revolutionize
history, sociology 32, economics 40, and a 2. revolutionary
digital product design course.
PRACTICE 2: Forming Nouns (page 5) I E H assistance
8. i just read a good book by ernest hemingway beautification T O M S brightness
called the old man and the sea. criticism M S excitement
9. my roommate is from the south, so she speaks leader E simplification
english with a southern accent. T J B
10. the two main religions in japan are buddhism
Try It Out! (page 10) S Answers will vary. and shintoism.
PRACTICE 3: Applying Capitalization Rules (page 12)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. El Salvador—place on a map
3. San Salvador—place on a map c.
4. United States—place on a map , In n
5. New York—place on a map tio a c u
6. Aunt Rosa—title and name of a person d E
7. Brooklyn—place on a map n o rs
8. City College—name of a school a e P
9. English—name of a language y b 4
10. Spanish—name of a language 1 0 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 90
PRACTICE 5: Correcting Capitalization
9. Darth Vader represents the evil Empire and
Errors in a Paragraph (page 13) always wears black. I Y
10. (At the end of the film), moviegoers applauded
i enjoyed reading your paragraph. you are the
the defeat (of the evil Empire). C A I I
first person from central america i have met. i was
PRACTICE 7: Using Nouns and Verbs C I D
Correctly (page 15)
living in chicago before i moved here last december.
2. Obi-Wan’s wisdom and life lessons transform U E
Luke Skywalker (into a Jedi knight)
until now, everyone in my english classes came from
3. George Lucas’s THX sound system and A C T V
computer-generated images really improve the
asian countries, such as china, thailand, and vietnam,
battle scenes (in Star Wars). M E I
4. An innovator (like Lucas) experiments (with
or from countries in the middle east. i would like new ideas). F I
5. Action films are full (of excitement) (for movie
to know more about your goals. for example, i fans).
want to know how a nurse is different from a nurse I
PRACTICE 8: Making Subjects and
practitioner. i would also like to know how many
Verbs Agree (page 17) B Subject
science classes you need to take after biology 101 to
2. Basketball games on television make big profits I for the NBA.
become a nurse practitioner. in your paragraph, you Subject S
3. The sale of T-shirts, hats, and other NBA
say that your only special talent is speaking spanish,
products is also good for business. I Subject
but i think you have other talents if you are going to
4. Some of the NBA games are on television in Y
countries outside the United States.
work in the field of medicine. your science classes Subject
5. Some of the success of the NBA is because of
will enable you to get a job, but being able to take individual players. Subject
care of others is a very special talent.
6. There were more NBA games on TV in China C L
after 2002, the year that Yao Ming started christine li
playing for the Houston Rockets. Subject
Try It Out! (page 13)
7. There was a very good reason for the NBA’s Answers will vary. increase in popularity. Subject
8. Most of the new Chinese fans were originally
PRACTICE 6: Identifying Subjects, fans of Ming.
Verbs, and Prepositional Phrases Subject (page 15)
9. Now each of the NBA games on Chinese
3. Audiences loved the film and the characters
television attracts millions of viewers. (in it). Subject
10. Ming’s popularity with Chinese fans has made
4. George Lucas wrote the story and planned the
him one of the most important athletes ever to special effects. play in the NBA.
5. He worked (with talented artists and engineers). c. , In n
6. Lucas and his team designed and built an tio a c
imaginary world (of good and evil). u d E
7. (In the original Star Wars), Luke Skywalker n o rs a becomes a freedom fighter. e P y
8. The heroes (in Luke Skywalker’s life) are Jedi b 4 1 0 knights. 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 91
PRACTICE 9: Editing a Paragraph for
PRACTICE 10: Correcting Sentence
Errors in Subject-Verb Agreement
Fragments (page 19) (page 17) work
X 3. City Year volunteers in the United States,
Golf is no longer just a favorite sport of wealthy England, and South Africa.
middle-aged businessmen or senior citizens. Young they are
X 4. For ex ample, help elementary and middle
people around the world is playing the game, and have
school children with their homework.
some of them has caused a lot of excitement. One are is
X 5. They role models for young children.
of the young stars are Sergio Garcia, a fascinating City Year is X 7. Is an excellent
golfer from Spain. Garcia was born in 1980 and way for university students
to learn from life experiences.
started golfing at the age of three. He became a they X
professional golfer in 1999 at the age of 19. Garcia
8. At the end of their City Year, receive
money to pay for their university tuition.
caught the world’s attention by hitting a golf shot
at a target from behind a tree with his eyes closed.
PRACTICE 11: Editing a Paragraph to
Two other young golf stars are Michelle Wie and
Correct Sentence Fragments (page 19) are
My best friend is Suzanne. We have known each
Ryo Ishikawa. Both of them is quite different She helped
other since childhood. Helped me in a very special
from the traditional golfer. Wie, born in Hawaii in
way. At the age of ten, I moved to a new town.
1989, is Korean-American. She shocked everyone It was
Was very scary for me to go to a new school.
by competing against men—and beating many of was
I very shy. In fact, I was afraid to speak to anyone.
them—at the age of fourteen. Today she is one
Suzanne asked me to eat lunch with her on my first
of the world’s best female golfers. Ishikawa is a
day. During the next several months, she helped
professional Japanese golfer who was born in 1991.
me to adjust to life in school and out of school,
In 2007, he became the youngest player ever to win is
a professional golf tournament in Japan. Each of
too. Now Suzanne in Venezuela with her husband has
and three children. We have not seen each other for
his victories since then have shown his incredible
eight years. However, we stay in touch by email and
athletic skill, and he has become a favorite with We telephone
on Facebook. Telephone each other at least once a
fans. In 2011, after a terrible earthquake in Japan,
month. Suzanne changed my life. We will be friends
Ishikawa impressed his fans once again by promising
to donate all of the money he earned that year to forever. are
help the earthquake victims. Of course there is still
older golfers who continue the traditions of the sport,
but these three young athletes show how golf is changing. c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 92
PRACTICE 12: Using Nouns and Verbs
PRACTICE 1: Identifying Compound
in Sentences (page 20) Nouns (page 33)
something—Sentence 7 A dining table—Sentence 8 bedroom—Sentence 9 Noun Verb meanwhile—Sentence 10 bravery brave herself—Sentence 10 nobody—Sentence 13 creation create cell phone—Sentence 14 creativity nothing—Sentence 17 creator tea cups—Sentence 17 encouragement encourage dinner plates—Sentence 17 enjoyment enjoy
PRACTICE 2: Forming Compound equality 1. equal Nouns (page 33) 2. equalize
Answers will vary. Possible answers include: length lengthen
Mother Earth, earthworm, earth science weekday, week night 1. modernism modernize 2. modernization
PRACTICE 3: Identifying Time-Order transformation transform Signals (page 34)
suddenly, then, at first
B Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. Steve jobs transformed the music industry with
PRACTICE 4: Using Time-Order the Apple iPod.
Signals (page 35)
2. J. K. Rowling created Harry Potter and changed A 2. Then
the way young people feel about reading.
3. At the beginning of November,
3. Thomas Alva Edison lengthened our days. He 4. Meanwhile,
invented the electric light bulb. 5. Soon
4. Martin Luther King Jr. fought for equality of all
6. A week before Thanksgiving, people.
7. Early in the morning,
5. Pablo Picasso helped to make modernism a 8. After that,
popular style of art in the early 20th century.
9. About 2:00 in the afternoon, 10. Finally,
Try It Out! (page 23) B 2. At 9:00 a.m., Answers will vary.
3. After our trip to the salon,
4. Several hours before the party,
Try It Out! (page 23)
5. At the beginning of the party, Answers will vary. 6. Next, 7. Then CHAPTER 2 8. Later, (pages 31–50) 9. After that, 10. Finally,
Questions about the Model (page 32)
1. The purpose of the narrative is to entertain
PRACTICE 5: Arranging Sentences in
readers with an exciting story.
Time Order (page 37) 2. 1, 7, 11, 18
Group 1: 4, 2, 7, 5, 8, 1, 6, 3
3. suddenly in Sentence 4; at first in Sentence 5;
Group 2: 8, 6, 5, 1, 3, 4, 2, 7 c.
then in Sentence 6; meanwhile in Sentence 10;
Group 3: 6, 3, 4, 9, 7, 5, 1, 8, 2 , In n
at last in Sentence 12; then in sentence 14; and tio a next in Sentence 16. c u Try It Out! d (page 38) E n Answers will vary. o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 93
PRACTICE 6: Identifying the Main
Practice 9: Forming Compound
Purpose of a Narrative (page 38)
Sentences (page 42) 1. I 2. E 3. P
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
2. She heard a noise and decided to go back to her
PRACTICE 7: Writing According to enclosure. Your Purpose
3. She walked for a long time, but she couldn’t (page 39) find the road. A 1, 2, 5
4. Finally, she became very tired and tried to rest, B To inform
but her fear prevented her from sleeping.
5. Suddenly, a wolf appeared and looked at her
Questions about the Model hungrily. (page 40)
6. She shouted for help, but no one heard her. 1. two
7. The wolf ate Blanchette, and the poor old man
2. He was truly generous when he gave the rice
never saw his little goat again.
balls to the mice, and he did not ask for a lot in
8. Blanchette wanted to be free, but she did not return.
realize that freedom can be accompanied by danger.
Practice 8: Identifying Compound
Sentences (page 42)
Practice 10: Writing Compound A
2. , but (compound sentence)
Sentences (page 43)
3. and (simple sentence) Answers will vary.
4. , and (compound sentence)
Try It Out! (page 44)
5. , so (a compound sentence) Answers will vary.
7. and (simple sentence)
Practice 11: Using Commas Correctly
9. , or (compound sentence) (page 44)
10. , but (compound sentence) A
2. Tomiko and Keiko are from Japan ,and Nina
12. and (simple sentence) and Daisy are from Mexico.
13. , and (compound sentence)
4. Last week,the girls decided to have a joint
14. , so (compound sentence)
birthday party,so they invited several friends
15. , and (compound sentence) for dinner.
5. Nina wanted to cook Mexican food
16. , so (compound sentence) ,but
Keiko wanted to have Japanese food. B 2. SS 6. Finally 3. SS ,they agreed on the menu. 4. SS
7. They served Japanese tempura,Mexican 5. CS . . . sad, and . . .
arroz con pollo,Chinese stir-fried vegetables, 6. SS and American ice cream. 7. SS 8. First 8. CS . . . rope, or . . . ,Nina made the rice. 9. CS . . . rope, but . . .
10. After that,Tomiko prepared the vegetables. 10. SS
11. After dinner,Daisy served the dessert. 11. CS . . . decision, but . . .
B Answers will vary. 12. CS . . . mountains, so . . . 13. SS
PRACTICE 12: Using Compound 14. SS
Nouns in Sentences (page 46) 15. SS c. Answers will vary. , In 16. SS n tio a c Try It Out! u (page 47) d E Answers will vary. n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 94 CHAPTER 3
Practice 4: Writing Good Topic (pages 51–78)
Sentences (page 58)
Questions about the Model
Answers will vary. Possible answers include: (page 52)
2. There are a number of reasons that people do
1. taking a break / taking time off from work / not eat breakfast. relaxing
3. Travelers who want to visit Grand Canyon
2. Relaxing has specific benefits.
National Park should plan their trip carefully.
3. summarizes the main points Try It Out!
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Forming (page 60) Answers will vary.
Adjectives (page 53) A 9. positive
Practice 5: Writing Main Points 10. wonderful (page 61) 11. regular Answers will vary.
12. healthy, additional B 2. beneficial
Practice 6: Using Example Signals 3. creative (page 63) 4. energetic 2. such as 5. functional 3. For instance, 6. helpful 7. productive
Practice 7: Identifying Main Points 8. readable
and Examples (page 63) 9. studious 10. stressful
Example: Others play sports.
Main Point: The next benefit is creativity.
Practice 2: Predicting Content from
Example: Individuals with hobbies such the Controlling Idea
as photography, travel, and music develop (page 55)
new talents and get ideas that they can use at
Answers will vary. Possible answers include: school or in the office.
1. Types of jobs that are dangerous. Examples of
Main Point: Finally, interests outside of work
the dangers of specific jobs. Reasons that some
can lead to a positive attitude. jobs are dangerous.
Example: For instance, when volunteers help
2. Examples of repetitive and boring jobs.
children learn to read, they feel wonderful
Problems (e.g., carpal tunnel syndrome and
about what they have achieved. Then they feel
accidents) for workers who have repetitive and
like working harder when they return to their
boring jobs. A narrative about a typical day at a regular responsibilities. repetitive and boring job.
3. Kinds of jobs that are perfect for college
students. Examples of perfect jobs for college
Practice 8: Identifying Effective
students. Reasons that a specific job is perfect
Concluding Sentences (page 65)
for college students. A contrast between a job b
that is good for students and a job that is not good for students.
Practice 9: Writing Effective
Concluding Sentences (page 66)
Practice 3: Identifying Good Topic Answers will vary.
Sentences (page 55)
A Check sentences 3, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12 Too specific: 5, 7 Too general: 4, 11 c. B 2. a 3. c , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 95
Practice 10: Putting Sentences in the
B 2. adjective: mountainous adverb: typically Correct Order 3. adjective: smart adverb: carefully (page 67) 4. adjective: helpful adverb: quickly
A 8, 3, 10, 9, 2, 6, 5, 4, 1, 7 5. adjective: active adverb: quietly
B Main Point: The first type of game will allow you
to relax quietly but will also keep your brain active.
PRACTICE 12: Choosing between
Example: For example, sudoku mentally
Adjective and Adverbs (page 71)
challenges players to look for patterns with economical possible numbers. specifically beautiful
Example: Other brain games such as cheaply wise
crossword puzzles, word search puzzles, and closely significantly
word jumbles require language skills. final basic
Main Point: Next, if you prefer spending time intelligent
with others, there are games with a social element.
Example: For instance, when you play
PRACTICE 13: Editing a Paragraph for
checkers or chess or when you play cards with
Word Form Errors (page 71)
a group of friends, you are also developing personal relationships.
Foodies love incredible meals, so they eat and
Example: The same is true of board games ly
such as Monopoly and Settlers of Catan,
drink adventurous on their vacations. In their
which have been bringing people together for global
friendly competition for decades.
globally travels, they enthusiastically try the local
Main Point: Finally, there are games for people
who like the idea of being on a team and enjoy
cuisine. In addition to popular restaurants with physical activity.
Example: The most obvious examples are
professional chefs, they visit family restaurants and
sports such as basketball, baseball, and soccer, unusual
but party games such as charades can get
bravely eat unusually foods in open-air markets. quite physical as well. typical
Concluding Sentence: Indeed, the wide
Another typically activity for food lovers is taking
variety of games offers something to just about everyone.
cooking classes. With their instructor, they shop for speical
Try It Out! (page 68)
specially ingredients and watch demonstrations. Answers will vary.
Then they skillfully use what they have learned. True
Questions about the Model (page 69)
1. peaceful, sunny, and adventurous
foodies usually do one final thing before the end of 2. typically ly
3. According to the paragraph, people like
a trip. They careful put all of their new recipes in a
adventure travel for the chance to experience the ly
unknown. They like experiences that are new
safe place so that they can quick use them when they and exciting.
get home. Clearly, these travelers want good food
Practice 11: Identifying Adjectives both at home and on the road.
and Adverbs (page 70)
A 2. Backpackers and trekkers typically visit
PRACTICE 14: Using Adjectives (page 72)
mountainous areas (on a trip). A enjoyable negative c.
3. Smart travelers carefully research and plan reliable useful , In n tio a
the details (of their departure and arrival). analytical direct c u specific cautious d E
4. Websites quickly provide helpful information n o
B Answers will vary. rs (for vacationers). a e P y
5. Active travelers may sit and relax quietly (for b 4 1 0 part of their trip). 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 96
PRACTICE 15: Outlining an Academic
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Finding
Paragraph (page 75)
Synonyms (page 81) A
1. Supporting Detail: for individuals who A 2. d 5. b
want physical challenges; e.g., scuba diving 3. a 6. c
on The Great Barrier Reef, cross-country 4. f 7. e
skiing in Yellowstone, and exploring the
B Answers will vary. Possible answers include: jungles of the Amazon by boat 1. business, firm
2. Supporting Detail: for anyone who likes 2. complex, difficult
high levels of excitement and danger 3. helpful, useful
B. Main Point: Soft adventure still gives travelers
4. catastrophe, failure, ruin, tragedy
an opportunity to have new and exciting
5. big, crucial, essential, key, major, significant,
experiences in beautiful locations, but it is vital
usually less risky and more comfortable. 6. charge, cost, fee
1. Supporting Detail: less danger in
studying a language during a homestay but
PRACTICE 2: Recognizing Logical still thrilling
Division (page 83)
2. Supporting Detail: activities such as
“Why I Don’t Have a Credit Card” (the writing
hot-air ballooning and bird watching for a
model); “Secrets of Good Ads” (Practice 4, fresh way to see the world
Paragraph 1); “Cookies, but Not the Ones to Eat”
B Topic Sentence: There are three kinds of bad
(Practice 4, Paragraph 2); “Kinds of Salespeople”
drivers you see on the streets and highways of
(Practice 5, Paragraph 2); “Part-Time Jobs” almost any country.
(Practice 6); “Black Friday” (Practice 10); “Getting
A. Main Point: The first kind of bad driver is
a Parking Space at the Mall” (Practice 11);
the aggressive driver who has big dreams of
“Why Advertisers Care about Young Shoppers” being a Grand Prix racer. (Practice 13).
1. Supporting Detail: quick to leave when traffic light turns green
PRACTICE 3: Outlining for Logical
2. Supporting Detail: too fast; above the
Division (page 84)
speed limit and always in the passing lane
A. Main Point: The first reason is that using
B. Main Point: The second kind of bad driver
a piece of plastic instead of cash makes
is the busy modern multitasker; e.g., working shopping too easy.
mothers and overworked businesspeople.
1. Supporting Detail: buy unnecessary items
1. Supporting Detail: other activities while
2. Supporting Detail: buy $75 pink sandals
driving; e.g., eating, drinking coffee, talking
without enough money to pay for them
on the phone, and disciplining children
B. Main Point: That leads me to the second
C. Main Point: The last kind is the cautious driver
reason I refuse to have a credit card. I would
who drives extremely slowly and carefully. end up owing money.
1. Supporting Detail: No faster than 40 mph
1. Supporting Detail: buy a lot like
on highways; down to 30 mph on every shopaholic Sara curve
2. Supporting Detail: have a big debt like
2. Supporting Detail: Almost completely Sara; now $4,000 in debt stopped to make a turn
3. Supporting Detail: be in debt for years if
Concluding Sentence: In conclusion, bad
monthly interest charges are higher than
drivers can be speedsters, “slowsters,” or just minimum monthly payments
inattentive motorists, but you have to watch out
C. Main Point: I avoid using credit because for all of them!
I have difficulty understanding credit card agreements. CHAPTER 4
1. Supporting Detail: difficult legal
(pages 79–101) c. vocabulary , In n
2. Supporting Detail: fine print—small type tio
Questions about the Model a (page 81) with important details c u d
1. three reasons, Sentence 2 (the topic sentence)
3. Supporting Detail: late fees or higher E n o
2. the first reason is (Sentence 3), that leads me interest rates rs a
to the second reason (Sentence 8), finally e
Concluding Sentence: To sum up, credit cards may P y (Sentence 15)
be convenient for some people, but for me, they are a b 4 1
3. examples and explanations 0
plastic ticket to financial disaster. 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 97
Try It Out! (page 84)
PRACTICE 7: Editing a Paragraph for Answers will vary.
Consistency (page 89)
PRACTICE 4: Editing Paragraphs for
Young people who are interested in fashion Unity (page 85) buyers
Paragraph 1: Teenagers have a surprising amount of
may want to consider working as a buyer for retail
money to spend, so advertisers research teenage fads and fashions.
stores. Retail buyers work for department stores
Paragraph 2: Some people believe that cookies will
and large chain stores. They look for and choose the
damage their computers, but this is not stores true.
merchandise to sell in the store. Retail buyers often
PRACTICE 5: Editing Paragraphs for
specialize in one type of merchandise, such as men’s
Coherence (page 86) They Paragraph 1
casual clothing or women’s shoes. You choose the
Move: In 2007, the iPhone achieved great success, they their
especially because of the variety of apps that were
merchandise that you think will sell well in your available for it. their
To follow: One year later, in 2003, BlackBerry
stores and appeal to your customers. Buyers also
further developed smart phone technology.
travel to trade shows and fashion shows to look at Paragraph 2 They
Move: Like a friend, he asks how you are and listens
merchandise. He or she will purchase products about
attentively as you tell him about your life.
To follow: The first type of salesperson is the one
six months before the merchandise appears in the
who pretends to be your best friend. They
stores. You need to be able to predict fashion trends,
PRACTICE 6: Identifying Consistent
Use of Nouns and Pronouns (page 88)
understand retail sales, and work cooperatively with
Part-time jobs are beneficial for students in a
number of ways. First, of course, they provide
managers in sales, advertising, and marketing.
much needed income. They make it possible
PRACTICE 8: Comparing Two
for students not only to pay their bills but also
Paragraphs for Coherence (page 92)
to have extra spending money for clothing and
A Paragraph 2 is more coherent. It has transition
entertainment. Next, part-time jobs offer valuable
signals to connect ideas. It also repeats key
experience. Students who have them quickly learn
nouns and uses synonyms such as female-women
the importance of being responsible, following
and shoppers-customers.
directions, and working as members of a team. Some B
Clothing store owners who understand the
part-time jobs can also teach useful skills such as
differences between male and female shoppers
basic accounting or database management. Finally,
can use this knowledge to design their stores
having part-time jobs while going to school teaches
effectively. Female customers use their five
students how to become efficient. Working students
senses when they shop. For example, women
must learn to balance their schedules so that they
want to touch and feel fabrics and see themselves
are able to complete their academic assignments
in clothes. Because of women’s shopping style,
and keep up with the duties of their jobs. All in all,
owners of women’s clothing stores place the c. , In
part-time employment has significant advantages for
latest fashions and clothes with luxury fabrics n tio a students.
near the entrance. Furthermore, they put items c u d
near one another to allow women to visualize E n o rs
how several items will look together as an outfit. a e P y
They also group clothes not by item type but b 4 1
by style—classic or casual, for instance. Most 0 2 © Longm
an Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 98
men, on the other hand, go shopping out of
PRACTICE 13: Editing a Paragraph to
necessity. They buy clothes only when they have
Correct Run-ons and Comma Splices (page 98)
to. Men get a pair of jeans because their old
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
ones have worn out. They probably want to buy
There are three main reasons why advertisers
exactly the same type of jeans. Moreover, men
prefer to buy at a store that has everything in its
target young people. First of all, advertisers know
place. They like all shirts together over here and
that individuals in the 18–to–34 age group do a lot
all pants together over there. This way, they can
of consumer spending. When young people go to
purchase what they need quickly and leave the
college and start to live on their own, for example,
store. You can see that men’s clothing stores are
they have to buy many basics. For school, they need
arranged very differently from women’s for good reason.
books, computer equipment, and other items. For the
home, they need furniture, kitchen appliances, and
PRACTICE 9: Using Transition Signals O for Similar Ideas
dishes. of course they may also want a luxury item (page 93) 2. , and
such as a television. A second reason to target young 3. Similarly,
shoppers is that they tend to be more impressionable 4. also T
than older adults. therefore, they are easier to
PRACTICE 10: Using Transition
influence. Advertisers use young people’s concern
Signals for Logical Division of Ideas T
and Examples (page 94)
about “the cool factor” to sell them products. they 2. A second strategy
know that young adults often make purchases to keep 3. For example, 4. Then
up with the latest styles. Finally, advertisers focus 5. Finally,
on young consumers because 18-to-34-year-olds 6. such as and
have a lifetime of buying ahead of them, advertisers
PRACTICE 11: Using Various
want them to become loyal to a brand. If consumers
Transition Signals for Coherence
buy a product and grow attached to it when they (page 95) 2. For example
are young, they are likely to continue to buy it 3. however
throughout their lifetimes. Building brand loyalty is 4. Next I 5. so
an important advertising tool. it works for all kinds of 6. such as
products from small items like running shoes to large 7. also 8. Finally
purchases such as cars. In short, young adults may 9. To sum up
not have a great deal of money, but advertisers work
PRACTICE 12: Correcting Run-ons and
very hard to get them to buy their products now and
Comma Splices (page 97) in the future.
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
X 3. At many schools, students must pay high
Practice 14: Using Near Synonyms to
tuition fees. Textbooks cost a lot, too.
Avoid Repetition (page 99) c.
X 4. Saving money is not easy. It takes careful
A young shoppers (A second reason to target young , In n planning. shoppers . . . ) tio a c u X
young adults (. . . young adults often make d
5. First, you make a budget, and then you E purchases . . . ) n o follow it carefully. rs
young consumers (Finally, advertisers focus on a e X P
7. Last month, my credit card bills were young consumers . . . ) y b high. I owed more than $700. 4 1
B Answers will vary. 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 99 CHAPTER 5
PRACTICE 6: Identifying the Audience
(pages 102–120) (page 109)
Questions about the Model (page 104)
A Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. As an experienced student, I know that it is
The intended audience for the model paragraph
easier to make a good impression on your course
is students who need tips for success in school.
instructors if you follow these fundamental steps.
They could be students who have not been
The words if you follow these fundamental steps
getting good grades or new students.
lets readers know that the paragraph will explain
The topic sentence specifically states that the a process.
writer is an experienced student who has been in
2. First, before you go to class, do all of the
school and knows how to get good grades. Along
assigned reading and homework.
with each step in the paragraph, the writer gives
Second, arrive for class a few minutes early.
details that provide the kind of information that
Next, participate actively throughout the lesson.
students with problems or new students might
Finally, when the class meeting ends, remain need. seated.
3. It gives the positive result of following the steps
B The intended audience is new international
in the process. The information helps show the students. purpose of the paragraph.
Circled text: you and your classmates . . . put
everything into your bag or backpack . . . Even if
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Forming
it is your first emergency situation
Phrasal Verbs (page 104)
A clear up—Sentence 18
Try It Out! (page 110) going on—Sentence 7 Answers will vary. jump at—Sentence 12 keep up—Sentence 4
Questions about the Model (page 111) speak up—Sentence 13 1. simple turn off—Sentence 8
2. sentences 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16
3. two SV combinations connected by before B 2. break down 3. fall through
PRACTICE 7: Identifying and 4. mix up 5. wipe out
Analyzing Complex Sentences 6. drop in (page 114) A Sentences 1, 3, 15
PRACTICE 2: Writing Topic Sentences B
2. It is usually impossible to get a response
for Process Paragraphs (page 106) Answers will vary.
right away because professors are very busy people.
PRACTICE 3: Identifying and Using
Time-Order Signals (page 107)

3. If you have not received an answer within
A first—Sentence 3; second—Sentence 5;
two business days , you should send a
next—Sentence 9; finally—Sentence 15 second email. B 2. Second,
4. After you have received a helpful response 3. The third step , 4. Finally
send a follow-up email to thank the 5. To sum up, professor.
PRACTICE 4: Arranging Supporting
5. Check your school email regularly since c. , In
Sentences in Time Order (page 108)
your instructors may send out important n tio a
Group 1: 2, 7, 4, 1, 6, 5, 8, 3 c notices. u d
Group 2: 1, 6, 8, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7 E n o
6. Whenever you see the word test in the rs a e
PRACTICE 5: Stating the Purpose in subject line of an email P y
Concluding Sentences (page 109) , you had better pay b 4 1 0 Answers will vary. attention. 2 © Longma
n Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book A nswer Key 100
7. Do not be absent on the day of a test unless
CHAPTER 6 (pages 121–147)
you have received permission from your
Questions about the Model (page 123) instructor. 1. courage 8.
2. the quality of being brave in a dangerous or
The students were silent as the professor difficult situation handed out their test.
3. the writer gives the origin of courage and
9. The students worked on the test problems
explains how the origin is connected to the
meaning of the word; the writer also gives
until the teacher told them to stop. examples of courageous people
10. As soon as the instructor told them to stop
PRACTICE 1: Exploring a Word’s
writing they put down their pencils.
History (page 123)
11. After the teacher collected the tests , she
Answers will vary. Possible answers include: dismissed the class.
1. Astro means “star.”
2. An astronaut travels in space (to the stars).
12. Before she left , she promised to post their
Astronomy is the scientific study of the stars. An
test scores in the grade book of their course
aster is a star-shaped flower.
3. Naut means “ship.” website.
4. The words are all related to ships, sailors, and
water. An astronaut is a traveler / sailor in a
PRACTICE 8: Writing Complex
spaceship. A nautilus is a type of sea animal.
Sentences (page 115)
Nautical an adjective that means “relating to ships and sailors.” A 2. f 5. d 3. a 6. b 4. e
PRACTICE 2: Learning the Meaning of Idioms (page 124)
You will not be late for early morning go the distance—Sentence 4
classes if you follow several time-efficient steps.
put everything on the line—Sentence 9
Begin the process by deciding what to wear the
from head to toe—Sentence 18
next day before you go to bed at night. Then go to pieces—Sentence 18
get out of bed in the morning as soon as your in my book—Sentence 20
alarm clock rings instead of sleeping an extra
five or ten minutes. You should keep your alarm
PRACTICE 3: Choosing a Topic
as far from your bed as possible because it will
force you to get up and stay up. Then when you
Sentence for a Definition Paragraph
are in the shower, stick to a two-minute limit (page 125)
to save not only water but also time. The final b
step requires you to bring your breakfast to class
unless your professor has rules against food in
PRACTICE 4: Completing Topic the classroom.
Sentences for Definition Paragraphs
B Answers will vary. (page 126) Answers will vary. Try It Out! (page 115)
PRACTICE 5: Identifying the Kind of Answers will vary.
Support in a Definition Paragraph
PRACTICE 9: Using Phrasal Verbs in (page 126) c. Sentences
Supporting sentences: It is also called a USB drive, (page 117) , In
thumb drive, jump drive, or pen drive. No matter n Answers will vary. tio
what it is called, the device is the same. A flash drive a c u d
is similar to a small computer hard drive. However, E n
it has no moving parts, and it can be easily removed o rs a
and carried in a pocket, in a bag, or on a keychain. A e P y
flash drive usually connects to a computer through b 4
a USB port and comes in a variety of shapes, sizes, 1 0 2 and colors. © c
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 101
PRACTICE 6: Choosing Concluding
PRACTICE 8: Identifying and
Sentences for a Definition Paragraph
Punctuating Adjective Clauses (page 127) (page 132) d NI
2. Before Christianity existed, people in
Try It Out! (page 128)
northern and central Europe worshiped a Answers will vary.
goddess whom they called Eostre.
EI 3. Eostre which means east was the goddess
Questions about the Model (page 129) , , of spring.
Sentence 3: No Rooz, Iranian New Year, which NI
begins on the first day of spring, is one of these.
4. Every spring, people who worshiped her
The underlined which clause gives extra information
held a festival to give thanks for the return about Iranian New Year. of the sun’s warmth.
Sentence 5: On a special table, they display seven
NI 5. They offered the goddess cakes that they
foods with names that start with the letter s in
Persian, the language of Iran. baked for the festival.
The underlined that clause gives necessary
NI 6. These cakes were very similar to the hot
information about the seven foods on the Iranian
cross buns that bakeries now sell at Easter. New Year table.
EI 7. Also, the custom of coloring eggs which
2. Persian is the language of Iran. The comma ,
indicates that a definition or explanation of
families do at Easter ,came from ancient Persian follows. cultures.
3. Iranian New Year and Halloween both have a
EI 8. Even the popular Easter Bunny who brings
connection to nature. Iranian New Year is on the ,
first day of spring. Halloween began hundreds
chocolate eggs and other candy to children
of years ago as a celebration of the end of the
on Easter Sunday ,has pagan roots.
farming season in Ireland and England.
PRACTICE 9: Writing Complex
PRACTICE 7: Identifying and
Sentences with Subject Pronouns
Punctuating Appositives (page 131) (page 134) NI
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
3. In the movie, Bill Murray is meteorologist
2. Many Christians do not eat certain foods during Phil Connors. EI
Lent, which is the six-week period before Easter
4. Phil Connors has to go to Punxsutawney , Sunday.
a small town in the mountains of western
3. People who practice the Hindu religion cannot Pennsylvania. eat beef. EI
4. Muslims and Jews cannot eat pork, which is
5. On February 2, Punxsutawney has a considered unclean.
celebration for Groundhog Day an old ,
5. Muslims cannot eat or drink at all in the daytime mid-winter holiday.
during Ramadan, which is a holy month of
NI 6. Phil Connors and his coworker Rita plan fasting.
to stay in Punxsutawney for just 24 hours.
6. The festival, which follows the end of Ramadan, EI lasts for three days.
7. The worst kind of winter weather, a blizzard
, forces Phil and Rita to remain in
PRACTICE 10: Writing Complex Punxsutawney. EI
Sentences with Object Pronouns
8. Romantic comedies funny movies about , (page 136)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:

love , always have a happy ending, and c. , In
Phil and Rita’s February 2 story does, too.
A 2. The special food that Koreans eat on Chuseok n includes songpyun rice cakes. tio a c
3. Kimchi, which Koreans prepare with u d E
cabbage, other vegetables, and spices, is also n o rs
part of a typical Chuseok meal. a e
4. The traditional activities that Koreans have P y b
for Chuseok show the importance of family in 4 1 0 Korean culture. 2 © Longma
n Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book A nswer Key 102 who
B Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
solar year. Emperor Julius Caesar, whom ruled Rome
2. The name of the festival is Loy Krathong, which
English speakers translate as “Festival of the
more than 2,000 years ago, came up with the idea
Floating Leaf Cups” or “Festival of Lights.”
3. Thais float little boats, which they have made
for leap year. The Julian calendar, which was named
out of banana leaves, lotus, or paper, down a river in the evening.
after him, was very accurate but not quite exact
4. The Loy Krathong boats, which Thais have
decorated with lighted candles, incense, coins,
enough. It had too many leap days. The problem
and flowers, float on the water in the moonlight.
5. Thais want the wish that they have made with
was finally solved in 1582, when Pope Gregory XIII their boat to come true.
introduced a new calendar. The Gregorian calendar
PRACTICE 11: Writing Complex adds
Sentences with When or Where
uses a formula that add leap days, but only in certain (page 138)
years. The years must have numbers that they can
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. The Cinco de Mayo holiday commemorates
be evenly divided by four. However, years ending
the Battle of Puebla on May 5, 1862, when the
Mexican army defeated the invading French
in “00” are leap years only if they can be evenly army.
2. The spring equinox in the Northern Hemisphere
divided by 400. Thus, the year 1900 was not a leap
occurs in March, when daytime and nighttime
are approximately equal in length.
year, but 2000, 2004, 2008, and 2012 were. Italy,
3. On the Fourth of July, Americans go to places
where they can get great views of traditional where
Portugal, Poland, and Spain, which the Catholic fireworks shows.
4. Rio de Janeiro, where millions of people
Church had great influence, were the first to adopt
celebrate Carnaval each year, is famous for its
beaches, its mountains, and its music.
the Gregorian calendar. Today, it is a widely used
PRACTICE 12: Editing a Paragraph to
calendar that still has an effective leap year formula.
Correct Adjective Clauses (page 140)
PRACTICE 13: Writing Complex
A leap year occurs in those years when we add a
Sentences with Adjective Clauses
leap day to February. In a leap year, February has 29 (page 140) Answers will vary.
days instead of 28. We add a leap day because a solar which
Try It Out! (page 141)
year, that is the actual time it takes for the Earth to Answers will vary.
travel around the sun, is different from a calendar
Practice 14: Using Word Origins and study
Idioms (page 142)
year. According to scientists who studies the Earth’s
A Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
1. Economist comes from a Greek word that means
movement, it takes 365.242199 days for our planet “manager of the house.”
2. In Homer’s Odyssey, a man named Mentor was
to make one full revolution around the sun. The
an advisor, and today a mentor is an experienced c. , In
person who advises a less experienced person. n
Gregorian calendar, which people throughout most tio
3. Robot comes from the Czech word robota, a c u d which means “work.” E
of the world use, has a 365-day year. By adding an n o
B Answers will vary. rs a e
extra day nearly every four years, the Gregorian P y b
Try It Out! (page 144) 4 1 0
calendar leaps forward and stays in line with the Answers will vary. 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 103 CHAPTER 7
3. Supporting Detail: less crowding on trains and
(pages 148–170)
buses with other angry commuters
Concluding Sentence: In conclusion, Parisians
Questions about the Model (page 149)
hope that Vélib’ will result in fewer cars and less
1. There are three important causes for the success
pollution in the future, but for now they are enjoying of Vélib’.
the positive effects that the bike sharing program has The focus is on causes. already produced.
2. Sentence 3: First, Paris leaders planned carefully to avoid missteps.
PRACTICE 4: Editing a Cause / Effect
Sentence 8: Second, the Paris government
Paragraph for Unity and Coherence
made Vélib’ bikes affordable for riders with the
cooperation of a large advertising company. (page 156)
Sentence 11: Finally, Vélib’ has been successful
Move: The most obvious effect is that rooftop
because of effective publicity.
gardens make any city more beautiful and livable, 3. a cause
whether they are seen up close, from skyscrapers
above, or from the city streets below.
PRACTICE 1: Identifying the Meaning
To follow: Rooftop gardens are badly needed green
of Prefixes + Base Words (page 150)
spaces that have many positive effects on urban
2. inescapable / not able to escape, not able to neighborhoods. avoid or get away from
3. misunderstand / wrong understanding
Cross out: However, rooftop gardens require careful
4. outgrow / grow and exceed the size of
planning. / A number of local governments have something (e.g., clothing)
developed plans to fight air pollution.
5. preexisting / exist before
6. readjust / adjust again, make additional changes
PRACTICE 5: Adding Details to
7. subconscious / below consciousness, not aware,
Cause / Effect Support (page 157) not realizing Answers will vary.
8. uninvolved / not involved, not participating
PRACTICE 6: Writing Concluding
PRACTICE 2: Writing Topic Sentences
Sentences (page 158) (page 153) Answers will vary. Paragraph 1: a Paragraph 2: d
Try It Out! (page 159) Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 3: Outlining a Cause /
Effect Paragraph (page 155)
Questions about the Model (page 161)
A. Main Point (Effect): The most obvious benefit
1. consequently in Sentence 5, as a result in
has been the increase in activity among people
Sentence 8, thus in Sentence 10 of all ages.
other instances: as a result in Sentence 13, thus
1. Supporting Detail: excellent exercise from
in Sentence 14; the words are used to introduce bikes
the beneficial effects of precycling
2. Supporting Detail: better health and
2. Pre- means “before.” People who precycle well-being
think about protecting the environment before
B. Main Point (Effect): Users of Vélib’ also report
they use certain products. Re- means “again” or
another positive effect of the bike sharing
“back.” People who recycle use products again
program. They say they experience more day-to-
or take steps to make new products from old day enjoyment. products.
1. Supporting Detail: more time outdoors
3. The writer’s apartment is more livable. Because
2. Supporting Detail: enjoyment of Parisian
she doesn’t have glass, plastic, paper, and metal
architecture, art, parks, and street life c.
to recycle, there is more space for her. She can , In
C. Main Point (Effect): Bike riders in Paris praise n
feel comfortable in her small apartment. tio a
Vélib’ for its socializing effects. c u d
1. Supporting Detail: bond between cyclists; E n o
help from experienced to inexperienced rs a e riders P y
2. Supporting Detail: greeting and chatting b 4 1 0 2 © Longma
n Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book A nswer Key 104 so
PRACTICE 7: Using Cause / Effect
take care of many of their banking needs, they go
Transition Signals for Coherence
to the bank less often. As a result of using online (page 163)
services, they do not spend time traveling to the Paragraph 1 2. so
bank or standing in line when they get there. Finally, 3. since
online banking is safe. Since many customers fear 4. Therefore t 5. because of
becoming victims of identity theft., They want to be Paragraph 2
able to check their account balances regularly from 1. so
home. They use online banking to make sure their 2. due to 3. Because
money is still in their account and not in the hands 4. Consequently
of cyber criminals. Because of factors like these. 5. for o ,
Online banking is on the rise.
PRACTICE 8: Combining Sentences
with Cause / Effect Signals (page 164)
PRACTICE 10: Using Words with
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
Prefixes (page 167)
3. Sunlight produces vitamin D, so we need Answers will vary. sunlight for a healthy body.
4. Vitamin D is important because of its role in bone development.
CHAPTER 8 (pages 171–196)
5. Sunlight affects the human body clock. As a
result, regular exposure to the sun helps people
Questions about the Model (page 173) sleep better.
1. Topic sentence: To understand 21st century
6. Some psychologists recommend spending time
education, let’s examine the similarities and
in the sun, for sunshine makes their patients feel
differences between the schools of 50 years ago happier. and the schools of today.
7. Due to a decrease in sunlight in winter, Seasonal
Topic: changes in education
Affective Disorder, SAD, affects people in many
Controlling idea: there are similarities and parts of the world.
differences between schools of 50 years ago and
8. Since people spend time outdoors on sunny the schools of today
days, they are more likely to be physically active
2. areas of study then and now, methods of
and get the exercise the need.
teaching and learning then and now, and the
9. The warmth of the sun relieves minor aches and
purpose of education then and now; the author
pains. Consequently, there is an added benefit to
explains each of the points by comparing and sunshine.
contrasting education—that is, presenting
similarities and differences between—today and
PRACTICE 9: Editing a Paragraph to 50 years ago
Correct Sentence Structure (page 166)
3. There are two sentences in the conclusion: 19In
Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
summary, education in the 21st century is firmly
rooted in the basics of traditional education
It is easy to understand why people are changing
from the 1950s and 1960s. 20However, modern
from their traditional banking to online banking.
education has expanded what students learn, how they learn it, and why.
First, customers decide to manage their money b
4. The writer uses many transitions signals for
online. Because banks offer them special rewards in
coherence such as first (Sentence 2), next
(Sentence 6), and finally (Sentence 11), which
return. For example, some banks reduce their fees or
signal the main points of the paragraph. Signals c. , In
give cash back when people change from paper to
such as the same (Sentence 13), however n tio T
(Sentence 14), and in contrast (Sentence 16) are a c u online services, d
. therefore, customers eagerly make
also important for coherence because they show E n o
the switch. Second, online banking is becoming
the similarities and differences in schools of rs a
50 years ago and the schools of today. e P
more popular because it saves time. Online y b 4 1
customers can use a mobile phone or computer to 0 2 ©
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 105
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Finding
PRACTICE 7: Combining Ideas with
Antonyms (page 174)
Comparison Signals (page 186)
Answers will vary. Possible answers are: A 2. f 5. c
2. English language movies appear in theaters 3. e 6. a
worldwide. English is commonly used on the 4. b 7. d Internet, too.
B Answers will vary. Possible answers include:
3. British English has become an international 2. cease, end, stop
language. Similarly, American English is now
3. contract, lessen, shrink
heard in locations around the globe.
4. lesser, minor, small
4. Just as English is the language spoken in Britain
5. fake, false, imaginary
and the United States, English is the language
6. abbreviated, brief, short
spoken in Canada, Australia, and New Zealand.
5. More than 350 million people speak English as
PRACTICE 2: Writing Topic Sentences
their first language. Likewise, millions of people (page 177)
speak English as an additional language. Paragraph 1: c Paragraph 2: a
PRACTICE 8: Writing Sentences with
Comparison Signals (page 186)
PRACTICE 3: Identifying Point-by-
Answers will vary. Possible answers are:
Point and Block Paragraphs (page 179)
2. Knowing a second language is useful not only Paragraph 1: Point-by-Point
for travel but also for employment. Paragraph 2: Block
3. Like Latin, the Greek language is the origin of many English words.
PRACTICE 4: Arranging a
4. Loan words such as mosquito, patio, and plaza
have the same spelling in English and Spanish.
Comparison / Contrast Paragraph in
5. Both word knowledge and cultural experience
Logical Order (page 179)
play a role in language learning.
7, 4, 10, 6, 11, 2, 8, 5, 9, 1, 3
PRACTICE 9: Using Contrast Signals
PRACTICE 5: Writing Concluding (page 189)
Sentences (page 180) Answers will vary. Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 10: Writing Sentences with
Try It Out! (page 181)
Contrast Signals (page 190)
Answers will vary for block or point-by-point Answers will vary.
organization and the outline.
PRACTICE 11: Using Antonyms
Questions about the Model (page 182) (page 190) 1. 1, 2, 13 Answers will vary.
2. The topic sentence is Sentence 2. It indicates
that the paragraph will discuss mostly differences.
Try It Out! (page 191)
3. although in Sentence 2, but in Sentence 4, but in Answers will vary.
Sentence 5, and whereas in Sentence 6.
Try It Out! (page 193)
PRACTICE 6: Using Parallelism with Answers will vary.
Comparison Signals (page 185) 2. negatives
3. end with special punctuation c. 4. difficult , In n
5. for academic English tio a c u 6. effectively d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © Longma
n Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book A nswer Key 106 CHAPTER 9
PRACTICE 7: Outlining an Essay
(pages 198–221) (page 214)
Questions about the Model (page 200) . . .
1. Just like words, body language is an important
II. A. 1. b. In Asian countries, faces reveal
and effective form of communication. less emotion, less quickly
Therefore, anyone who intends to live, work, or . . .
study in another country should learn the body
II. A. 2. b. Direct eye contact if interested; language of that culture. unblinking eyes if bored,
2. The topic sentence of each body paragraph
distracted, angry, or defensive
is the first sentence of the paragraph. Body
II. A. 2. c. In Latin America, looking down
Paragraph 1 focuses on communication through used for respect
the human face. Body Paragraph 2 focuses on
II. B. The gestures that people make with
communication through gestures of the head,
their heads, shoulders, arms, and
shoulders, arms, and hands. Body Paragraph
hands are another important means of
3 focuses on communication through physical communicating. contact, or the lack of it.
3. Each body paragraph is introduced by a . . .
transition word: first (Body Paragraph 1),
II. B. 1. b. In Bulgaria, shaking means “Yes”;
another important means of communicating nodding means “No”
(Body Paragraph 2), and in addition to (Body
II. B. 2. A shrug has various means in Paragraph 3). Western culture.
4. The essay uses logical division of ideas. . . .
II. B. 2. b. Shows lack of interest
PRACTICE 1: Comparing Formal and Everyday Vocabulary . . . (page 201)
2. e 3. a 4. g 5. b 6. c 7. h 8. f
II. B. 3. b. Many cultures, “O” means
“everything is OK”; in France
PRACTICE 2: Writing Funnel
and Belgium means “zero” / Introductions
“worthless”, in Japan symbolizes (page 204) money; in Russia, Brazil, and Paragraph 1: 4, 3, 2, 1 Turkey is an insult Paragraph 2: 4, 1, 3, 2 Paragraph 3: 3, 1, 2 . . .
II. C. 1. a. Like personal space around them
PRACTICE 3: Writing Topic Sentences . . .
for Body Paragraphs (page 205)
II. C. 2. b. Rarely hold hands Answers will vary.
Practice 8: Grouping Ideas Logically
PRACTICE 4: Identifying Concluding (page 217)
Paragraphs (page 206) Answers will vary. Essay 2: 2 Essay 3: 2 Essay 4: 1 Try It Out! (page 218) Answers will vary.
PRACTICE 5: Using Transition Signals
PRACTICE 9: Using Formal Vocabulary
between Body Paragraphs (page 210)
Answers will vary. Possible answers include: (page 218) 3. Furthermore 1. various 4. In addition to 2. provides regarding 5. Moreover 3. typically determine 6. On the other hand 4. significant serves 5. estimate sufficient 6. somewhat extended
PRACTICE 6: Adding Transition
Signals to Topic Sentences (page 212)
Answers will vary.
Longman Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book Answer Key 107 c. , In n tio a c u d E n o rs a e P y b 4 1 0 2 © CHAPTER 10
PRACTICE 4: Writing Reasons to
(pages 222–239)
Support an Opinion (page 229)
Questions about the Model Answers will vary. (page 224)
1. The writer’s opinion about homeschooling
appears in the last sentence of the introduction:
Try It Out! (page 230)
Although it may not be the best option for Answers will vary.
all students and all families, I am in favor of
homeschooling for three reasons.
PRACTICE 5: Punctuating Quotations
Based on this thesis statement, the reader can (page 231) expect three body paragraphs. 2. “As a result
2. The writing model contains three body
,” he added,“most young children do
paragraphs. The topic sentence of each body
not spend enough time reading and developing
paragraph is the first sentence of the paragraph. other academic skills.”
Each body paragraph is introduced by a
transition word: first of all (Body Paragraph 1),
3. “My research indicates that nearly 50% of
the second reason that (Body Paragraph 2), and
children ages five to eight have a television in
finally (Body Paragraph 3).
3. Body Paragraph 3 has a concluding sentence:
their bedroom,” Prof. Thompson reported.
As a result of the education that his parents
4. “What is happening to family relationships
gave him, my friend is now a well-balanced
individual who knows how to be an adult and
when children are spending a great deal of time still have fun.
alone, in front of a television?” Prof. Thompson
4. The concluding paragraph acknowledges the
opposing view and then summarizes the benefits asked.
of homeschooling. It ends with a call to action.
5. “In addition to watching television, children
PRACTICE 1: Identifying and Using
as young as age three and a half are now using
Collocations (page 225)
computers on a regular basis” he continued. , H A 2. experienced 6. The professor asked 3. effective ,“how can children get the 4. styles
educational benefits of television and computers 5. computer
without suffering the negative effects of too 6. local 7. counselors much technology?” 8. individual
PRACTICE 6: Identifying Supporting B 2. percentage
Details (page 232) 3. community 1. statistics 4. skills
2. examples and quotations 3. examples
PRACTICE 2: Analyzing Thesis
Statements for Opinion Essays
Try It Out! (page 233) (page 226) Answers will vary.
A The writer is in favor of homeschooling. The
contrast signal that connects the writer’s opinion
PRACTICE 7: Using Collocations
to the opposing point of view is although. (page 235) B but Answers will vary. c.
PRACTICE 3: Writing Thesis
Try It Out! (page 236) , In n tio
Statements for Opinion Essays Answers will vary. a c u d (page 227) E n Answers will vary. o rs a e P y
Try It Out! (page 228) b 4 1 Answers will vary. 0 2 © Longma
n Academic Writing Series 3, Fourth Edition, Teacher’s Manual ● Student Book A nswer Key 108